JP7180922B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, display effects using character images, patterns, and the like can be performed.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there is still room for improvement in terms of techniques for enhancing the interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images and operation means capable of being operated by a player,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first period during which the effect mode can be switched by the player operating the operation means during the variation of the decorative pattern;
After the first period, during the same variation as the first period, a second period in which the production mode is not switched despite the operation of the operation means by the player can be executed. Yes ,
When the player operates the operation means during the second period, the performance mode is not switched during the second period, and the performance mode is switched after the variation during the second period is completed. is displayed, the production mode is switched on the standby screen after the fluctuation during the second period is completed, and the production mode suggesting image that suggests the production mode after switching is displayed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by :

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4; It is explanatory drawing of jackpot classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-work-time-saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a time saving state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9; 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 10 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior determination processing. 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of big hit determination processing. It is the 1st flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is the second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of game state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessary product processing. 4 is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing; It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of V-region sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 4 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a prior determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of basic production|presentation pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of chance up production|presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing in the middle of fluctuation production. 4 is a flowchart of display control processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a movement mode of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display effect of a sub-display screen 64; It is a figure for demonstrating the design mode change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the design mode change production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the design mode change production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a performance mode suggestion image hit notification performance A; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a performance mode suggestion image hit notification performance B; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a performance mode suggestion image hit notification performance C; It is a figure for demonstrating the moving design mode change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the moving design mode change production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the moving design mode change production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the losing mode symbol movement production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the loss mode symbol movement production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the loss mode symbol movement production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern number difference change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern number difference change production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern number difference change production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design superimposition production|presentation A and B. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design superimposition production|presentation C and D. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design superimposition production|presentation E and F. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design change production|presentation A and B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design change production|presentation C and D. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation design change production|presentation E and F. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern attitude|position change production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern attitude|position change production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the pattern attitude|position change production|presentation C. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining band image display effects A and B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining band image display effects C and D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining band image display effects E and F; It is a figure for demonstrating the special trajectory variation production|presentation A and B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the special trajectory variation production|presentation C and D. It is a figure for demonstrating the special trajectory variation production|presentation E and F. It is a figure for demonstrating winning symbol movement production|presentation A and B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating winning symbol movement production|presentation C and D. It is a figure for demonstrating winning symbol movement production E and F. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the design mode change production|presentation A and B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the design mode change production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the design mode change production|presentation D. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining group announcement continuous effects A and B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining group announcement continuous effects C and D; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining group advance notice continuous effects E and F; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining multiple image movement effects A and B; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining multiple image movement effects C and D; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining multiple image movement effects E and F; It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation mode selection production|presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation mode selection production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation mode selection production|presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the separation combination production|presentation A of the production|presentation design. It is a figure for demonstrating the separation combination production|presentation B of the production|presentation design. It is a figure for demonstrating the separation union production|presentation C of the production|presentation design. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a character suggestive effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a character suggestive effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a character suggestive effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations; FIG. 11 is a first diagram for explaining a melody-related effect; FIG. 11 is a second diagram for explaining the melody-related effect; FIG. 11 is a third diagram for explaining the melody-related effect;

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 corresponds to the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1 . Also, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rearward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player to the gaming machine 1 .

The game machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that shoots game balls based on a player's shooting operation, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning when the game balls win in a specific winning device. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50.例文帳に追加The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame. ) 62, effect button 63, sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), sword member 65, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, A frame movable body 69 is provided. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and shoots the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60, movable frame bodies 69 (also referred to as movable frame accessories 69), which are movable so-called gimmicks, are provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured such that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 are movable in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible plate-like member, and is configured such that the main surface moves toward or away from the handle 60 . The frame movable body 69 normally rests at a retracted position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and moves (extends) from the retracted position toward the handle 60 so as to approach each other. ) and stop at a position where the handle 60 is touched. The frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60 when it is in the advanced position.

A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. A surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 . The production button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the effect button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate vertically and horizontally according to the effect. The sword member 65 is an operation part in the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be capable of executing a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in pairs with the game board 2 interposed therebetween. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2 . The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. As shown in FIG. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and emits light during a game. The right frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is an oblique linear light-emitting portion arranged between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right sides of the front frame 53, and produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning device (navel) 19. , a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, and a big winning opening open A starting port 17, a general winning port 27 (ordinary winning port 27), an out port 16, and indicators 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area where the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game pegs for guiding the game ball are protruded. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball shot by operating the handle 60 upwards of the game area 3 . The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3 . Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area in which production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a reserved image display in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. and a suspended digested image display area (the suspended display area) in which the suspended digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending and are also called pending icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also called the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The pending icon 9C may also be simply called a pending icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern (middle decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of patterns representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays the first special symbol and the The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a jackpot is won, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with double numbers such as "777". In the case of a miss, the production pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose pattern such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the pattern display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as a mode of the variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or a mode other than that may be used. It is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set as to what combination of performance symbols to stop display according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is also called "variation effect of effect pattern", "variation effect of decorative symbol", or simply "variation effect" or "variation display". In this decorative pattern variation performance, the performance in the period from when the special pattern starts to stop until it stops (also called a special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance). Therefore, even if there is a case in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbols start to fluctuate until they stop, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the variable performance of the decorative symbols.

The image display device 7 can display, on the display screen 7a, a big win performance performed in parallel with a big win game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc., in addition to the performance symbol variation performance. In the production design variation production, production images such as a background image and a character image may be displayed in addition to the production design. In addition to the effect pattern, the image display device 7 also provides an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can suggest that the special pattern is changing, or that the special pattern lottery result can be suggested. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth pattern) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3 .

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays a reserved image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure reservation described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of memories of the second special figure reservation that will be described later. and a second reserved display area. By the display of the pending images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a described later, and the second special figure suspension displayed on the second special figure suspension display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays a pending digest image 9C. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production pattern (the production pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) currently fluctuating on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b. 2 It is possible to display in an easy-to-understand manner for the player that the special figure reservation is digested ("extraction of special figure suspension" described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member can move in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a, and is displayed on the display screen 7a. can rest in any advanced position in front of the The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom at the advanced position.

Above the image display device 7, a second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) labeled with "OARO" can move in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and is displayed by moving (advancing) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed below the image display device 7 . The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting port 20 which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7 . The warp part 12 has an entrance part into which the game balls flow in and an exit part from which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance part flow out to the stage part 11 from the exit part.

A fixed prize winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is a first start opening (first start winning opening, first ball entry opening) in which the ease with which a game ball enters is always unchanged. port, fixed starting port) 20. Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 triggers a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random number and the like and the jackpot determination and the like.

The normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball entrance, variable starting port) 21. ing. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 triggers a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 has a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21 , and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23 . The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tuning solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball into.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) and the hit determination.

Here, the "lottery of special symbols" means that when a game ball wins in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is determined in advance. It is a process of determining whether or not a big win is made by comparing with the value corresponding to the "big win". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation is performed. When the time elapses, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game for variably displaying performance patterns is performed in synchronism with the variable display of the special patterns, and the result of the lottery of the big win is reported to the player more effectively by the pattern matching game.

In addition, the "lottery of normal symbols" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means the process of judging whether or not it is a hit. As for the lottery result of this normal pattern, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately reported, but the normal pattern is displayed in a normal pattern display device 42 to be described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time elapses, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning port (first special winning port) 30 and , a V region 39 , a non-V region 70 , and a V opening/closing member 71 . The first big prize winning opening 30 is provided with an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that permits or inhibits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first grand prize winning solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first prize winning hole sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specified area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specified area) 70 are configured as areas inside the first big winning device 31 through which game balls that have passed through the first big winning hole 30 can pass. . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30 . The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 . The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to release the game ball. A first state (rotating state) in which the ball is distributed to the V area 39 is entered, and a second state (stopped state) in which the game ball is positioned at the origin and distributed to the non-V area 70 is entered when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . In addition, the V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big winning hole 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. For example, It may be configured to move in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 2 . That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it becomes a retracted state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state in which game balls are distributed to the non-V area 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 triggers a transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. That is, the V region 39 is a variable probability operating port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a variable probability operating port. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31 . The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning port (second special winning port) 35 It has The second big prize winning opening 35 is provided with an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or permits reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The large winning opening opening start opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes. However, the gaming machine 1 does not have to include the big winning opening opening start opening 17 .

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the game area 3 . The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges out of the game area 3 game balls that have not won any prize winning openings. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2 . The details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30 .

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning the first start hole 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to aim to pass through the gate 28 and to win the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. As shown in FIG. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , and a normal map holding display 44 . The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the number of memory of operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special design indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memory of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special design indicator 41b. The normal pattern holding display 44 displays the number of memory of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42 . The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 as a trigger. Below, the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are named generically, and it is also called a "special design." Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state, so that a lottery (lottery per special symbol) based on winning the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is displayed. , jackpot lottery) results. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed (a stop symbol, a special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot pattern (type of jackpot won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) for opening the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display device 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described later), you can say ``○○●●○○●●'' (○: lit, ●: unlit). , 5th and 6th LEDs light up to display the jackpot symbols. If the game is lost, a lost pattern is displayed in which only the rightmost LED lights up, such as "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as the lost pattern. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed (variably displayed) for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may light so that the light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (enters a ball), the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize to the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize to the second start port 21 , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation and execute variable display of special symbols for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols. Even if a prize is won during execution of a special game, the right of a jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43 . The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are each constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on LEDs corresponding to the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stopping the display. A normal pattern to be stopped and displayed (a normal pattern stop pattern, a normal pattern derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one normal pattern selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stop pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (a normal pattern of a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal win pattern with both LEDs lit up is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lights up, ●: lights out). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing pattern in which only the right LED lights up is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be employed as a normal losing pattern. Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the normal symbols are varied and displayed for a predetermined variation time. As for the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may alternately light up. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode, but can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, all LEDs may blink simultaneously in the variable display mode.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as a normal pattern reservation. memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the normal design random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the normal design variable display is performed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game, a prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . The normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal map reserves by lighting the LEDs by the number of normal map reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control section together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. It should be noted that the sub-control section can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90 .

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87 . The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88 . The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large winning opening opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the 2 major winning opening sensor 35a, V area sensor 39a, non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a, 29a are illustrated. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric tuning solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening opening starting opening sensor 17 a is provided inside the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening opening starting opening 17 . The first starting hole sensor 20 a is provided inside the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 20 . The second starting hole sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big winning hole 35 . The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39 . The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70 . The normal winning hole sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the normal winning hole 27 . The normal winning hole sensor 29 a detects a game ball that has passed through the normal winning hole 29 . The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36 . The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31 .

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, and a general design reservation. Display control for the display device 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120 , a rental ball payout device 130 and a card unit 135 , and is connected with a launcher 112 via a launch control circuit 111 . The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. Prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball dispensing device 130 discharges the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rented ball motor 131 of the rented ball payout device 130 based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rented balls. The rented balls to be paid out are detected by a rented ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. Firing device 112 includes handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), firing motor 113 , touch switch 114 , and firing volume 115 . When the player operates the handle 60 , the shooting device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the shooting volume 115 . Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

A sub control board 90 ( FIG. 4 ) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 . The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95 . The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the game effect of the game machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub ROM 93 for storing programs and the like for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 for executing the programs stored in the sub ROM 94. and a CPU 92 . Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102 , a ROM 103 and a RAM 104 . In the ROM 103, in addition to programs for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols are stored. etc. (including production patterns) and image data such as background images are stored. A RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes programs stored in the ROM 103 . The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106 , and based on commands received from the main control board 80 , the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 . etc. is output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 . Note that the audio control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be implemented with a ROM, and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, the sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100. FIG.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. . The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates light emission patterns. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 , the second movable accessory 15 and the frame movable accessory 69 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) for determining the motion mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and operates according to the motion pattern data. It controls the operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and the CPU may execute lighting control of the lamp and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108 . The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. FIG. A vibration motor is attached to the effect button detection switch 63a, and is driven in accordance with a signal from the relay board 108, so that the effect button 63 can be vibrated. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. A sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been detected is also connected to the relay board 108 .

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) contains a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a big winning opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special figure pending storage area 85, and a normal figure pending storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command to be output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main processing (described later), and is a pre-determining command, a pending pitch command, A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, A ceiling flag, a V flag, a variable probability flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a variable probability counter, and a time saving counter. The special action status set area 84d is an area in which a status is set for special action processing, which will be described later. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storing. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first for storing the random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure reservation A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general pattern reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reservation information) such as normal pattern random numbers (per random numbers) corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th general pattern reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also contains a win type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer and the like are provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information described above do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Also, as the initial state of the counters, "500" is set in the ceiling counter, and "0" is set in the other counters.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 . Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later). A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area ( It is an output buffer), and a variable production start command, a command before the end of fluctuation, a variable production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where the counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, a first special figure pending effect counter, a second special figure pending effect counter, a general figure pending effect counter. , Ceiling production counter, overnight production counter, probability variable production counter, time saving production counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight effect counter is maintained without being cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the late-night production counter, and advance determination information do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The overnight performance counter is reset by turning off and on the power of the game machine 1, and 0 is set as an initial state. Information stored in the sub RAM 94 is reset by RAM clear of the gaming machine 1 . When reset, 500 is set in the ceiling effect counter and 0 is set in the other counters as the initial state of the counter.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. there is The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "fluctuation pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at the timing described later. is configured as The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery (jackpot determination) to determine whether or not a jackpot will be won, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (jackpot type determination) of the type of the winning jackpot, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. "Reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect that indicates the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. take. Reach is a state in which only one of the plurality of production patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a variable manner remains, and it depends on which design the variable display design is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, the state of "7↓7") that is a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot winning. In addition, the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if it is shaking within the display screen 7a. “Variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 . The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-255. The "jackpot random number", "jackpot type random number", "reach random number", and "fluctuation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random value group obtained based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group obtained based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. “Normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is acquired based on passing through the gate 28 . The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 86 .

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "read-ahead effect random number" and a "chance-up random number" at timings described later. ``Random number for look-ahead effect'' is a random number used for determining the look-ahead effect at the time of variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0-127. The "read-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94 . The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8 (A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and the jackpot random value is a number other than "0 to 164 (165 to 65535 )” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random value is "0 to 649", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random value is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" is determined to be "losing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains a reach random number (any of 0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". This table is referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined to be "with reach", and the reach random value is a number other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)” is determined to be “no reach”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is reach, and if the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)" is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-working time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach at the time of loss is less likely to be applied in the time saving state than in the non-working time saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by selecting more reach no loss with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random number value (any one of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "win" or "loss". This table is referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8 (C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 2", it is determined to be "hit", and the normal symbol random number is a number other than "0 to 2 (3 ~ 255)” is determined to be “losing”. Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , is determined as “losing”.

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This table is referenced to In FIG. 8 (D), when the "non-time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and when the "time-saving state", the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second". is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), according to the jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired, "jack type" and "special symbol It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 1 stop design (special stop design) is determined as "jackpot design 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop design is determined as "jackpot design 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (real 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop pattern is determined as "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passage scheduled jackpot", and the special figure 2 A stop symbol (a special figure stop symbol) is determined to be a "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined as "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined as "jackpot symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, special game "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED) command" can also be specified. For the specific contents of "16RV planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V planned passage jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V planned passage jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passage planned jackpot" will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 during the time saving state. Variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired in main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. . In FIG. 10, for example, the first start port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, it is determined to be "losing" in the big hit determination table T1, it is determined to be "with reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of retained balls is "1 ~ 2" and the variation pattern random number is "0 to 60", the variation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the time saving state, it is determined as "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, variation pattern random value is "0 to 10", the variation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. In SP1-3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in order to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12(A), the open pattern of the electric tube 22 is determined as "open pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 12" in the "time saving state". is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of open pattern 11 and open pattern 12 . In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened once for 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric tube 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize (prescribed number of winning prizes, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referenced to determine the T.35 opening pattern. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21 ”, and when the special figure stop design data is “14H”, “15H”, “22H”, the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop design data is “13H”, open It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of open pattern 21, open pattern 22, and open pattern 23. FIG. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of times of opening is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The opening (long opening) of the second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 second for 1 time at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the number of openings is 1 and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). The second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big prize winning port 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the opening of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is, if there is a predetermined number of game ball wins (regular winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined as "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol data When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop design data is "14H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 33", and the special figure stop design data is It is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34" when "15H" or "22H". FIG. 14B shows the contents of open pattern 31, open pattern 32, open pattern 33, and open pattern . In the opening pattern 31, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is reached. A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R's, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is A long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is won. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with an opening time of maximum 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 second. .
open the port.

4. Explanation of Big Wins, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins" and "losses" as a result of a big win lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big win", the special symbol display 41 stops displaying "big win". In the case of "losing", the special symbol display 41 stops and displays "losing". When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game opens the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. there is Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round. The closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types, namely, "V-passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". The ``V passage scheduled jackpot'' operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage scheduled opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the big winning game. It's a big hit. Here, special figure stop symbol data 11H~14H, 21H big hits correspond to "V passage scheduled big hits (probability variable big hits)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. ), or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a big win that activates the V opening/closing member 71 . Here, the jackpots with the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. Passage of a game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

The "V passage expected jackpot" includes "16RV expected passage jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot". The "16RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the 2nd big prize-winning mouth 35 for maximum 29.5 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the rounds are such that no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 33 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

"16R (substantial 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 14R The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short and no prize balls can be expected. In other words, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passage scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened ( FIG. 14 : opening pattern 32 ), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and 14R are open. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (Fig. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short, making it a round in which prize balls cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantially 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is short opening (Fig. It is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above description, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In addition, as will be described later, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed after the jackpot game is completed. It's becoming That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes a low-probability short-time state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, and the game state after the jackpot is highly certain. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy high base state). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state after the jackpot is not certain. It becomes difficult to determine whether it will be a time saving state (low probability high base state) or a high probability time saving state (high probability high base state). In addition, after the time-saving game is finished, the game state becomes a low probability base state (normal state) in "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the game state in "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" appears to be in a normal high probability low base state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning hole 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state is A high-probability-low base state with a high probability becomes a latent state (variable latent probability state), and it is difficult for the player to discern the variable latent probability state. That is, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" Low probability time saving state (low probability high base state) and “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” high-precision time-saving state (high-precision high-base state) after the jackpot game, and “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” time-saving end The later low-probability-low base state and the high-probability-low base state after the time-saving end of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing scheduled jackpot and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) is performed by winning a game ball in the first start port 20, and the jackpot is performed by winning a game ball in the second start port 21. The lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Explanation of Game State The game state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display device 42, respectively. is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display device 41 is called "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and the probability variation A non-controlled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbols. A high probability state is realized by performing a big hit determination. Therefore, in the high-probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbols of the special symbol display device 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the special symbol display device 41 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern becomes a jackpot pattern increases.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs variable time shortening control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the variable time shortening control is not performed is simply a "non-time saving state". It says. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, when in the time saving state, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) is determined so that the variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41, the special symbols are variable compared to the case where the variation time shortening control is not performed. A short variation time is likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure reservation) is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbols of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with variation time shortening control for the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 . That is, the game control microcomputer 81 normally executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as the probability variation control of normal symbols, normal symbol hit determination table T3 ( Using FIG. 8 (C)), hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control on the normal symbols of the normal symbol display device 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed, the normal symbol display device 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than the non-working time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state (Fig. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control for the electric chew 22 . In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the control for increasing the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 . game control microcomputer 81, the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of balls awarded to the number of balls fired, increases. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called the "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called the "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric sapo control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, the probability variation control for the normal pattern of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22 By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more likely to be opened than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electrical support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high-probability state, a short-time state and a high-base state if the passage to the V area 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability short working time state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game is in the high-probability-high base state is, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot". "16RV scheduled passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are such that, in the high probability high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. ends with "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is a high-probability-high base state, after the jackpot game, a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) special symbol variable display is executed High-probability low base state (latent probability variable state), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is normal probability state (non-high probability state (i.e., low-probability state) and time-saving state and high-base state. This game state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state". Specifically, the jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes the low-probability base state is the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” among the jackpot types shown in FIG. In this jackpot, in the low-probability base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. The game ends when the game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability low base state may be referred to as "normal game state" or "low-probability non-time-saving state (simply referred to as non-time-saving state)". In addition, the state during execution of the special game (jackpot game) may be referred to as "special game state (jackpot game state)". Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific game state".

In high-base states such as high-probability-high base state and low-probability-high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting to the right. Due to the electric sapo control, it is easier to open the electric tube 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second start opening 21 than the first start opening 20. be. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is struck to the right to win the game ball to the second start port 21.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting prizes (winning at the starting opening) than when hitting left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting to the left. Since the electric sapo control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than the second start opening 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, left-handed hitting is performed in order to win the game ball to the first start hole 20. - 特許庁This allows you to get more starting prizes than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84 . The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success/failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the success/failure preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 . In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. As for the initial value of the flag, the ceiling flag is "1", ie, "ON", and the initial value of the other flags is "0", ie, "OFF". The initial value of status is "1". The initial value of the counter is "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal design/special design main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , Normal random number) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, it is possible to execute main-side timer interrupt processing (step S005). The main-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, 4 msec intervals). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing is finished, until the next main side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 while interrupts are disabled, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after interrupts are enabled.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the processing for updating the various random number counter values consists of the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). and both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole to the main RAM 84. set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting opening sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V area sensor detection process (step S106), reserved ball The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the sub-control board 90 the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processing, for example, based on the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls described later, the second special-figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number, and the first special-figure based on the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls The pending indicator 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal pattern reserved balls is the number of normal pattern reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the normal design reserved ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal design reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal design reserved balls (step S203), normal design random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: label-TRND-H value), and stores the acquired random number in the first to normal symbol reservation storage areas 86 of the main RAM 84. Among the fourth storage areas, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reservation balls is the number of second special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: label-TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (Figure 7: label -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: Label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 reservation ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20. FIG. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. When the game ball wins the first start port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" ( step S211). The number of special figure 1 reservation balls is the number of the first special figure reservations, and more specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84 . If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the obtained random number group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. stored (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the variable probability flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big-hit prior determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of whether or not a big hit is made by using a big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and a big hit random number value. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the jackpot determination tables T1. Refer to it and determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "649", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". In addition, in this embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "losing" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, a jackpot type random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the buffer for pre-determination by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208) to get Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs prior determination of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random value is any of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance as "16RV passage scheduled jackpot". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) to be described later, but as another embodiment, different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs fluctuation pattern prior determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, variation pattern random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And get the reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, Reach presence or absence pre-determined results obtained from the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern is specified from the fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that can be selected depending on the difference in the number of held balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, it is pre-determined that there is a reach, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1-2 and the variation pattern "P68" which is selected when the number of held balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the later-described variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) is used for preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special figure 2 pre-determining process described above, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot prior determination (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213) do. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the normal probability state table (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot determination table T1. ”), it is determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "losing". Incidentally, for the jackpot preliminary determination, a jackpot determination table for prior determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. After that, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the description is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of normal operation processing (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is fluctuating (step S502). When the normal pattern is fluctuating (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of pending balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is temporarily set to "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is digested and immediately the number of reserved balls of the normal design becomes “0”. This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) to be described later. At S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 is, first, the normal pattern random number value ( random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not the game is successful. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when the normal symbol random number is "0" to "2", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as "losing". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal design as a pattern. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbols has passed and ended. The variable time in the normal design is the variable time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). When the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variable time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variable display (step S509), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22. to select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chewing operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above-described step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for closing the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or the time to close the electric chew 22 after the operating time of the electric chew 22 has passed Either one of the things that has been reached is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special operation processing (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display device 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which has a "special action status" of "1", Call them "2", "3", and "4". When the "special action status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special action status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation process, the output of the fluctuation stop command and the like are executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special action status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of the big hit. When the "special action status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessary product process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special action status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second start port 21 If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, decrement the number of special figure 2 reserved balls by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 moves the storage location of the pending information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure pending storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, clear the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, when pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, clear the pending information stored in the fourth storage area. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the leftmost reserved image 9B) is It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (out of the four reserved images 9B, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left) are on the left side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1402) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on variation time).

In step S1401, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" ( step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a If not stored, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. Along with clearing the pending information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure pending storage area 85a (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (of the four reserved images 9A, the rightmost reserved image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a It shifts to the pending digested image display area side and is displayed as a pending digested image 9C. In addition, reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (out of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side Shift by one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variable time timer is set with a variable time determined according to the variable pattern selected in the variable pattern selection process. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information on the special figure stop pattern data set in the big hit determination process (step S1408) and variation pattern selection process ( It contains information on the variation pattern (including information on variation time) set in step S1409).

In step S1407, when the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by ON/OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for customer waiting. If the standby screen is displayed (step S1413: YES), the process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for the lapse of the predetermined standby time, and sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, digestion of the second special figure reservation is executed with priority over digestion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure reservation is a jackpot (V passage scheduled jackpot) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure reservation. It has become easier to be elected to

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the big hit determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Special Figure 2 big hit determination process (step S1402) and special figure 1 big hit determination process (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described collectively. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the high-probability state table in the big-hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) is referred to and the big-hit determination is performed (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a big hit random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number value to refer to. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") among the big hit determination tables T1 judge.

In step S1501, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the big hit determination ( step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is in the normal probability state (probability variable flag is OFF), it is possible to determine whether the jackpot determine whether or not

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After judging the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the special figure stop design data (01H) corresponding to the losing design is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , the process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) are similar in process flow, so they will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Determination of whether or not it is in the time saving state is made depending on whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is a time saving state (step S1600: YES), a process transfers to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the process skips to step S1605 because the jackpot type is always the V passage schedule jackpot. When the jackpot is the special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop design data that has been done.

If the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ” ~ “P3” part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is “P21” ~ “P23” part) is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random number, in special figure 1, either "P1" ~ "P3" as a variation pattern, in special figure 2, either "P21" ~ "P23" is selected.

If the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination tables T6 (FIG. 10). to select a variation pattern (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P4" to "P6") of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. ) are referenced. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ready-to-win random number is a ready-to-win random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a reach random number as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number. Here, because it is a non-time-saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach based on the table for the non-time-saving state (reach determination value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13" part) Determine presence/absence.

When the reach random number is the reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of reach with loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-saving state reach, out of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P14", the part of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the number of the current special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P24" ~ "P31" is selected as the variation pattern. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, in both special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are being selected more often. As a result, when the number of retained balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure retention can be increased.

When the reach random number is not the reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to a non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected by referring to the reach-less loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state reach-less loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The part of "P16", the part of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value read out and the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls (1 to 4) are selected as the variation pattern, either "P15" or "P16". In the special figure 2, the read variation pattern random number, from the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls (1 to 4), either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern. Also here, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of held balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, so the description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609 different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, for time saving state The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot (in the special figure 1, the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is "P41" ~ "P43" part, in the special figure 2 the variation pattern is "P61" ~ "P63" part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random number, either "P41" ~ "P43" as a variation pattern in the special figure 1, "P61" ~ "P63" in the special figure 2 is selected. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot ("P44 ” to “P46”) are referred to. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and finishes this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process ( FIG. 16 : step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbols started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special action status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of time saving, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special action status to "1" (step S1808), and terminates this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is performed again, and the jackpot determination and the like for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop pattern data, and selects the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the variable probability flag and the time saving flag, and the contents thereof will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special action status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Game State Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set to the variable probability counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the variable probability counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the variable probability counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the variable probability flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state. Here, "100" is set to the time-saving counter at the time of transition to the time-saving state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. In the game state designation command, information about the current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON, ceiling counter value, probability variable state, probability variable counter value, time saving state, time saving counter value, etc.) include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until b time saving (play time) is reached, and counts the number of special symbol variations executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during a low probability state). . Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" is set to the ceiling counter as the prescribed number of revolutions. As a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2012). That is, it is determined whether or not the specified number of rotations has passed until reaching b time saving (play time). If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the variable probability counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched to ON (step S2013), and "700" is set to the time saving counter as the number of times of saving time (the number of times given). Then, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of game state reset processing (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this processing ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is turned OFF (step S2106). That is, during execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “jackpot end flag” is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) have been opened based on the opening pattern in the jackpot game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big winning hole 30. In the V opening/closing member operation process, The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when a predetermined game ball wins. The details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning openings (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize gate is, for example, when the time for opening the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big prize gate that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big winning slot (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the type of big win. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information about the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84 . In addition, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In the above-described step S2202, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes won into the big prize gate in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or that the time has come to close the big prize gate. (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has passed since the opening of the big winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not established (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, two seconds) has passed since the big winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the big winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has passed since the big winning opening was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (step S2227), and a jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled It has the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" for the player, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" , it can be made to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V area 39 . Incidentally, the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passage scheduled jackpot" has the same length as these. After starting the ending of the jackpot, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing is finished.

In the above-described step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special action status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation processing (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (current round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71 . The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7" and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning to the first big winning hole 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 .

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is short-opened is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), in either case of "short opening" or "long opening", the first ball wins. This is for the purpose of executing a short release (here, 0.1 seconds) at times. In the short opening of the V opening and closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 It is configured to pass through the V region 70 . In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is opened and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and the V opening/closing member 71 is being opened. and 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determine that the game ball detection by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 is that there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. The period until the game ball entering the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a is considered. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned on when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to be turned ON. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the variable probability flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (see FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being set to a high probability state by turning on the V flag based on passing through the V due to a fraudulent act. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first big winning hole 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The reason why the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long is that in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (Fig. 14(B)), in the case of "long opening", when the second ball wins, the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) ) is executed. In addition, here, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the big winning opening is 29.5 seconds + interval closing time is 2 seconds), generally, the winning of the second ball is The time from hour to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 has a relatively long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big prize opening 30 will move through the V area 39. configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period during opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period together with closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, two seconds) has elapsed since the big winning opening was closed. make a judgment.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and several seconds (here, one second) after the closing of the V opening/closing member 71, the V invalid period. set and finish this processing.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be, for example, that a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 in the case of short-circuit opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and this processing ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the process ends while the V opening/closing member 71 is kept open and the V effective period continues.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns OFF the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set to the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "non-high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns ON the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "100" to the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes "high probability state", "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability and high base). This high-probability/high-base state ends when either condition is satisfied, that is, the variable display of special symbols is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and sets the ceiling counter to "500" as the prescribed number of rotations until b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the jackpot game, when the variable probability flag is OFF, when the game hits 500 times, it enters b time saving (play time). In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specifying command includes information about the set game state (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability variable flag, probability variable counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is during the V valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th rounds. be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Processing of pending pitches]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls. . After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of Production Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the operation explanation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94 .

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing a sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 . In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupt processing (step S4015), and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. Moreover, the random number may be added by 2 or more instead of adding 1 each time. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. After the sub-side timer interrupt processing ends, the random number update processing is repeatedly executed until the next sub-side timer interrupt processing is started.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs the process during the fluctuation production (step S4305). The process during fluctuation production is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the fluctuation production to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display production, the details of which will be described later. After the processing during the variation production, the production control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc. , to the relay board 108 . The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes an audio effect of outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. Upon receiving various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number update processing.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). "Prefetching effect determination processing" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect, and determining a prefetching effect pattern in the case of execution. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described look-ahead effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is a effect suggesting that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 contains a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a pending ball number command from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the pending display process, based on the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command, provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 The values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the normal figure reservation effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure pending effect counter, the second special figure pending effect counter, and the general figure pending effect counter, the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), change production start processing is performed (step S4460). "Variation production start processing" is a process of selecting a variation production pattern (contents) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not received (step S4455: NO), it skips the above-mentioned fluctuation production|presentation start processing.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), change effect end processing is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is a process for stopping the variation effect that is executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production. As a result, the decoration pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 during fluctuation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets the information on the special figure stop pattern data set at the time of judging the winning of the jackpot, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94.例文帳に追加Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is sent to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. , and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). "Round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds contained in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and the round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation|designated command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round production|presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). "Ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processes, for example, the effect control microcomputer 91, when receiving the game state designation command, information on the game state included in the game state designation command (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability variation flag, probability variation counter, ceiling flag , ceiling counter, etc.) are stored in the sub-RAM 94 . Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time reduction effect counter, probability variable effect counter, and ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 are updated. For example, the number of remaining fluctuations (number of games) during time reduction is set in a time reduction performance counter, the number of remaining fluctuations in probability variation is set in a probability variation performance counter, and the remaining variation frequency until reaching the ceiling is set in a ceiling performance counter. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub-control board 90 side can hold the information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability variations, and the number of ceilings. Moreover, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control makes sub RAM94 hold|maintain the information which V passed, when V passage command is received. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type advance judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation The pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In the advance determination information storage area 94c, prefetch effect pattern information is stored in addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39 (A) shows that as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figures 2 pending, the jackpot determination information "losing" and the variation pattern information "P72" "P73" are the first to third A state in which the data is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area is shown. FIG. 39(B) shows that there is a special figure 2 winning prize from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A ” is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the 4, the pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not prefetch effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "loss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not it is a “big hit” or a “losing with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). The effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach" (step S4603: NO). This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "jackpot" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, And, look-ahead effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the prefetch effect random number random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether to perform or not, and the look-ahead effect pattern in the case of performing the look-ahead effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, if the pre-determination result is "big hit" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "56-67", the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-judgment result is "losing with reach" and the pre-reading effect random value is "0 to 107", the pre-reading effect will be "none", and if the pre-reading effect random value is "108-114", as a pre-reading effect When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-read effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area A look-ahead rendering pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39B, in addition to setting "Pattern A" in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, the first to third storage areas and Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variable effects corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it is executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information on the special figure stop design data included in the variation start command and the information on the variation pattern to the sub-RAM 94 . The set information includes the game state information indicating the current game state, the pattern information indicating the pattern as the determination result of the hit determination process of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 .

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs basic production pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic production pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable production (for example, the display of the background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, the display of a predetermined character and its operation, the output of the melody and sound effect using the speaker 67). , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to a basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine a basic effect pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns for normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP2 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns for SP3 performance, There are multiple types of basic production patterns that perform a loss production without reach. The type of basic effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach-less loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up effect pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. A performance control microcomputer 91 acquires a counter value of a chance-up random number, and determines a chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in a sub ROM 93. - 特許庁

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the part which decides the fluctuation production pattern of special figure 1 at the time of non time saving state among chance up production pattern decision table T53 is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows the chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 has a portion for determining the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be provided.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP2" "2-SP3" "3-NO" "3-SP1" "3-SP2" "3-SP3" " 4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3" and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs count effect pattern determination processing (step S5016). Here, the count effect pattern determination process is the number of remaining fluctuations at the time of probability change (number of games), the number of remaining fluctuations during time saving, the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on, and the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game This is a process for displaying the number of times of change and the like on the display screen 7a. The performance control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variation remaining number of times on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability variation performance counter at the time of probability variation. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variable remaining number of times based on the value of the time saving effect counter during time saving.

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects based on the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the overnight effect counter. The ceiling performance counter stores the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and the overnight performance counter stores the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on. The effect control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations from power-on by, for example, incrementing an overnight effect counter each time a variable effect end command is received from the main control board 80 . The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the overnight effect counter is TH1 (eg TH1=10) is below TH2 (eg TH2=200). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is greater than TH2, no chance image is displayed. As a result, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that the RAM clear has not been performed. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the overnight production counter is TH3 (for example, TH3=50). Moreover, the effect control microcomputer 91 may turn off the display representing the value of the ceiling effect counter and the chance image again when the value of the overnight effect counter is TH4 (eg, TH4=100). Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 may display again the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the overnight production counter is TH5 (for example, TH5=200). The effect control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling effect counter as described above based on the value of the overnight effect counter, or may determine based on the value of the ceiling effect counter. good too. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH6 (eg, TH6=100), and the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH7 (eg, TH7=70). When , the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be turned off, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (eg, TH8=50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 may refer to the random number and stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed. Based on these, it is determined what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 is realized ( step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variable effect image. It is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and terminates this process. A variable time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation effect]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the processing during the fluctuation effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable production is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variable effect timer is zero. If the variable effect is not being executed (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 or the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect. When the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command , the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc., in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of variation.

If it is not the timing to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-variation end command containing the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-fluctuation end command that does not include look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is the look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the look-ahead effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead effect for displaying a look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

9. Movement of Movable Body and Display Effect of Sub Display Screen 64 Using FIGS. 69) and the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, and the like. do In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub-display screen 64 during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like.

46A and 46B are explanatory diagrams exemplifying movement modes of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, the upper end of which is located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and the lower end thereof is located near the lower end of the image display device 7 . The upper end and lower end of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the central portion is visible in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). At the retracted position, the first movable accessory 14 may be partially stored and the remaining part may be visible, or the whole may be stored and difficult to be seen. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 . It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen 7a. In addition, it can stand still at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be arbitrarily set. Also, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second mode). At least a part of the first movable accessory 14 may have a decorative portion, or may have transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion labeled "OARO" and is configured to be vertically movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can rest at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to be visually recognized. The second movable accessory 15 moves downward toward the center of the display screen 7a from the state shown in FIG. 1, and can stand still at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode). . In this second mode, the decorative portion stops in front of the image display device 7 (front surface) so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retreat) upward from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 to move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it can stand still.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the frame movable accessory 69. As shown in FIG. The movable frame accessory 69 is composed of a pair of plate-like members arranged on both left and right sides of the handle 60, and each is configured to be movable in the left and right direction. The two members are formed of flexible members, and are configured so that one major surface of each member moves toward or away from the handle 60 . As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the movable frame accessory 69 are normally stationary at retracted positions (home positions) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60 (first mode). . As shown in FIG. 49 , the two members of the movable frame accessory 69 move (advance) from the retracted position toward the direction of approaching the handle 60 , that is, move closer to each other and approach the handle 60 respectively. It can rest at the touching position (second aspect). The movable frame accessory 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player operating the handle 60 when it is in the advanced position. The movable frame accessory 69 can move in a direction in which the two members are separated from each other so as to change from the second mode to the first mode.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory view showing an example of the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display an image. Moreover, it is possible to perform an effect linked with the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Aspect Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each effect example (display effect example, character object movable effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effect to be described from now on is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, based on the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). It should be noted that the following display rendering example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 or the like. In some cases, the pending display (holding icon) is omitted in the display effect example.

The symbol mode change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. This pattern mode change effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pattern mode change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Pattern mode change effect A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect A. FIG. The pattern mode change effect is a effect in which the mode of at least a part of the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a changes when the decorative patterns constitute the ready-to-win state. 51(A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol mode change effect A, and FIGS. 51(G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol mode change effect A. FIG.

In the first example of the pattern mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 8R2 and third decorative patterns 8L3, 8C3, and 8R3 are displayed. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The first decorative designs 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are a set of designs including a left decorative design 8L1, a middle decorative design 8C1, and a right decorative design 8R1 displayed above the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The second decorative designs 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are a set of designs including a left decorative design 8L2, a middle decorative design 8C2, and a right decorative design 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The third decorative patterns 8L3, 8C3, 8R3 are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L3, a middle decorative pattern 8C3, and a right decorative pattern 8R3 displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is represented by the variable display, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols.

The variable display of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are independent of each other, while representing the variable display of the same special pattern (special pattern variation), and the corresponding special pattern lottery result. is lost, all of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped in a lost mode. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern is a hit, at least one of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is determined and stopped in a winning mode. . Here, the fluctuation start timings of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the fluctuation stop timings of the left decorative pattern, the right decorative pattern, and the middle decorative pattern are all the same, but the first to third The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be different. In FIG. 51(A), the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are respectively variably displayed corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation).

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 are in the losing mode of "3↓2", the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are in the ready-to-win mode of "7↓7". 3 decorative symbols 8L3, 8C3, and 8R3 are in the losing mode of "4↓3". Here, one or more of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach and temporarily stop, and the other decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may temporarily stop without forming a reach. In other words, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in any one or more of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state. Other decorative symbols in the same symbol row (the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R) as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped forming the reach may be temporarily stopped without forming the reach.

In FIG. 51(C), the symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 constitute the reach of "7↓7", the decorative patterns different from the decorative patterns that constitute the reach displayed on the display screen 7a (the first and third (decorative pattern) changes. Specifically, "3" of the left decorative design 8L1 and "2" of the right decorative design 8R1 of the first decorative design are overlapped to display "x". Similarly, "x" is displayed overlapping "4" of the left decorative design 8L3 and "3" of the right decorative design 8R3 of the third decorative design. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the "x" is displayed on the left and right decorative symbols of the first and third decorative symbols is the first mode, and the mode after the "x" is superimposed and displayed is the mode. This is the second aspect. As a result, of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, the first and third decorative patterns are lost, and the player's attention is drawn to the second decorative pattern. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 51(D), after the mode of the first and third decorative designs has changed, the mode of the second decorative design that constitutes reach changes to a mode different from the first and third decorative designs. . Specifically, "7" of the left decorative design 8L2 and "7" of the right decorative design 8R2 of the second decorative design are enlarged and displayed, and a rectangular frame surrounding them is displayed. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative patterns of the second decorative pattern are enlarged and displayed is the first mode, and the mode after being enlarged and displayed and surrounded by a rectangular frame is the third mode. is. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the second decorative symbol in the ready-to-win state.

As shown in FIG. 51(E), the mode of the second decorative design forming reach returns from the third mode to the first mode. Specifically, when the fluctuation speed of each of the middle decorative patterns 8C of the first to third decorative patterns decreases and the patterns become visible, the second decoration displayed enlarged and surrounded by a rectangular frame is displayed. "7" of the left decorative design 8L2 and "7" of the right decorative design 8R2 are reduced to the normal size, and the rectangular frames surrounding them disappear. As a result, the symbols can be returned to the normal state before performing the changing performance of the symbols at the time of stopping the determination of the big win, and the winning performance can be conspicuous. In addition, even in the case of a loss determination stop, it is possible to prevent the enlarged pattern from being misunderstood as an effect with a high degree of expectation for winning.

As shown in FIG. 51(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C of each of the first to third decorative patterns is stopped, and when the first to third decorative patterns are fixed and stopped, the first and third decorations are displayed. The mode of the design returns from the second mode to the first mode. Specifically, when the middle decorative pattern 8C of each of the first to third decorative patterns is temporarily stopped, it overlaps with "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L1 and "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R1 of the first decorative pattern. The display of the "x" that was displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L3 and the "x" superimposed on the third decorative pattern "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L3 and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R3 disappears. As a result, it is possible to show the fixed stop symbols (final lottery result) of each of the first to third decorative symbols in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. It should be noted that the timing of returning the mode of the first and third decorative symbols from the second mode to the first mode may be the same timing as the confirmation stop of the first to third decorative designs, or before the confirmation stop. or after the final stop.

In the second example of the pattern mode change effect A, as in the first example, first, as shown in FIG. 2 decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 and third decorative patterns 8L3, 8C3, 8R3 are displayed. The first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are respectively variably displayed corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation).

As shown in FIG. 51(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 are in the reach mode of "7↓7", the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are in the reach mode of "6↓6", and the second 3 decorative symbols 8L3, 8C3, and 8R3 are in the losing mode of "4↓3". Here, one or more of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach and temporarily stop, and the other decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may temporarily stop without forming a reach. In other words, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in any one or more of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state. Other decorative symbols in the same symbol row (the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R) as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped forming the reach may be temporarily stopped without forming the reach.

In FIG. 51(H), the symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since the first and second decorative patterns constitute reach of "7↓7" and "6↓6", a decorative pattern (third (decorative pattern)) will change. Specifically, "4" of the left decorative design 8L3 of the third decorative design, "↓" of the middle decorative design, and "3" of the right decorative design 8R3 are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the third decorative pattern is displayed in reduced size at the lower right of the display screen 7a is the first mode, and the mode after the reduced display is the second mode. As a result, of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, the third decorative pattern is lost, and the player's attention is focused on the first and second decorative patterns. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 51(I) and 51(J), after the mode of the third decorative design has changed, the mode of the decorative design satisfying the predetermined condition among the first and second decorative designs forming the reach is It changes to a mode different from that of the third decorative pattern. Here, the predetermined condition is whether or not the pattern is "13579". Therefore, the first decorative pattern "7↓7" satisfies the condition, but the second decorative pattern "6↓6" does not satisfy the condition. Therefore, here, only the aspect of the first decorative pattern changes. Specifically, "7" of the left decorative design 8L1 and "7" of the right decorative design 8R1 of the first decorative design are magnified and displayed while swinging left and right. That is, the state of tilting to the right (FIG. 51(I)) and the state of tilting to the left (FIG. 51(J)) are alternately repeated. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol are enlarged and displayed is the first mode, and the mode after being enlarged and displayed is the third mode. The aspect of the second decorative design does not change. In this way, there are cases where the form of the decorative pattern that constitutes the reach changes, and there are cases where it does not change. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first decorative pattern in the reach mode, and to give surprise when the second decorative pattern stops in the win mode. can.

As shown in FIG. 51(K), the mode of the first decorative pattern that constitutes reach returns from the third mode to the first mode. Specifically, when the fluctuation speed of each of the middle decorative patterns 8C of the first to third decorative patterns decreases and the patterns become visible, the first decoration in the state of being enlarged and oscillating left and right is displayed. "7" of the left decorative pattern 8L1 and "7" of the right decorative pattern 8R1 of the patterns are reduced to the normal size, and the swinging stops. As a result, the symbols can be returned to the normal state before performing the changing performance of the symbols at the time of stopping the determination of the big win, and the winning performance can be conspicuous. In addition, even in the case of a loss determination stop, it is possible to suppress misunderstanding that the enlarged and swayed pattern is an effect with a high degree of expectation for winning.

As shown in FIG. 51(L), the middle decorative pattern 8C of each of the first to third decorative patterns is stopped, and when the first to third decorative patterns are fixed and stopped, the third decorative pattern is displayed. The aspect returns from the second aspect to the first aspect. Specifically, when the middle decorative pattern 8C of the first to third decorative patterns is temporarily stopped, the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed to a normal size, and the display position is also normal from the lower right of the display screen 7a. position. As a result, it is possible to show the fixed stop symbols (final lottery result) of each of the first to third decorative symbols in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. It should be noted that the timing of returning the mode of the third decorative pattern from the second mode to the first mode may be the same timing as the determination stop of the first to third decorative designs, or before the determination stop. It may be after the fixed stop.

[Pattern mode change effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect B. FIG. The pattern mode change effect is a effect in which the mode of at least a part of the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a changes when the decorative patterns constitute the ready-to-win state. 52(A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol mode change effect B, and FIGS. 52(G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol mode change effect B. FIG.

In the first example of the pattern mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 8R2 and third decorative patterns 8L3, 8C, and 8R3 are displayed. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The first decorative designs 8L1, 8C, 8R1 are displayed from top to bottom in the center of the display screen 7a sandwiched between the left decorative design 8L1 and the right decorative design 8R1 displayed above the display screen 7a. It is a set of patterns including the middle decoration pattern 8C, the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation) is represented by the variable display of the set of patterns, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the set of patterns. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The second decorative designs 8L2, 8C, and 8R2 are the left decorative design 8L2 and the right decorative design 8R2 that are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and are sandwiched between them and displayed from top to bottom in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a set of patterns including the middle decoration pattern 8C, the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation) is represented by the variable display of the set of patterns, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the set of patterns. The third decorative designs 8L3, 8C, and 8R3 are sandwiched between the left decorative design 8L3 and the right decorative design 8R3 displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a and displayed from top to bottom in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a set of patterns including the middle decoration pattern 8C, the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variation) is represented by the variable display of the set of patterns, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the set of patterns.

The variable display of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is the left and right decorative patterns 8L, 8R.
are independent of each other, while the middle decorative symbols 8C share one symbol arrangement. The vertical arrangement intervals of the pattern arrays included in the middle decorative pattern 8C are equal to the vertical display intervals of the first, second and third decorative patterns. Is displayed. When the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, three stopped patterns are displayed as the stopped patterns of the middle decorative patterns of the first, second and third decorative patterns, respectively.

The variable display of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R represents the variable display of the same special pattern (special pattern fluctuation), and if the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern is lost, All of the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing mode. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern is a hit, at least one of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is determined and stopped in a winning mode. . Here, the fluctuation start timings of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the fluctuation stop timings of the left decorative pattern, the right decorative pattern, and the middle decorative pattern are all the same, but the first to third The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be different. In FIG. 52(A), the first to third decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are respectively variably displayed corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation).

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C, and 8R1 are in the losing mode of "3↓2", the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C, and 8R2 are in the ready-to-win mode of "7↓7". 3 decorative symbols 8L3, 8C, and 8R3 are in a losing mode of "4↓3". Here, one or more of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach and temporarily stop, and the other decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may temporarily stop without forming a reach. In other words, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in any one or more of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state. Other decorative symbols in the same symbol row (the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R) as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped forming the reach may be temporarily stopped without forming the reach.

In FIG. 52(C), a symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C, and 8R2 constitute the reach of "7↓7", the decorative patterns different from the decorative patterns that constitute the reach displayed on the display screen 7a (the first and third (decorative pattern) changes. Specifically, "3" of the left decorative design 8L1 and "2" of the right decorative design 8R1 of the first decorative design are reduced and displayed sideways. Similarly, "4" of the left decorative design 8L3 and "3" of the right decorative design 8R3 of the third decorative design are reduced and displayed sideways. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the reduced horizontal display of the first and third decorative symbols is the first mode, and the mode after the reduced horizontal display is the second mode. As a result, of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, the first and third decorative patterns are lost, and the player's attention is drawn to the second decorative pattern. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 52(D), after the mode of the first and third decorative designs has changed, the mode of the second decorative design that constitutes reach changes to a mode different from the first and third decorative designs. . Specifically, "7" of the left decorative design 8L2 and "7" of the right decorative design 8R2 of the second decorative design are enlarged and displayed. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative symbols of the second decorative pattern are enlarged and displayed is the first mode, and the mode after being enlarged and displayed is the third mode. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the second decorative symbol in the ready-to-win state.

As shown in FIG. 52(E), the mode of the second decorative design forming reach returns from the third mode to the first mode. Specifically, when the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C shared by the first to third decorative patterns decreases and the pattern becomes visible, the left decorative pattern 8L2 of the second decorative pattern "7" and the right decoration "7" of the pattern 8R2 is reduced to the normal size. Also, the modes of the first and third decorative designs return from the second mode to the first mode. Specifically, "3" of the left decorative design 8L1 of the first decorative design and "2" of the right decorative design 8R1, and "4" of the left decorative design 8L3 of the third decorative design and the right decorative design 8R3. '3' returns to its original orientation and size. It should be noted that the timing at which the mode of the first and third decorative designs return from the second mode to the first mode is the same as the timing at which the mode of the second decorative design returns from the third mode to the first mode. may be different. Further, these timings may be before the fixed stop of the first to third decorative symbols, or may be at the same time as the fixed stop or after the fixed stop.

On the other hand, yet another symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C, and 8R2 constitute the reach of "7↓7", they are different from the decorative patterns (the second left and right decorative patterns) that constitute the reach displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode of the decorative design (middle decorative design) changes. Specifically, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win (here, "7") is displayed in an enlarged manner and moved. As a result, the winning performance can be made conspicuous by returning the right and left decorative symbols to the normal state before performing the changing performance of the symbols at the time of stopping the confirmation of the big win. On the other hand, by enlarging and displaying the symbols corresponding to the ready-to-win in the middle decorative symbols 8C, it is possible to easily specify the winning symbols.

As shown in FIG. 52(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C composed of one pattern arrangement stops, and when the first to third decorative patterns are fixed and stopped all at once, the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the reach. The corresponding pattern is displayed in reduced size from the enlarged display state to the normal size. As a result, it is possible to show the fixed stop symbols (final lottery result) of each of the first to third decorative symbols in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

In the second example of the pattern mode change effect B, as in the first example, first, as shown in FIG. 2 decorative patterns 8L2, 8C, 8R2 and third decorative patterns 8L3, 8C, 8R3 are displayed. The first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are respectively variably displayed corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation).

As shown in FIG. 52(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C, and 8R1 are in the reach mode of "6↓6", the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C, and 8R2 are in the reach mode of "7↓7", and the second 3 decorative symbols 8L3, 8C3, and 8R3 have a reach mode of "2↓2". Here, one or more of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach and temporarily stop, and the other decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may temporarily stop without forming a reach. In other words, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in any one or more of the first to third decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state. Other decorative symbols in the same symbol row (the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R) as the decorative symbols temporarily stopped forming the reach may be temporarily stopped without forming the reach.

In FIG. 52(H), the symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since all the first, second and third decorative patterns constitute the reach of "6↓6", "7↓7" and "2↓2", the reach displayed on the display screen 7a is constituted. There is no decorative design different from the decorative design. Therefore, the effect of changing the mode of the decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern forming the ready-to-win displayed on the display screen 7a is not executed. On the other hand, the pattern mode change effect is based on a predetermined condition that there is a decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern) different from the decorative patterns (first to third left and right decorative patterns) that constitute the reach displayed on the display screen 7a. In order to satisfy, the design mode change effect of the middle decorative design is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 52(I) and (J), when the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C shared by the first to third decorative patterns decreases and the pattern becomes visible, the middle decorative pattern 8C corresponds to reach. The symbol ("2, 6, 7" in this case) is displayed in an enlarged manner and moved. As a result, the design corresponding to the reach is displayed in an enlarged manner in the middle decorative design 8C, making it easy to identify the winning design.

On the other hand, the aspects of all the first, second, and third decorative patterns that constitute the reach change. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the first, second and third decorative patterns are enlarged and displayed. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative symbols of the first to third decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed is the first mode, and the mode after being enlarged and displayed is the third mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ready-to-win decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 52(K), the mode of the first to third decorative patterns forming reach returns from the third mode to the first mode. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R1 of the first to third decorative patterns are reduced to the normal size and displayed. As a result, the winning performance can be made conspicuous by returning the right and left decorative symbols to the normal state before performing the changing performance of the symbols at the time of stopping the confirmation of the big win. On the other hand, by enlarging and displaying the symbols corresponding to the ready-to-win in the middle decorative symbols 8C, it is possible to easily specify the winning symbols.

As shown in FIG. 52(L), the middle decorative pattern 8C composed of one pattern arrangement stops, and when the first to third decorative patterns are fixed and stopped all at once, the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the reach. The corresponding pattern is displayed in reduced size from the enlarged display state to the normal size. As a result, it is possible to show the fixed stop symbols (final lottery result) of each of the first to third decorative symbols in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

[Pattern mode change effect C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect C. FIG. The pattern mode change effect is a effect in which the mode of at least a part of the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a changes when the decorative patterns constitute the ready-to-win state. 53(A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol mode change effect C, and FIGS. 53(G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol mode change effect C. FIG.

In the first example of the pattern mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and three stop patterns are vertically arranged and displayed during stop display. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pattern arrangement of the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 53(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation).

As shown in FIG. 53(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped in order. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped while "123" is displayed from top to bottom of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped while "321" is displayed from top to bottom of the display screen 7a. ” is displayed, the machine is temporarily stopped. As a result, the first rows 8L1, 8C, and 8R1 of the decorative designs consisting of the left decorative design 8L1, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R1 are displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a in the form of "1↓3". In the center of the display screen 7a, the second rows 8L2, 8C, and 8R2 of the decorative designs consisting of the left decorative design 8L2, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R2 are displayed in the reach mode of "2↓2", and the display screen 7a. Below , the third row 8L3, 8C, 8R3 of the decorative designs consisting of the left decorative design 8L3, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R3 are displayed in a "3↓1" failing mode. Here, there is a case where one or more of the first to third rows of the decorative symbols form a ready-to-win state and temporarily stop, and the other rows do not form a ready-to-win state and temporarily stop. In other words, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop in the ready-to-win mode in one or more of the first to third rows of decorative patterns, the temporarily stopped decoration constitutes the ready-to-win state. Other decorative patterns in the same pattern row (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) may temporarily stop without constituting a reach.

In FIG. 53(C), the symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since the second row of the decorative pattern constitutes the reach of "7↓7", the decorative pattern (decorative patterns of the first and third columns) is different from the decorative pattern that constitutes the reach displayed on the display screen 7a. The aspect of changes. Specifically, "1" of the left decorative design 8L1 and "3" of the right decorative design 8R1 of the decorative designs in the first row are displayed in reduced size. Similarly, "3" of the left decorative design 8L3 and "1" of the right decorative design 8R3 of the decorative designs of the third row are displayed in reduced size. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the decorative symbols in the first and third columns are displayed in reduced size is the first mode, and the mode after the reduced display is the second mode. As a result, it is possible for the player to draw attention to the decorative patterns in the second row while the decorative patterns in the first and third rows are lost among the decorative patterns in the first to third rows. .

As shown in FIG. 53(D), after the modes of the decorative designs in the first and third rows have changed, the mode of the decorative designs in the second row that constitutes reach is different from the decorative designs in the first and third rows. change to Specifically, "2" of the left decorative design 8L2 and "2" of the right decorative design 8R2 of the decorative designs of the second row are enlarged and displayed. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative symbols of the second row of decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed is the first mode, and the mode after being enlarged and displayed is the third mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the decoration pattern of the second row in the ready-to-win state.

As shown in FIG. 53(E), the form of the decorative pattern in the second row forming reach returns from the third form to the first form. Specifically, when the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C decreases and the patterns become visible, the left decorative pattern 8L2 of the second row of decorative patterns "2" and the right decorative pattern 8R2 of "2" become normal. reduced to size.

As shown in FIG. 53(F), after that, the mode of the decorative designs in the first and third rows returns from the second mode to the first mode. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L1 of the first row of decorative patterns and the right decorative pattern 8R1 of "3", and the left decorative pattern 8L3 of the third row of decorative patterns and the right decoration. The "1" of the symbol 8R3 returns to its original orientation and size. After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped, and the decorative patterns of the 1st to 3rd rows are fixed and stopped all at once. As a result, the determined stop symbols (final lottery results) of the decorative symbols in the first to third columns can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that the timing at which the modes of the decorative designs in the first and third rows return from the second mode to the first mode is the same as the timing at which the mode of the decorative designs in the second row returns from the third mode to the first mode. There may be, or they may be different. Further, these timings may be before the fixed stop of the decorative symbols in the first to third columns, or may be at the same time as the fixed stop or after the fixed stop.

In the second example of the pattern mode change effect C, in the second example, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. " are arranged in the order of ". As in the first example, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation).

As shown in FIG. 53(G), the left decorative pattern 8L of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is temporarily stopped. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped while "123" is displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation speed of the right decorative pattern 8R is reduced so that the pattern becomes visible. . After that, as shown in FIG. 53(H), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped while "123" is displayed from top to bottom on the display screen 7a. As a result, the first rows 8L1, 8C, and 8R1 of the decorative designs consisting of the left decorative design 8L1, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R1 are displayed in the reach mode of "1↓1" above the display screen 7a, In the center of the display screen 7a, the second rows 8L2, 8C, and 8R2 of the decorative designs consisting of the left decorative design 8L2, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R2 are displayed in the reach mode of "2↓2", and the display screen 7a. Below , the third row 8L3, 8C, 8R3 of decorative patterns consisting of a left decorative pattern 8L3, a middle decorative pattern 8C and a right decorative pattern 8R3 are displayed in a reach mode of "3↓3". Here, there is a case where one or more of the first to third rows of the decorative symbols form a ready-to-win state and temporarily stop, and the other rows do not form a ready-to-win state and temporarily stop. In other words, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop in the ready-to-win mode in one or more of the first to third rows of decorative patterns, the temporarily stopped decoration constitutes the ready-to-win state. Other decorative patterns in the same pattern row (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) may temporarily stop without constituting a reach.

In FIG. 52(I), the symbol mode change effect is executed. Here, since the decorative patterns in all the rows of the first, second and third rows constitute the reach of "1↓1", "2↓2" and "3↓3", the reach displayed on the display screen 7a There is no decorative pattern in a row different from the row of decorative patterns that constitute the . Therefore, the effect of changing the mode of the decorative symbols in the row different from the decorative symbols in the row forming the ready-to-win displayed on the display screen 7a is not executed. That is, here, the pattern mode change effect is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied that there is a row of decorative symbols different from the row of decorative symbols forming the ready-to-win displayed on the display screen 7a.

On the other hand, the modes of all decorative patterns in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd rows that constitute the ready-to-win are changed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the decorative patterns in the first, second and third rows are enlarged and displayed. Here, the mode at the time of temporary stop before the left and right decorative symbols of the first to third rows of decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed is the first mode, and the mode after being enlarged and displayed is the third mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention further to the line of decorative symbols in the ready-to-win mode.

As shown in FIG. 53(J), when the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C decreases and the pattern becomes visible, the pattern of the decorative patterns in the first to third rows constituting the reach changes from the third pattern to the first pattern. Return to the aspect of Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R1 of the decorative patterns in the 1st to 3rd columns are reduced to the normal size and displayed. As a result, the winning performance can be made conspicuous by returning the right and left decorative symbols to the normal state before performing the changing performance of the symbols at the time of stopping the confirmation of the big win.

FIGS. 53(K) and 53(L) are modifications of FIGS. 53(C) and 53(D). In FIG. 53(C), "1" of the left decorative design 8L1 of the decorative designs of the first row and "3" of the right decorative design 8R1, and "3" of the left decorative design 8L3 of the decorative designs of the third row are shown. "1" of the right decorative pattern 8R3 is displayed in a reduced size in the second mode. Also, in FIG. 53(D), "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L2 and "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R2 of the decorative patterns in the second row are enlarged and displayed in the third mode. However, the second mode and the third mode are not limited to changing the size of the pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 53(K), the left and right decorative designs in the first and third rows may be small star-shaped figures as a second mode. Further, the left and right decorative patterns in the second row may emit light without changing their shape as a third mode. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 53(L), the left and right decorative patterns in the first and third columns may be displayed lightly as a second mode. Further, the left and right decorative patterns in the second row may change colors as a third mode.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the pattern mode change production will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, when the decorative symbols constitute the reach, at least some of the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a are in the first mode. It is possible to execute a symbol mode change effect that changes from the mode to the second mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the symbol mode change effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, among the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a, there is a mode of the decorative symbols different from the decorative symbols forming the reach. It changes from the first mode to the second mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the symbol mode change effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the timing at which the mode of the decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern forming the reach changes from the first mode to the second mode. At a different timing, the form of the decorative pattern forming the ready-to-win changes from the first form to the third form different from the second form. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the decorative symbols displayed on the display screen 7a constitute the reach when some of the decorative symbols constitute the reach and temporarily stop. Other decorative patterns in the same pattern row as the temporarily stopped decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped without forming a ready-to-win, and in the pattern mode change effect, the other decorative patterns temporarily stopped without forming a ready-to-win It changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 53, in the symbol mode change effect, when the decorative symbols constituting the reach are fixed and stopped in the winning or losing mode, it changes to the second mode. The mode of the decorative design returns to the first mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, when the mode of the decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode, the shape, size, orientation, and depth of the decorative pattern are changed. When at least one of the above changes and the mode of the decorative design changes from the first mode to the third mode, the shape, size, direction, and density of the decorative design change from the first mode to the second mode. A different change occurs when According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, even if the decorative symbols constitute the ready-to-win, the symbol mode change effect is not executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the pattern mode change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the symbol mode change effect A, the timings of FIGS. 51(D) and (C) may be reversed. In FIGS. 51(G) to (L) of the pattern mode change effect A, the second decorative pattern is explained as "6↓6", but it may be a "6↓5" losing mode. That is, of the second and third decorative patterns in the losing mode, the third decorative pattern that satisfies a predetermined condition changes from the first mode to the second mode, while the second that does not satisfy the predetermined condition. It may be an effect in which the mode of the decorative pattern does not change. The condition here is, for example, whether or not the sum of the numerical values represented by the left and right decorative patterns is smaller than ten.

[Modification 2]
In the pattern mode changing performances A to C, when the decorative patterns constituting the ready-to-win state are determined and stopped in the winning or losing mode, the decorative pattern mode changed to the second mode returns to the first mode. However, the timing at which the decorative pattern form that has changed to the second form returns to the first form may be before or after the decorative pattern that constitutes the reach is determined and stopped in the form of winning or losing. There may be.

[Modification 3]
In the pattern mode change effects A to C, the mode when the mode of the decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode is an example, and at least the shape, size, direction, and depth of the decorative pattern Modes other than the described changes may be used as long as one of them changes.

[Modification 4]
In the pattern mode change effects A to C, the decorative pattern may constitute the ready-to-win, or the pattern mode change effect may be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, it may be executed when "12379" is included in the reach symbol, and may not be executed when it is not included. Further, for example, it may be executed when there is a decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern forming the ready-to-win displayed on the display screen 7a, and may not be executed when it does not exist. Moreover, for example, it may be executed when the remaining number of times of time saving or the number of times of reaching the ceiling is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times, and may not be executed in the following cases.

[Modification 5]
In the pattern mode change effects A to C, "the mode of the pattern other than the pattern that made up the reach changes" means that other patterns in the same column that made up the reach (for example, the left column and the right column) (top and bottom of the reach group) set), or may be a pattern of a row (for example, middle row) different from the row that constitutes the reach. For example, the first and third left and right decorative designs in FIG. 52(C) may be made small, or a specific design of the middle decorative design in FIG. 52(I) may be made large. Further, in the pattern mode change effects A to C, only the ready-to-win pattern mode may be changed, or only the pattern mode other than the ready-to-win pattern may be changed. Both may change.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
When the decorative pattern constitutes a ready-to-win, a pattern mode change performance is executed in which the mode of at least a part of the decorative patterns displayed on the display means changes from the first mode to the second mode. Possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the pattern mode change effect, among the decorative patterns displayed on the display means, the mode of the decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern constituting the reach is changed from the first mode to the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
In the pattern mode change effect, the decorative pattern that constitutes the ready-to-win is displayed at a timing different from the timing at which the decorative pattern that is different from the decorative pattern that constitutes the ready-to-win is changed from the first mode to the second mode. The aspect changes from the first aspect to a third aspect different from the second aspect,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2 or aspect A1-3,
With regard to the decorative symbols displayed on the display means, when a part of the decorative symbols constitutes the ready-to-win state and is temporarily stopped, the other decorative symbols in the same pattern row as the temporarily stopped decorative symbols constitute the ready-to-win state. It may suspend without configuring,
In the pattern mode change effect, the mode of the other decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped without constituting a reach changes from the first mode to the second mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4,
In the pattern mode change effect, when the decorative pattern that constitutes the ready-to-win state is determined and stopped in a winning or losing mode, the decorative pattern mode that has changed to the second mode returns to the first mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-3,
When the mode of the decorative design changes from the first mode to the second mode, at least one of the shape, size, orientation, and depth of the decorative design changes,
When the mode of the decorative design changes from the first mode to the third mode, the shape, size, direction, and depth of the decorative design change from the first mode to the second mode. A change different from the case occurs,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-6,
Even if the decorative pattern constitutes a reach, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pattern mode change effect is not executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

54 to 56, the performance mode suggestive image hitting notification effects A to C will be described below. This production mode suggestive image hitting notification production is executed during the variation production of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a performance mode suggestion image hit notification performance, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103, and the image display device 7 and sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Production mode suggestion image hit notification production A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode suggestion image win notification effect A. FIG. The performance mode suggesting image hit notification performance is a performance in which the performance mode suggesting image notifies the win when the performance mode suggesting image suggesting the currently selected performance mode is displayed and the win is achieved. FIGS. 54A to 54F show a first example of the notification effect A per effect mode suggestion image, and FIGS. 54G to 54L show a second example of the effect mode suggestion image per effect A shows an example.

Here, the gaming machine 1 is capable of selecting a plurality of performance modes with different background images, music, etc. during the normal state variation performance. The performance mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. - 特許庁In the effect mode suggestive image hitting notification effect A, the period in which switching of the effect mode by the operation of the select button 68 is invalid is not set, and the valid period continues. The game machine 1 is set with a "battle presentation mode", a "dark presentation mode" and a "happy presentation mode", and one of these presentation modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of a fight between an enemy character and an ally character is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark production mode". In the "happy production mode", a heart background image is displayed.

In the first example of the performance mode suggestive image hit notification effect A, first, as shown in FIG. A background image of an ally character and a channel image are displayed. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L2, a middle decorative pattern 8C2, and a right decorative pattern 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the set of patterns is displayed in a variable manner. represents the variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation), and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. In FIG. 54(A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are respectively variably displayed corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation).

The effect mode suggesting image is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the effect mode suggesting image does not move from the upper left position of the display screen 7a. The channel image is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and displays the channel (number) corresponding to the effect mode currently selected. Here, the channel for the "battle production mode" is "1", the channel for the "dark production mode" is "2", and the channel for the "happy production mode" is "3". When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is switched to the "dark effect mode" shown in FIG. 54(B).

As shown in FIG. 54(B), when the production mode is switched, the display contents of the production mode suggestion image are changed at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "dark effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. The display contents of the channel image are also changed at the same position. Specifically, the character image of channel "2" of the currently selected "dark effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are continuously displayed in a variable manner. When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the presentation mode is switched to the "happy presentation mode" shown in FIG. 54(C).

As shown in FIG. 54(C), when the effect mode is further switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed again at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "happy effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. The display contents of the channel image are also changed at the same position. Specifically, the character image of channel "3" of the currently selected "happy effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are continuously displayed in a variable manner. After that, in FIG. 54(D), the variation speeds of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are reduced, the left decorative pattern 8L2 and the right decorative pattern 8R2 become visible, and the left decorative pattern 8L2 and the right decorative pattern 8L2 become visible. A state in which 8R2 temporarily stops at "7" and enters the reach mode is shown.

As shown in FIG. 54(D), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are in the ready-to-win state, the number of production mode suggesting images indicated as "happy production mode" displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a increases. An increasing effect is executed. Here, an effect is executed in which a plurality of the same suggestive images are newly generated from the effect mode suggestive image on the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the generated effect mode suggestive images are moved. Here, as shown in FIG. 54(E), two presentation mode suggestion images are newly displayed, and a total of three suggestion images are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 54(E), the moving speed of the two effect mode suggesting images during movement decreases as the variation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C2 decreases. Then, as shown in FIG. 54(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C2 stops moving and stops moving. The effect mode suggestion image displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a does not move. In FIG. 54(F), the middle decorative symbol 8C2 is stopped at "7", and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are fixed and stopped at "777". In accordance with this, all (three in this case) effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a execute a winning notification effect in which a big win is reported. Specifically, the character image of the effect mode suggesting image is changed from "happy effect mode" to "big win! happy effect mode" to notify the player of the big win. It should be noted that the manner in which the winning is reported is not limited to the above.

In the second example of the performance mode suggestive image hit notification effect A, as shown in FIG. background image and the channel image are displayed.
The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are variably displayed corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation). The rendering mode suggesting image suggests the currently selected rendering mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the production mode suggestion image moves clockwise inside the display screen 7a in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2. The channel image is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and displays the channel (number) corresponding to the effect mode currently selected. Here, the channel "1" of the "battle effect mode" is displayed. When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is switched to the "dark effect mode" shown in FIG. 54(H).

As shown in FIG. 54(H), when the presentation mode is switched, the display contents are changed while the presentation mode suggestion image is moved to change the display position. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image switches to the "dark effect mode" in which the character image is currently selected while moving clockwise inside the display screen 7a. The display contents of the channel image are changed at the same position. Specifically, the character image of channel "2" of the currently selected "dark effect mode" is displayed inside a rectangular image in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are continuously displayed in a variable manner. After that, when the variation speeds of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 decrease, the movement speed of the production mode suggestion image also decreases. When the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 do not become the ready-to-win state, the number of the effect mode suggesting images does not change.

FIG. 54(I) shows a state in which decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixed and stopped after that. When the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 stop changing, the performance mode suggestion image stops moving. The channel image does not change position from the bottom left of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 54(J), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 start the next variation, the effect mode suggestion image resumes moving. Here, the effect mode suggesting image moves clockwise inside the display screen 7a from the position where it was stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 54(K), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are in the ready-to-reach state of "7↓7", the effect mode suggestion image displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed as "happy effect mode". An increase effect in which the number of is increased is executed. Here, an effect is executed in which a plurality of the same suggestive images are newly generated from the effect mode suggestive image moving clockwise on the display screen 7a, and the generated effect mode suggestive images diffuse and move. Here, two presentation mode suggestion images are newly displayed as shown in FIG. 54(L), and a total of three suggestion images are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 54(L), the three production mode suggestion images stop moving together with the stop of fluctuation of the middle decorative pattern 8C2. The middle decorative pattern 8C2 is stopped at "7", and the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are fixed and stopped at "777". In accordance with this, all (three in this case) effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a execute a winning notification effect in which a big win is reported. Specifically, the character image of the effect mode suggesting image is changed from "happy effect mode" to "big win! happy effect mode" to notify the player of the big win. It should be noted that the manner in which the winning is reported is not limited to the above.

[Production mode suggestion image hit notification production B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode suggestion image hit notification effect B. FIG. The performance mode suggesting image hit notification performance is a performance in which the performance mode suggesting image notifies the win when the performance mode suggesting image suggesting the currently selected performance mode is displayed and the win is achieved.

Here, the gaming machine 1 is capable of selecting a plurality of performance modes with different background images, music, etc. during the normal state variation performance. The performance mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. - 特許庁In the performance mode suggestive image hitting notification performance B, a period during which the switching of the performance mode by the operation of the select button 68 is valid and a period during which the switching is invalid are set. Here, when the effect mode suggesting image is displayed (visible), it is a period in which switching of the effect mode by operating the select button 68 is invalid, and the effect mode suggesting image is not displayed (visible). This is a period during which switching of the presentation mode by operating the select button 68 is valid. Here, the effect mode suggestion image is displayed when the effect mode is switched and when the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are visible. Specifically, it is displayed for a predetermined period after the effect mode is switched, when the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 stop fluctuating, and when the patterns are fluctuating at a low speed immediately after the fluctuation starts and immediately before the fluctuation stops. When the performance mode is not switched and the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 fluctuate at high speed and the patterns cannot be visually recognized, the performance mode suggestion image is not displayed.

The game machine 1 is set with a "battle presentation mode", a "dark presentation mode" and a "happy presentation mode", and one of these presentation modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of a fight between an enemy character and an ally character is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark production mode". In the "happy production mode", a heart background image is displayed.

In the performance mode suggestive image hitting notification effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, a performance mode suggestive image, and a channel image. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L2, a middle decorative pattern 8C2, and a right decorative pattern 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the set of patterns is displayed in a variable manner. represents the variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation), and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. In FIG. 55(A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are stopped and displayed.

The rendering mode suggesting image suggests the currently selected rendering mode. Since the "dark effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "dark effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the production mode suggestion image moves clockwise inside the display screen 7a in accordance with the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2. In FIG. 55A, since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are "displayed (stopped display)" in the "stopped state", the effect mode suggestion image is "displayed (stopped display)" in the "stopped state". It is In addition, since the effect mode suggesting image is displayed, it is a period in which switching of the effect mode by operating the select button 68 is disabled (impossible).

The channel image is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and displays the channel (number) corresponding to the effect mode currently selected. Here, the channel for the "battle production mode" is "1", the channel for the "dark production mode" is "2", and the channel for the "happy production mode" is "3".

As shown in FIG. 55(B), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 start the next variation, the effect mode suggestion image resumes moving. Here, the effect mode suggesting image moves clockwise inside the display screen 7a from the position where it was stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a. When the variation speed of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 increases and the patterns become difficult to see, the presentation mode suggesting image disappears as shown in FIG. 55(C). Since the presentation mode suggestion image is not displayed, the switching of the presentation mode by the operation of the select button 68 is switched to the valid period. At this time, when the player operates the select button 68, the presentation mode is switched to the "happy presentation mode" shown in FIG. 55(D). Note that the presentation mode suggestion image may disappear after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since the variation speed of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 has increased and the symbols have become difficult to see.

As shown in FIG. 55(D), when the effect mode is switched, the effect mode suggestion image appears again and moves with the display content changed. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image moves clockwise inside the display screen 7a in a state where the character image is switched to the currently selected "happy effect mode". Since the presentation mode suggestion image is displayed, it is a period in which switching of the presentation mode by operating the select button 68 is invalid (impossible). At the same position, the channel image is changed to the channel "3" in which the display content is "happy effect mode". The decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 55(E), the presentation mode suggestion image disappears after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 started to fluctuate. When the presentation mode suggesting image disappears, the switching of the presentation mode by operating the select button 68 is switched to a valid period.

As shown in FIG. 55(F), when the left and right decorative patterns 8L2 and 8R2 out of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 change in speed and the patterns become visible, the effect mode suggestion image reappears and is displayed. Move clockwise inside the screen 7a. Since the presentation mode suggesting image is displayed, the switching of the presentation mode by operating the select button 68 is switched to an invalid (impossible) period.

FIG. 55(G) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L2 and the right decorative pattern 8R2 are temporarily stopped at "7" to enter the ready-to-win mode. When some of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are temporarily stopped and displayed (in this case, the ready-to-win mode), the number of the rendering mode suggestive images indicated as "happy rendering mode" displayed on the display screen 7a increases. An increasing production is executed. Here, an effect is executed in which a plurality of the same suggestive images are newly generated from the effect mode suggestive image moving clockwise on the display screen 7a, and the generated effect mode suggestive images diffuse and move. Here, two presentation mode suggestion images are newly displayed as shown in FIG. 55(G), and a total of three suggestion images are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 55(H), the three production mode suggestion images stop moving together with the stop of fluctuation of the middle decorative pattern 8C2. The middle decorative pattern 8C2 is stopped at "7", and the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are fixed and stopped at "777". In accordance with this, all (three in this case) effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a execute a winning notification effect in which a big win is reported. Specifically, the character image of the effect mode suggesting image is changed from "happy effect mode" to "big win! happy effect mode" to notify the player of the big win. It should be noted that the manner in which the winning is reported is not limited to the above.

FIGS. 55(I) to (J) are effects executed after FIG. 55(F) instead of FIGS. 55(G) to (H). FIG. 55(I) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L2 is temporarily stopped at "5" and the right decorative symbol 8R2 is temporarily stopped at "6", resulting in a losing mode. When some of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are temporarily stopped and displayed (in this case, a lost mode), the number of the rendering mode suggestive images indicated as "happy rendering mode" displayed on the display screen 7a increases. An increasing production is executed. Here, an effect is executed in which two effect mode suggesting images are displayed, namely, the effect mode suggesting image that moves rightward on the display screen 7a and the effect mode suggesting image that moves leftward.

As shown in FIG. 55(J), the two production mode suggestion images stop moving together with the fluctuation stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C2. The middle decorative symbol 8C2 is stopped at "3", and the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are fixed and stopped at "536". At the same time, all (here, two) effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a stop moving. The display content of the production mode suggesting image does not change.

FIG. 55(K) is an effect executed instead of FIG. 55(J). In FIG. 55(J), it is assumed that the display content of the effect mode suggesting image does not change, but here, the display content changes and a loss notification effect is executed to notify a loss. Specifically, the character image of the effect mode suggesting image is changed from "happy effect mode" to "sorry, lost!!! happy effect mode" to inform the player of the failure. In addition, the aspect which alert|reports a loss is not limited above.

FIG. 55(L) is an effect executed instead of FIG. 55(J) and FIG. 55(K). In FIGS. 55(J) and (K), the game is stopped after the production mode suggesting images have increased, but here, the number of the production mode suggesting images returns to the original number. Specifically, after FIG. 55(I), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are confirmed and stopped in the losing mode of "536", the display of the two effect mode suggestive images that have been moved disappears, and the display screen 7a is displayed. One production mode suggestion image is displayed in the upper left of .

[Production mode suggestive image hitting notification production C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode suggesting image win notification effect C. FIG. The performance mode suggesting image hit notification performance is a performance in which the performance mode suggesting image notifies the win when the performance mode suggesting image suggesting the currently selected performance mode is displayed and the win is achieved.

Here, the gaming machine 1 is capable of selecting a plurality of performance modes with different background images, music, etc. during the normal state variation performance. The performance mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. - 特許庁In the performance mode suggesting image hit notification performance C, a period during which the switching of the performance mode by the operation of the select button 68 is valid and a period during which it is invalid are set. Here, when the effect mode suggesting image is displayed (visible), it is a period in which switching of the effect mode by operating the select button 68 is invalid, and the effect mode suggesting image is not displayed (visible). This is a period during which switching of the presentation mode by operating the select button 68 is valid. Here, the production mode suggestion image is displayed when the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are visible. Specifically, it is displayed when the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 stop fluctuating, and when the patterns are fluctuating at a low speed immediately after the fluctuation starts and immediately before the fluctuation stops. When the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 fluctuate at high speed and the patterns cannot be visually recognized, the performance mode suggesting image is not displayed.

The game machine 1 is set with a "battle presentation mode", a "dark presentation mode" and a "happy presentation mode", and one of these presentation modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of a fight between an enemy character and an ally character is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark production mode". In the "happy production mode", a heart background image is displayed.

In the production mode suggestive image win notification effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 56A, decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2, a production mode suggestive image, and background images of the enemy character and the ally character are displayed on the display screen 7a. and a channel image are displayed. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L2, a middle decorative pattern 8C2, and a right decorative pattern 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the set of patterns is displayed in a variable manner. represents the variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation), and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. In FIG. 56(A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are stopped and displayed.

The rendering mode suggesting image suggests the currently selected rendering mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the production mode suggestion image moves rightward above the display screen 7a in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2, and is out of the frame from the right end of the display screen 7a. , and moves rightward from the left end of the frame. In FIG. 56(A), since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are "displayed (stopped display)" in the "stopped state", the effect mode suggestion image is "displayed (stopped display)" in the "stopped state". It is In addition, since the effect mode suggesting image is displayed, it is a period in which switching of the effect mode by operating the select button 68 is disabled (impossible).

The channel image is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and displays the channel (number) corresponding to the effect mode currently selected. Here, the channel for the "battle production mode" is "1", the channel for the "dark production mode" is "2", and the channel for the "happy production mode" is "3".

As shown in FIG. 56(B), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 start the next variation, the effect mode suggestion image resumes moving rightward in conjunction with it. When the variation speed of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 increases and the symbols become difficult to see, as shown in FIG. Here, a linear image moving at high speed can be visually recognized. Since the presentation mode suggestion image is not displayed, the switching of the presentation mode by the operation of the select button 68 is switched to the effective period. At this time, when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is switched to the "dark effect mode" shown in FIG. 56(D).

As shown in FIG. 56(D), even if the production mode is switched, the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously variably displayed, so the production mode suggestion image does not appear. Since the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed, the effect mode switching by the operation of the select button 68 remains valid. The channel image is changed to the channel "2" in the "dark effect mode" at the same position. At this time, when the player operates the select button 68, the presentation mode is switched to the "happy presentation mode" shown in FIG. 56(E).

As shown in FIG. 56(E), even if the production mode is switched, the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are continuously variably displayed, so the production mode suggestion image does not appear. Since the effect mode suggestion image is not displayed, the effect mode switching by the operation of the select button 68 remains valid. At the same position, the channel image is changed to the channel "3" in which the display content is "happy effect mode".

As shown in FIG. 56(F), when the left and right decorative patterns 8L2 and 8R2 out of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 change in speed and the patterns become visible, the production mode suggestion image reappears and is displayed. Move to the right above the screen 7a. In other words, the effect mode suggesting image becomes visible in conjunction with the fact that a part of the decorative symbols becomes visible, regardless of whether or not there is an operation by the player. In addition, the production mode suggestion image is not displayed when the production mode is switched, and after switching, it is not displayed for a predetermined period until the fluctuation slows down (a part of the decorative pattern becomes visible), and then Is displayed. In FIG. 56(F), since the presentation mode suggestion image is displayed, the switching of the presentation mode by operating the select button 68 is switched to an invalid (impossible) period.

FIG. 56(G) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L2 and the right decorative pattern 8R2 are temporarily stopped at "7" to enter the ready-to-win state. When some of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are temporarily stopped and displayed (in this case, the ready-to-win mode), the number of the rendering mode suggestive images indicated as "happy rendering mode" displayed on the display screen 7a increases. An increasing production is executed. Here, an effect is executed in which a plurality of effect mode suggestive images are displayed while moving rightward above the display screen 7a. Here, as shown in FIG. 56(G), a plurality of effect mode suggestion images are displayed while repeating frame-in and frame-out.

As shown in FIG. 56(H), the plurality of effect mode suggesting images stop moving together with the stop of fluctuation of the middle decorative pattern 8C2. The middle decorative pattern 8C2 is stopped at "7", and the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are fixed and stopped at "777". Along with this, a plurality of (here, two) presentation mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(I), a win notification effect for notifying a big win is executed. Specifically, the character image of the effect mode suggesting image is changed from "happy effect mode" to "big win! happy effect mode" to notify the player of the big win. It should be noted that the manner in which the winning is reported is not limited to the above.

FIG. 56(J) is an effect executed after FIG. 56(G) instead of FIG. 56(H) and (I). In FIG. 56(J), when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are determined and stopped in the winning mode, three performance mode suggesting images are stopped and displayed, and a winning notification performance for notifying a big win is executed. That is, the number of effect mode suggesting images to be stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a is determined at random, and the number of displayed images may be two or three.

FIG. 56(K) is a modification executed after FIG. 56(D). In FIG. 56(K), after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) after the production mode is switched, the production mode suggestion image may be displayed temporarily (for example, 2 seconds). While the effect mode suggesting image is temporarily displayed, switching of the effect mode by operating the select button 68 is switched to an invalid period. Alternatively, after FIG. 56(D), when the player performs a predetermined operation, an effect mode suggestion image may be temporarily displayed (for example, for two seconds) as shown in FIG. 56(K). While the effect mode suggesting image is temporarily displayed, switching of the effect mode by operating the select button 68 is switched to an invalid period.

FIG. 56(L) is a modification executed instead of FIG. 56(D). In FIG. 56(L), the linear image moving at high speed is not displayed either. That is, when the effect mode suggesting image disappears, no image relating to the movement of the effect mode suggesting image is displayed. Similar to FIG. 56(D), this is a period during which switching of the production mode by operating the select button 68 is valid.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the performance mode suggesting image per hit notification effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, when the effect mode suggesting image suggesting the currently selected effect mode is displayed on the display screen 7a, the effect mode A win notification effect can be executed in which the suggestive image notifies a win. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, a plurality of effect mode suggesting images are displayed on the display screen 7a, and in the win notification effect, each effect mode display image notifies the win. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56(I) and (J), the number of effect mode suggestion images displayed on the display screen 7a changes, and in the win notification effect, the effect mode for notifying the win is displayed. The number of suggested images may vary depending on the hit. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54(G) to (K) and FIG. 56, when the decorative pattern changes while the production mode suggesting image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the production mode is suggested. It is possible to execute a moving performance in which the image moves in conjunction with the decorative pattern. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56(F) and (H), the presentation mode suggesting image disappears while the decorative symbols are changing, and is thereafter displayed regardless of the presence or absence of operation by the player. , is displayed when the decorative pattern is stopped. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56(D) to (F), the effect mode suggesting image is displayed for a predetermined period after the effect mode is switched by the player's operation. After that, it is displayed regardless of the presence or absence of an operation by the player. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the performance mode suggestion image winning notification effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the performance mode suggestive image winning notification performances A to C, the character content of the performance mode suggestive image is changed to notify the winning at the time of winning. However, the manner in which the effect mode suggesting image notifies of the win is not limited to this. For example, the production mode suggesting image may be split into two, and fireworks may appear from the split part.

[Modification 2]
In the performance mode suggesting image winning notification performances A to C, all the performance mode suggesting images displayed at the time of winning notify the winning. However, only part of the displayed effect mode suggesting image may notify the winner.

[Modification 3]
In the performance mode suggestive image win notification effects A to C, the number of performance mode suggestive images used when notifying a win may differ depending on the win. For example, in FIGS. 54(D), (E), 55(G), and 56(G), the number of effect mode suggesting images displayed on the display screen 7a may change at random, It may change depending on the design.

[Modification 4]
In the performance mode suggesting image hitting notification performance C, when the decorative pattern fluctuates in the vertical direction while the performance mode suggesting image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the performance mode suggesting image interlocks with the decorative pattern to change the direction of the decorative pattern. move in different left and right directions. However, the effect mode suggesting image may move in the same direction as the variation direction of the decorative design in conjunction with the decorative design.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a rendering mode suggesting image that suggests the currently selected rendering mode;
When a hit occurs while the performance mode suggesting image is displayed on the display means, the performance mode suggesting image is capable of executing a winning notification performance in which the winning is reported.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
A plurality of the production mode suggesting images are displayed on the display means, and in the winning notification production, each of the production mode display images notifies the winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2,
The number of the production mode suggestive images displayed on the display means changes, and in the win notification effect, the number of the production mode suggestive images that notify the win may vary depending on the win.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
When the decorative pattern changes while the performance mode suggesting image is being displayed on the display means, a movement effect can be executed in which the performance mode suggesting image moves in conjunction with the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-4,
The display of the production mode suggesting image disappears during the variation of the decorative pattern, and is displayed thereafter regardless of whether or not there is an operation by the player, and is displayed when the decorative pattern is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
When the effect mode is switched by the player's operation, the effect mode suggesting image is not displayed for a predetermined period after switching, and is displayed thereafter regardless of whether the player performs an operation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◆ [Aspect A2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
one of the plurality of types of images is an image different from the effect mode suggesting image, and is a predetermined position effect mode suggesting image that suggests the effect mode at a predetermined position of the display means;
The predetermined position effect mode suggesting image does not notify the winning,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◆ [Aspect A2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5, further comprising:
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The production mode suggestion image is not displayed during a period in which the production mode can be switched by operating the operation means,
During a period in which the production mode cannot be switched by operating the operation means, the production mode suggesting image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Moving symbol mode change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. FIG. This moving symbol mode change effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a moving symbol mode change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Moving pattern mode change effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the moving symbol mode change effect A. FIG. The moving symbol mode change effect is an effect in which the mode changes to the second mode while the decorative symbol continues to move in the first mode. In the moving symbol mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and three or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when the deceleration fluctuates. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 57(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, then the speed of fluctuation slows down, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R move downward from top to bottom. deceleration fluctuation is displayed. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that the contents of the patterns included in the pattern arrangement in the vertical direction can be visually recognized. Say. On the other hand, the high-speed movement means that the contents of the patterns included in the vertical pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that it is difficult to visually recognize them. . In this case, a vertical line image may be displayed along with high-speed movement.

As shown in FIG. 57(B), after FIG. 57(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain a state of being decelerated and fluctuated from top to bottom. However, the direction of each pattern included in each pattern array is upside down. Here, each pattern is turned upside down by rotating it 90 degrees to the right or to the left. In this way, when the direction of the pattern is reversed in the vertical direction during the fluctuation, it suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it is not. A 20% increase in expectations is suggested here.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again in a high-speed fluctuation state with the fluctuation speed rising, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The contents of each pattern of , become difficult to see. In this way, when the speed increases during the deceleration fluctuation and the high-speed fluctuation state occurs again, it is suggested that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than in the case where the fluctuation does not occur. Here, it is further suggested that the level of expectation increased by 5% to 25%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(D), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R decreases. After the deceleration fluctuation, each pattern included in each pattern array is reversed while maintaining the state of deceleration fluctuation. Here, each pattern is reversed by rotating with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation. In this way, when the pattern is reversed during the fluctuation, it suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it is not reversed. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 25% to 50%.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(E), while the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are maintained in a decelerated state, the orientation of each pattern contained in each pattern arrangement is normal. (Normal orientation). After that, the fluctuation speed is further reduced and the pattern is temporarily stopped. When the symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 57(F), only one left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in each symbol array, and other symbols are displayed. Display disappears. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L→right decorative pattern 8R→middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped in this order. Become. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped in a state where only one pattern is displayed.

FIGS. 57(G)-(I) are executed after FIG. 57(A) instead of FIGS. 57(B)-(D). In FIGS. 57(G) to (I), the decorative patterns are "normal direction deceleration fluctuation"→"upside down"→"high speed fluctuation"→"inversion"→"normal direction deceleration fluctuation". In FIGS. 57(G) to (I), the decorative patterns are "normal direction deceleration fluctuation"→"reverse"→"high speed fluctuation"→"upside down"→"normal direction deceleration fluctuation". In this way, in the gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set with different combinations of execution order and presence/absence of "reverse", "high-speed variation", and "upside down", and one variation pattern is executed by lottery. be done.

As shown in FIG. 57(G), after FIG. 57(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain a state of deceleration fluctuation from top to bottom. While each pattern included in each pattern array is reversed. Here, each pattern is reversed by rotating with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation. In this way, when the pattern is reversed during the fluctuation, it suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it is not reversed. Here, a 25% increase in expectations is suggested.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(H), the fluctuation speed rises again to a high-speed fluctuation state, and the contents of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R become difficult to see. Become. In this way, when the speed increases during the deceleration fluctuation and the high-speed fluctuation state occurs again, it is suggested that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than in the case where the fluctuation does not occur. Here, it is further suggested that the level of expectation increased by 5% to 30%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(I), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R decreases. After the deceleration fluctuation, the direction of each pattern included in each pattern array is reversed upside down while maintaining the state of deceleration fluctuation. Here, each pattern is turned upside down by rotating it 90 degrees to the right or to the left. In this way, when the direction of the pattern is reversed in the vertical direction during the fluctuation, it suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it is not. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 20% to 50%.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(E), while the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are maintained in a decelerated state, the orientation of each pattern contained in each pattern arrangement is normal. back to After that, the fluctuation speed is further reduced and the pattern is temporarily stopped. When the symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 57(F), only one left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in each symbol array, and other symbols are displayed. Display disappears. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L→right decorative pattern 8R→middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped in this order. be only one. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped in a state where only one pattern is displayed.

FIGS. 57(J)-(L) are variations performed between FIGS. 57(E) and 57(F). In the above embodiment, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped in the order of the left decorative design 8L → right decorative design 8R → middle decorative design 8C, and the three designs are temporarily stopped. After that, the number of symbols displayed in each pattern array is set to be only one all at once. In the modified example, the left decorative pattern 8L→right decorative pattern 8R→middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped in order, and only one pattern is sequentially displayed from the temporarily stopped pattern array.

Further, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-reach state, the state of the middle decorative pattern 8C during fluctuation may or may not change. A performance is shown. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in a losing mode, the effect of changing the mode of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not executed.

In FIG. 57(J), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped in the order of the left decorative design 8L→right decorative design 8R, and only one design is displayed after each stop. The middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and displayed from top to bottom. At this time, since the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the ready-to-reach state of "8↓8", depending on the variation pattern, an effect may be executed in which the state of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes. . A case of execution will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 57(K), the direction of each pattern included in the pattern array is reversed and reversed while maintaining the deceleration-varied state of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Here, each pattern is turned upside down by rotating it 90 degrees to the right or left, and then reversed by rotating each pattern around the vertical direction as the axis of rotation. In this way, when the pattern is upside down and reversed during the variation, it suggests that the expectation of winning in the variation is higher than when it is not. Here, it is further suggested that the level of expectation increased by 25% to 75%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(L), the middle decorative pattern 8C increases in speed of fluctuation and enters a high-speed fluctuation state again, and the contents of each pattern become difficult to see. In this way, when the speed increases during the deceleration fluctuation and the high-speed fluctuation state occurs again, it is suggested that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than in the case where the fluctuation does not occur. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 5% to 80%.

After that, the direction of each pattern included in the pattern arrangement returns to the normal state while the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains the state of being decelerated and fluctuated. After that, the fluctuation speed is further reduced and the pattern is temporarily stopped. When the symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 57(F), only one of the middle decorative symbols 8C is displayed in the pattern arrangement, and the display of the other symbols disappears. As a result, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped in a state where only one design is displayed.

[Movement pattern mode change effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the moving symbol mode change effect B. FIG. The moving symbol mode change effect is an effect in which the mode changes to the second mode while the decorative symbol continues to move in the first mode. 58(A) to (F) show a first example of the moving symbol mode change effect B. FIG. A second example of the moving symbol mode change effect B is shown in FIGS. 58(G) to (I). A third example of the moving symbol mode change effect B is shown in FIGS. 58(J) to (L).

In the moving pattern mode change performance B, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R start to fluctuate in the normal orientation and are stopped and displayed in the normal orientation, and are neither upside down nor reversed. That is, here, there is a case where the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are not subjected to the moving design mode change effect, and only the middle decorative design 8C is subjected to the moving design mode change effect. In FIGS. 58(A) to 58(F) of the first example of the moving symbol mode change effect B, the case where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the ready-to-win mode and the moving symbol mode change effect is executed will be explained. do.

In FIG. 58(A), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped in the order of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in the normal orientation after the high-speed fluctuation, and each design is one design after stopping. is displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and variably displayed from top to bottom. At this time, since the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the reach state of "8↓8", depending on the variation pattern, the state of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes (moving pattern state change effect). may be executed. A case of execution will be described below. Incidentally, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in a losing mode, the effect of changing the mode of the middle decorative symbol 8C (moving pattern mode change effect) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the direction of each pattern included in the pattern array is reversed while the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the decelerated state. Here, each pattern is reversed by rotating with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation. In this way, when the pattern is reversed during the fluctuation, it suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it is not reversed. Here, it is further suggested that the level of expectation increased by 25% to 75%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C increases in speed of fluctuation and enters a high-speed fluctuation state again, and the contents of each pattern become difficult to see. In this way, when the speed increases during the deceleration fluctuation and the high-speed fluctuation state occurs again, it is suggested that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than in the case where the fluctuation does not occur. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation increased by 5% to 80%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(D), the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C is reduced. After the deceleration fluctuation, the direction of each pattern included in the pattern arrangement is reversed while maintaining the state of deceleration fluctuation. Here, each pattern is turned upside down by rotating it 90 degrees to the right or to the left. In this way, when the direction of the pattern is reversed in the vertical direction during the fluctuation, it suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it is not. Here, it is further suggested that the degree of expectation has increased by 20%, bringing the degree of expectation to almost 100%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(E), the direction of each pattern included in the pattern arrangement returns to the normal state while the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains the state of deceleration fluctuation. After that, the fluctuation speed is further reduced and the pattern is temporarily stopped. When the symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 58(F), only one of the middle decorative symbols 8C is displayed in the pattern arrangement, and the display of the other symbols disappears. As a result, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped in a state where only one design is displayed.

In FIGS. 58(G) to (I) of the second example of the moving symbol mode change effect B, the case where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are not in the ready-to-win mode but in the losing mode will be explained. In FIG. 58(G), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped in the order of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in the normal orientation after the high-speed fluctuation, and each design is one design after stopping. is displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with high speed fluctuation. At this time, since the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are in the losing mode of "8↓5", the effect of changing the mode of the middle decorative design 8C is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(H), the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C is reduced. After that, the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C is further reduced and the pattern is temporarily stopped. When the symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 58(I), only one of the middle decorative symbols 8C is displayed in the pattern arrangement, and the display of the other symbols disappears. As a result, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped in a state where only one design is displayed.

In FIGS. 58(J) to 58(L) of the third example of the moving design mode change effect B, the moving design mode change effect is executed even though the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are in the ready-to-reach mode. A case will be described where a variation pattern that does not occur is selected. In FIG. 58(J), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped in the order of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in the normal direction after the high-speed fluctuation, and each design is one design after stopping. is displayed. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed with high speed fluctuation. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a reach state of "5↓5". When the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win mode, an effect (moving pattern mode change effect) in which the mode of the fluctuating middle decorative pattern 8C changes is executed or not executed. , and here is the effect if it is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 58(K), the variation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C decreases. After that, the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C is further reduced and the pattern is temporarily stopped. When the symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 58(L), only one of the middle decorative symbols 8C is displayed in the pattern arrangement, and the display of the other symbols disappears. As a result, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixed and stopped in a state where only one design is displayed.

[Moving pattern mode change effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the moving symbol mode change effect C. FIG. The moving symbol mode change effect is an effect in which the mode changes to the second mode while the decorative symbol continues to move in the first mode. In the moving symbol mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 59(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are respectively displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and three or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when the deceleration fluctuates. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 59(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed with high-speed fluctuation. The high-speed fluctuation means that the contents of the patterns included in the vertical pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that it is difficult to see them. In this case, a vertical line image may be displayed along with high-speed movement.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), after FIG. 59(A), the left decorative pattern 8L changes at high speed, then decelerates, and is displayed in a decelerating and changing manner from top to bottom. The deceleration fluctuation here means moving at such a speed that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical pattern arrangement of the left decorative symbol 8L can be visually recognized. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain the high-speed fluctuation display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the direction of each pattern included in the pattern arrangement is reversed while the left decorative pattern 8L maintains the state of being decelerated and fluctuated from top to bottom. Here, each pattern is turned upside down by rotating it 90 degrees to the right or to the left. In this way, when the direction of the pattern is reversed in the vertical direction during the fluctuation, it suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it is not. Here, a 10% increase in expectations is suggested. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain the high-speed fluctuation display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(D), the variation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L is increased to enter the high-speed variation state again, and the contents of each symbol become difficult to see. In this way, when the speed increases during the deceleration fluctuation and the high-speed fluctuation state occurs again, it is suggested that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than in the case where the fluctuation does not occur. Here, it is further suggested that the level of expectation increased by 5% to 15%. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain the high-speed fluctuation display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the variation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L decreases. After the deceleration fluctuation, the direction of each pattern included in the pattern array returns to the normal state while maintaining the state of deceleration fluctuation. After that, the fluctuation speed is further reduced and the pattern is temporarily stopped.

When the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 59(F), only one pattern (here, "7") is displayed in the pattern arrangement, and the display of the other patterns disappears. At the timing before and after the temporary stop of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated from the high speed fluctuation, and is decelerated and fluctuated from top to bottom. The deceleration fluctuation here means moving at such a speed that the contents of the symbols included in the pattern arrangement in the vertical direction of the right decorative symbol 8R can be visually recognized. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(G), the direction of each pattern included in the pattern array is reversed while maintaining the state of deceleration fluctuation from top to bottom in the right decorative pattern 8R. Here, each pattern is reversed by rotating with the vertical direction as the axis of rotation. In this way, when the pattern is reversed during the fluctuation, it suggests that the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is higher than when it is not reversed. Here, it is further suggested that the level of expectation increased by 10% to 25%. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains the high-speed fluctuation display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the variation speed of the right decorative pattern 8R decreases. After the deceleration fluctuation, the direction of each pattern included in the pattern array returns to the normal state while maintaining the state of deceleration fluctuation. After that, the fluctuation speed is further reduced and the pattern is temporarily stopped.

When the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 59(I), only one symbol (here, "7") is displayed in the symbol array, and the display of the other symbols disappears. At the timing before and after the temporary stop of the right decorative pattern 8R, the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated from the high speed fluctuation, and the fluctuation speed is decelerated and displayed from top to bottom. The deceleration fluctuation here means moving at such a speed that the contents of the symbols included in the pattern arrangement in the vertical direction of the middle decorative symbol 8C can be visually recognized.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(J), the direction of each pattern included in the pattern array is reversed and reversed while maintaining the state of the middle decorative pattern 8C being decelerated and varied. Here, each pattern is turned upside down by rotating it 90 degrees to the right or left, and then reversed by rotating each pattern around the vertical direction as the axis of rotation. In this way, when the pattern is upside down and reversed during the variation, it suggests that the expectation of winning in the variation is higher than when it is not. Here, it is further suggested that the level of expectation increased by 20% to 45%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(K), the variation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C is reduced. After the deceleration fluctuation, the direction of each pattern included in the pattern array returns to the normal state while maintaining the state of deceleration fluctuation. After that, the fluctuation speed is further reduced and the pattern is temporarily stopped.

When the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 59(L), only one pattern (here, "7") is displayed in the pattern arrangement, and the display of the other patterns disappears. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are determined and stopped in the winning mode of "777" in which only one pattern is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the moving symbol mode change effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move downward in the first mode (normal direction), and the first 57(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to move downward and change to the second mode (upside down), as shown in FIG. , can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 58 and 59 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57(E), after the second variable effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to move downward while the mode is the first mode. Returning to (normal direction), it is possible to execute a variable stop effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(B) and (C), in the second variable effect, after the decorative symbols change to the second mode (upside down), the moving speed of the decorative symbols changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 58 and 59 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58(A) to 58(F), the second variable effect is part of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that can notify success or failure. After the decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) moves in the first mode (normal orientation), it stops in the first mode, and the other decorative pattern (middle The decorative pattern 8C) changes to the second mode (upside down) while continuing to move. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, the second variation effect is executed when some of the decorative symbols (left and right decorative symbols) stop in the ready-to-win state, and some of the decorative symbols to reach the ready-to-win state. It will not be executed if it is stopped in any other mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changed to the second mode (upside down) are further changed to the third mode. There is a case where it changes to the mode (reversal), and the expected degree of winning in the case of changing to the third mode is higher than the expected degree of winning in the case of not changing to the third mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the moving symbol mode change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the moving symbol mode change effects A to C, the high-speed fluctuation display is a state in which the details of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move at such a speed that it is difficult to see them. However, the high-speed fluctuation display does not have to be a speed at which the contents of the pattern are difficult to see, as long as the fluctuation speed is faster than the deceleration fluctuation, and may be a speed at which the contents of the pattern can be visually recognized.

[Modification 2]
In the moving symbol mode change effects A to C, as examples of changing the modes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R, a mode in which the patterns are turned upside down and a mode in which the patterns are reversed are exemplified. However, the contents that change the modes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not limited to these. For example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be changed in color, changed in size, changed in shape, or added with a specific image.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first variation effect in which the decorative pattern moves in a predetermined direction in a first mode;
After the first variable effect, a second variable effect in which the decorative pattern changes to a second mode while continuing to move in the predetermined direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
After the second variation effect, the mode returns to the first mode while the decorative symbol continues to move in the predetermined direction, and the variable stop effect in which the decorative symbol stops can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
In the second variable effect, after the decorative pattern changes to the second mode, the moving speed of the decorative pattern changes,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
The second variable effect stops in the first mode after a part of the decorative symbols in the set of decorative symbols capable of informing success or failure has moved in the first mode, and a set of The other decorative pattern among the decorative patterns changes to the second mode while continuing to move.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4,
The second variable effect is executed when the part of the decorative symbols stops in a ready-to-win mode, and is not executed when the part of the decorative symbols stops in a mode other than the ready-to-win mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
In the second effect, the decorative pattern changed to the second mode may further change to the third mode, and the expected degree of winning when changed to the third mode is the Higher than the expected degree of hit when it does not change to the mode of 3,
A gaming machine characterized by:

60 to 62, the losing mode symbol movement effects A to C will be described below. This lost mode symbol movement effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the losing mode symbol movement effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Loss mode pattern movement effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the losing mode symbol movement effect A. FIG. Loss mode symbol movement production is a performance in which a set of decorative symbols for informing special figure lottery results (whether or not) are aligned in a losing mode and move together. First, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L1, the middle decorative pattern 8C1 and the right decorative pattern 8R1, and the special patterns are variable by the variable display of the set of patterns. Display (special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L1, the middle decorative pattern 8C1 and the right decorative pattern 8R1 are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 60(A), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the current special figure variation (the variation).

As shown in FIG. 60(B), the left decorative pattern 8L1 of the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 is temporarily stopped at "3", and then, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the right decorative pattern 8R1. temporarily stops at "2". After that, as shown in FIG. 60(D), the middle decorative symbol 8C1 is temporarily stopped at "7". As a result, the left decorative design 8L1, the middle decorative design 8C1, and the right decorative design 8R1 are arranged side by side in a failing manner of "372".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 60(E) to (K), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 arranged side by side in the losing mode of "372" move together inside the display screen 7a. A symbol movement effect is executed. Here, "a set of decorative symbols move together in a state of being lined up in a losing manner" means that each of the left decorative design 8L1, the middle decorative design 8C1, and the right decorative design 8R1 is horizontally arranged in a failing manner. It means moving while maintaining the relative positional relationship with each other.

First, as shown in FIGS. 60(E) and (F), an effect is executed in which the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 horizontally arranged in a losing mode move back and forth for the first time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 move toward the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1, which have been moved to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a and are horizontally arranged in a lost state, are aligned in the lower left direction of the display screen 7a. Moving. Here, the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are enlarged and moved toward the center of the display screen 7a while returning to their original sizes. The first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 that have arrived at the center of the display screen 7a temporarily stop moving.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 60(G) and (H), an effect is executed in which the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 horizontally arranged in a losing mode move back and forth for the second time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 move toward the lower left corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(H), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1, which are moved to the lower left corner of the display screen 7a and arranged side by side in a lost state, are aligned in the upper right direction of the display screen 7a. Moving. Here, the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are enlarged and moved toward the center of the display screen 7a while returning to their original sizes. The first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 that have arrived at the center of the display screen 7a temporarily stop moving.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(I), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 are reduced and moved in the upper right direction toward the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. As the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 move in the upper right direction, the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 frame in from the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, and the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 are displayed. Move in the same upward direction. The second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are the left decorative pattern 8L2, the middle decorative pattern 8C2, and the right decorative pattern 8R2, all of which are "5" hits, and the patterns are aligned horizontally. Moving.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 60(J) and (K), inside the display screen 7a, the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are moved to close positions. An effect is executed in which both are stopped at the same time. This can suggest that the battle between the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 will begin. An explosion image is displayed as a background image while the two symbols are stationary. After the explosion image is displayed, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 disappear and only the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(K), the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and then the game is fixed and stopped. As a result, "555" hits are announced.

[Loss mode pattern movement effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the losing mode symbol movement effect B. FIG. Loss mode symbol movement production is a performance in which a set of decorative symbols for informing special figure lottery results (whether or not) are aligned in a losing mode and move together. First, as shown in FIG. 61(A), first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The first decorative designs 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are a set of designs including a left decorative design 8L1, a middle decorative design 8C1, and a right decorative design 8R1 displayed relatively upward on the display screen 7a. The variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation) is represented by the variable display of symbols, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L1, the middle decorative pattern 8C1 and the right decorative pattern 8R1 are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The second decorative designs 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are a set of designs including a left decorative design 8L2, a middle decorative design 8C2, and a right decorative design 8R2 displayed relatively lower on the display screen 7a. The variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation) is represented by the variable display of symbols, and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L2, the middle decorative pattern 8C2 and the right decorative pattern 8R2 are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

The variable displays of the first and second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are independent of each other, while representing the variable display of the same special pattern (special pattern fluctuation), and the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern is lost. In the case of , all the first and second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixed and stopped in a losing mode. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern is a hit, at least one of the first and second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is determined and stopped in a winning mode. Here, the fluctuation start timings of the first and second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the fluctuation stop timings of the left decorative pattern, the right decorative pattern, and the middle decorative pattern are all the same, but the first and second decorative patterns 8L. , 8C and 8R may be different. In FIG. 61(A), the first and second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are respectively variably displayed corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation).

After that, the first and second decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped in the order of left decorative pattern→right decorative pattern→middle decorative pattern, and as shown in FIG. 61(B), the first and second decorative patterns are displayed. The patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state in which the respective left decorative patterns, right decorative patterns, and middle decorative patterns are temporarily stopped. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L1 of the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 is temporarily stopped at "3", and then the right decorative pattern 8R1 is temporarily stopped at "2". After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C1 is temporarily stopped at "3". As a result, the left decorative design 8L1, the middle decorative design 8C1, and the right decorative design 8R1 are arranged side by side in a failing mode of "332". The left decorative pattern 8L2 of the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is temporarily stopped at "7", and then the right decorative pattern 8R2 is temporarily stopped at "7". After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C2 is temporarily stopped at "6". As a result, the left decorative design 8L2, the middle decorative design 8C2, and the right decorative design 8R2 are arranged side by side in the missing state of "767".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 61(C) to (K), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are arranged side by side in the losing mode of "332", and are arranged side by side in the losing mode of "767". For the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 in the state, a symbol movement effect is executed in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols are aligned and moved inside the display screen 7a. Here, "a set of decorative patterns move together in a state of being lined up in a losing mode" means, of the set of decorative patterns in a losing mode, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern. It means that each pattern of the pattern 8R is moved while maintaining the relative positional relationship with each other in a state of being lined up horizontally in a lost state.

First, as shown in FIGS. 61(C) to (E), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, which are arranged horizontally in the losing mode, are scrolled for the first time. An effect of moving is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are arranged in parallel vertically and are reduced in size while being displayed on the display screen 7a. It moves toward the upper right corner and goes out of the frame from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are framed from the lower left corner of the display screen 7a in the same state as when they are framed out. , moves in the same direction (upper right) as when out of frame. The first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are enlarged and moved toward the center of the display screen 7a while returning to their original sizes. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 that have arrived at the center of the display screen 7a temporarily stop moving.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 61(F) to (H), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2, which are arranged side by side in a losing mode, are scrolled for the second time. An effect of moving is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are arranged in parallel vertically and are reduced in size while being displayed on the display screen 7a. It moves toward the upper right corner and goes out of the frame from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 frame in from the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, and the same direction as when they frame out. (Upper right direction). Here, the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are the same pattern "332" as when the frame is out, but the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are the pattern "767" when the frame is out. It has a different pattern "222". That is, the left decorative design 8L2, the middle decorative design 8C2, and the right decorative design 8R2 are arranged side by side in the winning mode of "222" and come into the frame. The first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are enlarged and moved toward the center of the display screen 7a while returning to their original sizes. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 that have arrived at the center of the display screen 7a temporarily stop moving.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 61(I) to (K), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 arranged horizontally in the losing mode, and the second decorative symbols 8L2 arranged horizontally in the losing mode. , 8C2, and 8R2 perform the third scroll movement. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(I), the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are arranged vertically in parallel and reduced while being displayed on the display screen 7a. It moves toward the upper right corner and goes out of the frame from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(J), the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 frame in from the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, and the same direction as when they frame out. (Upper right direction). Here, the first decorative designs 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 have the same pattern "332" as when they are framed out, but the second decorative designs 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are "222" when they are framed out. It has a different pattern "777". That is, the left decorative design 8L2, the middle decorative design 8C2, and the right decorative design 8R2 are arranged horizontally in the winning mode of "777" and come in the frame. The first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are enlarged and moved toward the center of the display screen 7a while returning to their original sizes. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(K), the first decorative patterns 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 and the second decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 that have arrived at the center of the display screen 7a stop at the same time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61(L), the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1 and 8R1 move toward the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced, and are framed out from the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. After that, the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are determined and stopped. As a result, "777" hit is reported.

[Loss mode pattern movement effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the losing mode symbol movement effect C. FIG. Loss mode symbol movement production is a performance in which a set of decorative symbols for informing the special figure lottery result (whether or not) are aligned in a losing mode and move together. First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and two to three patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when the deceleration fluctuates. are moved vertically and displayed like this. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 62(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation corresponding to the current special figure variation (the variation). The high-speed fluctuation means that the contents of the patterns included in the vertical pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that it is difficult to see them. In this case, a vertical line image may be displayed along with high-speed movement.

As shown in FIG. 62(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at a high speed, and then the speed of fluctuation slows down. Deceleration fluctuation is displayed downward. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that the contents of the patterns included in the pattern arrangement in the vertical direction can be visually recognized. Say. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate from top to bottom while the patterns included in each pattern array are aligned horizontally.

As shown in FIG. 62(B), the first rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols are displayed in a row in the form of "372" on the display screen 7a, and are decelerated and displayed from top to bottom. Frame out from the bottom edge. The subsequent second rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns are displayed in a frame-in from the upper end of the display screen 7a in a row in the missing mode of "483" and moved downward at a reduced speed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the third rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns are displayed in a frame-in from the upper end of the display screen 7a in the form of "594" which is lost, and are decelerated and moved downward. , frame out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The subsequent fourth columns 8L, 8C, and 8R of decorative patterns are displayed in a frame-in from the upper end of the display screen 7a in a row with a missing pattern of "615" and moved downward at a reduced speed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(D), "615" in the fourth row of the decorative pattern is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The following fifth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of decorative patterns are arranged in a winning manner of "777" and are framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a and displayed by decelerating and moving downward.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(E), "777" in the fifth row of the decorative pattern is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The subsequent sixth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of decorative patterns are displayed in a frame-in from the upper end of the display screen 7a in a manner of losing "826" and moving downward at a reduced speed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(F), an effect is executed in which the interval between rows of decorative symbols is narrowed. "826" in the sixth column of the decorative pattern is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The following seventh rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of decorative patterns are arranged in a winning mode of "666" and are framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a and displayed by decelerating and moving downward. The time between "826" in the 6th row of the decorative pattern and "666" in the 7th row of the decorative pattern is shortened, and "826" in the 6th row of the decorative pattern The space between "666" in the seventh row of the decorative pattern is narrowed. Further, the following eighth rows of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a frame-in from the upper end of the display screen 7a and displayed in a decelerating downward movement in the form of "832". The time between "666" in the 7th row of decorative patterns and "832" in the 8th row of decorative patterns is shortened, and "666" in the 7th row of decorative patterns The space between "832" in the eighth column of the decorative pattern is narrowed. As a result, the decorative patterns of the three columns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(G), the effect of narrowing the interval between rows of decorative symbols is continued. "666" in the seventh column of the decorative pattern is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. "832" in the eighth column of the decorative pattern that follows is displayed by decelerating and moving downward. Further, the subsequent ninth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of decorative patterns are arranged in a winning manner of "222" and framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and are decelerated and displayed downward. The time between "832" in the 8th row of the decorative pattern and "222" in the 9th row of the decorative pattern is shortened, and "832" in the 8th row of the decorative pattern The space between "222" in the ninth row of the decorative pattern is narrowed. As a result, the display screen 7a maintains a state in which the decorative patterns of the three columns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be visually recognized at the same time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(H), a variation direction change effect is executed in which the variation directions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed. Here, the direction of variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is the opposite direction. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are decelerated and variably displayed from bottom to top. As a result, "222" in the ninth column of the decorative pattern is framed out from the upper end of the display screen 7a. Further, "832" in the eighth column of the decorative pattern moves upward and then temporarily stops above the display screen 7a. In addition, after "666" in the seventh column of the decorative pattern is also moved upward, it temporarily stops at the center of the display screen 7a. After "826" in the sixth row of the decorative pattern also moves upward, it temporarily stops below the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 62 (I) to (K), "832" in the eighth row of the decorative pattern of the losing mode, "666" in the seventh row of the decorative pattern of the winning mode, and the decoration of the losing mode "826" in the 6th column of the pattern performs a horizontal scroll movement effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62(I), "832" in the 8th row, "666" in the 7th row, and "826" in the 6th row of the decorative pattern are aligned to the left. , and frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(J), the 8th, 7th, and 6th columns of the decorative pattern line up in the frame from the right end of the display screen 7a, and move in the same direction (to the left) as when they left the frame. direction). Here, the 8th column of the decorative pattern is the pattern "832" with the same content as when the frame is out, and the 6th column of the decorative pattern is also the pattern "826" with the same content as when the frame is out. On the other hand, the seventh row of decorative patterns has a pattern "777" different from the pattern "666" when the frame is out. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(K), "832" in the 8th column, "777" in the 7th column, and "826" in the 6th column of the decorative patterns that have arrived at the center of the display screen 7a are moved. stop and temporarily stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62(L), "832" in the eighth column of the decorative pattern moves upward and out of the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a. Also, "826" in the sixth row of the decorative pattern moves downward and is framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. After that, "777" in the seventh row of the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at the center of the display screen 7a, and a win is announced.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the losing mode symbol movement effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, it is possible to execute a symbol movement effect in which a set of first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are aligned in a losing state and move together. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 61 and 62 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the symbol movement effect, a set of first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, 8R1 are aligned in a losing state and moved together a plurality of times. executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 61 and 62 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the symbol movement effect, a set of first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 are arranged in a losing state and move together. An effect is executed in which a set of second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are aligned in a win mode and move together. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 61 and 62 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the symbol movement effect, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 move together in a state of being lined up in a losing mode, and lined up in a winning mode. Both of the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 moving together in a state are displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the symbol movement effect, the first decorative symbols 8L1 moving together in a state of being lined up in a losing state. , 8C1, 8R1, and the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 moving in alignment in a win mode, both stop moving, and the symbol movement stop effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. can run. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 61 and 62 are the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the symbol movement stop effect, the first decorative symbols 8L1, 8C1, and 8R1 move together in a state of being lined up in a losing mode, and lined up in a winning mode. Both of the second decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 moving in unison are stopped moving at the same time. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 61 and 62 are the same.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, in the symbol movement effect, the moving direction of the decorative symbols moves together in a losing state, and the decorative symbols move in a winning state. The moving direction of the moving decorative pattern is the same direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 61 and 62 are the same.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the losing mode symbol movement effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The effects of the losing mode symbol movement effects A to C may be combined as appropriate.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns for notifying the propriety,
It is possible to execute a pattern movement effect in which the set of decorative patterns move together in a state of being lined up in a lost state,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
In the symbol movement effect, the effect of moving the set of decorative symbols aligned in a failed state is executed multiple times.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1 or aspect A4-2,
In the symbol movement effect, after the effect of moving the set of decorative patterns in a row in a losing mode, there is an effect in which the set of decorative patterns are aligned in a winning mode and move together. executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3,
In the pattern movement effect, both the decorative patterns that move together in a row in a losing mode and the decorative patterns that move in a row in a winning mode are displayed on the display means,
After the pattern movement performance, the decorative patterns moving together in a state of being lined up in a losing mode and the decorative patterns moving together in a state of being lined up in a win mode are both displayed in a state where the movement is stopped. Capable of executing the symbol movement stop effect displayed on the means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-4,
In the pattern movement stop performance, both the decorative patterns that move together in a row in a losing mode and the decorative patterns that move in a row in a win mode stop moving at the same time.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-3 to A4-5,
In the symbol movement effect, the direction of movement of the decorative symbols aligned in the losing mode and the direction of movement of the decorative symbols aligned in the win mode are the same direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pattern number difference change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. FIG. This pattern number difference change effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the symbol number difference change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Design number difference change effect A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the pattern number difference change effect A. FIG. In the pattern number difference change effect, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern of a set of decorative patterns that notify the result of the special drawing lottery (won or not), the difference between the numbers represented by each pattern is a predetermined value. After moving together in a state where the numbers are lined up, the effect is to move together in a state where the difference between the numbers is a value that is shifted by one from the predetermined value. First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a so that two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when the deceleration fluctuates. are displayed vertically in a row. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 63(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, then the speed of fluctuation slows down, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R move downward from top to bottom. deceleration fluctuation is displayed. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that the contents of the patterns included in the pattern arrangement in the vertical direction can be visually recognized. Say. On the other hand, the high-speed movement means that the contents of the patterns included in the vertical pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that it is difficult to visually recognize them. . In this case, a vertical line image may be displayed along with high-speed movement.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate from top to bottom while the patterns included in each pattern arrangement are arranged in a horizontal row. At this time, an effect is executed in which the difference between the figures represented by the respective patterns of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C aligned horizontally becomes a predetermined value (here, "2"). Any integer can be set as the predetermined value.

The first rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns are aligned and displayed on the display screen 7a in a failing mode of "424", and are decelerated and displayed from top to bottom, and framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “2”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the first row of decorative designs is “2” (=predetermined value). The subsequent second rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns are displayed in a frame-in from the upper end of the display screen 7a and displayed in a decelerated movement downward in the manner of "535" being lost. The difference between the numbers (“5” and “3”) represented by the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C in the second row of decorative patterns is “2” (=predetermined value).

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(B), the third rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the second row of the decorative symbols "535" are arranged in a losing manner of "636" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“6” and “3”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the third row of the decorative design is “3”. That is, the value is shifted by 1 from the predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the third row of decorative patterns is displayed small. This suggests that a pattern with a different value of "3" is arranged instead of "4" if the original pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C is "987654321".

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(C), the fourth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the third row "636" of the decorative symbols are lined up in a losing manner of "747" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“7” and “4”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the fourth row of the decorative design is “3”. That is, the value is shifted by 1 from the predetermined value.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the fifth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the fourth row "747" of the decorative symbols are lined up in a losing manner of "848" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“8” and “4”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the fifth row of the decorative design is “4”. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the fifth column of decorative patterns is displayed small. This suggests that a pattern with a different value of "4" is arranged instead of "5" if the original pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C is "987654321".

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(E), the sixth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the fifth row of the decorative symbols "848" are arranged in a losing manner of "959" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“9” and “5”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the sixth row of the decorative design is “4”. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(F), the seventh rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the sixth row "959" of the decorative symbols are lined up in a losing manner of "151" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“1” and “5”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the seventh row of the decorative design is “4”. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the seventh column of decorative patterns is displayed small. This suggests that a pattern with a different value of "5" is arranged instead of "6" if the original pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C is "987654321".

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(G), the eighth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of decorative symbols following the seventh row of decorative symbols "151" are arranged in a losing manner of "262" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“2” and “6”) represented by the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C in the eighth row of decorative patterns is “4”. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(H), the ninth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the eighth row of decorative symbols "262" are arranged in a losing manner of "313" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“3” and “1”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the ninth row of the decorative design is “2”. That is, the difference returns to the predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the ninth row of decorative patterns is displayed small. This suggests that a pattern with a different value of "1" is arranged instead of "7" in the original pattern arrangement "987654321" of the middle decorative pattern 8C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(I), the tenth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the ninth row "313" of the decorative symbols are arranged in a losing manner of "424" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “2”) represented by the respective designs of the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the tenth column of the decorative design is “2”. That is, the difference becomes a predetermined value.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation with an increased variation speed. Here, a vertical line-shaped image accompanying high-speed movement is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(K), after the high-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed is decelerated, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are decelerated and fluctuated from top to bottom. be done. When the variable deceleration display is performed, an effect is executed in which the difference between the figures represented by the respective patterns of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C arranged in a row becomes "0". In other words, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C have the same numbers. The eleventh columns 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns are aligned in the winning mode of "555" on the display screen 7a and are decelerated and displayed from top to bottom, and framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The difference between the numbers ("5" and "5") represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the 11th column of the decorative design is "0". The following twelfth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of decorative patterns are arranged in a winning mode of "666" and framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a and displayed by decelerating and moving downward. The difference between the numbers ("6" and "6") represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the 12th column of the decorative design is "0". After that, the thirteenth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the twelfth row "666" of the decorative symbols are arranged in a winning mode of "777", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. be done. After that, the rows of decorative symbols before and after the thirteenth row of decorative symbols "777" move upward and downward and are out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(L), only the 13th column "777" of the decorative symbols is displayed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. This will notify you of the win.

[Design number difference change effect B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the symbol number difference change effect B. FIG. In the pattern number difference change effect, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern of a set of decorative patterns that inform the result of the special drawing lottery (won or not), the difference between the numbers represented by each pattern is a predetermined value. After moving together in a state where the numbers are lined up, the effect is to move together in a state where the difference between the numbers is a value that is shifted by one from the predetermined value. First, as shown in FIG. 64(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a so that two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when the deceleration fluctuates. are displayed vertically in a row. Here, the pattern arrangements of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged in the order of "975318642" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 64(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, then the speed of fluctuation slows down, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R move downward from top to bottom. deceleration fluctuation is displayed. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that the contents of the patterns included in the pattern arrangement in the vertical direction can be visually recognized. Say. On the other hand, the high-speed movement means that the contents of the patterns included in the vertical pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that it is difficult to visually recognize them. . In this case, a vertical line image may be displayed along with high-speed movement.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate from top to bottom while the patterns included in each pattern arrangement are arranged in a horizontal row. At this time, an effect is executed in which the difference between the figures represented by the respective patterns of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C aligned horizontally becomes a predetermined value (here, "0"). In addition, an effect is executed in which the difference in numbers represented by the respective patterns of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L arranged in a horizontal line is changed for each combination of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L arranged in a horizontal line.

The first rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns are aligned in the winning mode of "444" on the display screen 7a, and are decelerated and displayed from top to bottom, and framed out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the first row of decorative designs is “0” (=predetermined value). Also, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the first row of the decorative design is “0”. The subsequent second rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns are displayed in a frame-in from the upper end of the display screen 7a and displayed in a decelerated movement downward in the manner of "655" being lost. The difference between the numbers (“5” and “5”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the second row of the decorative design is “0” (=predetermined value). Also, the difference between the numbers ("5" and "6") represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the second row of the decorative design is "1".

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(B), the third rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the second row of the decorative symbols "655" are arranged in a losing manner of "856" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“6” and “5”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the third row of the decorative design is “1”. That is, the value is shifted by 1 from the predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the third row of decorative patterns is displayed small. This suggests that a pattern with a different value of "5" is arranged instead of "6" if the original pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C is "987654321". , the difference between the numbers ("5" and "8") represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the third row of the decorative design is "3".

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(C), the fourth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the third row "856" of the decorative symbols are arranged in a losing manner of "167" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“7” and “6”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the fourth row of the decorative design is “1”. That is, the value is shifted by 1 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers ("6" and "1") represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the fourth row of the decorative design is "5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the fifth row 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the fourth row "167" of the decorative pattern are lined up in a losing manner of "368" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“8” and “6”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the fifth row of the decorative design is “2”. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the fifth column of decorative patterns is displayed small. This suggests that a pattern with a different value of "6" is arranged instead of "7" if the original pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C is "987654321". The difference between the numbers (“6” and “3”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the fifth row of the decorative design is “3”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(E), the sixth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the fifth row "368" of the decorative symbols are arranged in a losing manner of "579" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“9” and “7”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the sixth row of the decorative design is “2”. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers (“7” and “5”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the sixth row of the decorative design is “2”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(F), the seventh rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the sixth row "579" of the decorative symbols are lined up in a losing manner of "731" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“1” and “3”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the seventh row of the decorative design is “2”. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the seventh column of decorative patterns is displayed small. This suggests that a pattern with a different value of "3" is arranged instead of "8" if the original pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C is "987654321". The difference between the numbers (“3” and “7”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the seventh row of the decorative design is “4”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(G), the eighth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the seventh row "731" of the decorative symbols are lined up in a losing manner of "942" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“2” and “4”) represented by the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C in the eighth row of decorative patterns is “2”. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “9”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the eighth column of the decorative design is “5”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(H), the ninth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of decorative patterns following the eighth row of decorative patterns "942" are arranged in a losing manner of "233" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“3” and “3”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the ninth column of the decorative design is “0”. That is, the difference returns to the predetermined value. Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C in the ninth row of decorative patterns is displayed small. This suggests that a pattern with a different value of "3" is arranged instead of "5" if the original pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C is "987654321".

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(I), the tenth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the ninth row "233" of the decorative symbols are arranged in a winning manner of "444" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the tenth column of the decorative design is “0”. That is, the difference becomes a predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the central decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L in the tenth row of decorative patterns is “0”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(J), an effect is executed in which the difference between the figures represented by the respective patterns of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C arranged in a horizontal row becomes "0". In other words, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C have the same numbers. The eleventh rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns following the tenth row "444" of the decorative patterns are arranged in a winning manner of "555", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and displayed by decelerating and moving downward. . The difference between the numbers ("5" and "5") represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the 11th column of the decorative design is "0". Also, the difference between the numbers ("5" and "5") represented by the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L in the 11th row of decorative patterns is "0".

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(K), the twelfth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns following the eleventh row "555" of the decorative patterns are arranged in a winning manner of "666" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers ("6" and "6") represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the 12th column of the decorative design is "0". Also, the difference between the numbers ("6" and "6") represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the 11th column of the decorative design is "0".

After that, the thirteenth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the twelfth row "666" of the decorative symbols are arranged in a winning mode of "777", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. be done. After that, the rows of decorative symbols before and after the thirteenth row of decorative symbols "777" move upward and downward and are out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64(L), only the 13th column "777" of the decorative symbols is displayed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. This will notify you of the win.

[Design number difference change effect C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the pattern number difference change effect C. FIG. In the pattern number difference change effect, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern of a set of decorative patterns that notify the result of the special drawing lottery (won or not), the difference between the numbers represented by each pattern is a predetermined value. After moving together in a state where the numbers are lined up, the effect is to move together in a state where the difference between the numbers is a value that is shifted by one from the predetermined value. First, as shown in FIG. 65(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a so that two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when the deceleration fluctuates. are displayed vertically in a row. Here, the pattern arrangements of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L is arranged in the order of "975318642" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 65(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, then the speed of fluctuation slows down, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R move downward from top to bottom. deceleration fluctuation is displayed. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that the contents of the patterns included in the pattern arrangement in the vertical direction can be visually recognized. Say. On the other hand, the high-speed movement means that the contents of the patterns included in the vertical pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that it is difficult to visually recognize them. . In this case, a vertical line image may be displayed along with high-speed movement.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate from top to bottom while the patterns included in each pattern arrangement are arranged in a horizontal row. At this time, an effect is executed in which the difference between the figures represented by the respective patterns of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C aligned horizontally becomes a predetermined value (here, "0"). In addition, an effect is executed in which the difference in numbers represented by the respective patterns of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L arranged in a horizontal line is changed for each combination of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L arranged in a horizontal line.

The first rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns are displayed on the display screen 7a side by side in a win mode of "444", moving downward at a reduced speed. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the first row of decorative designs is “0” (=predetermined value). Also, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the first row of the decorative design is “0”. The subsequent second rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns are displayed in a frame-in from the upper end of the display screen 7a and displayed in a decelerated movement downward in the manner of "655" being lost. The difference between the numbers (“5” and “5”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the second row of the decorative design is “0” (=predetermined value). Also, the difference between the numbers ("5" and "6") represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the second row of the decorative design is "1".

After that, while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to decelerate and fluctuate, the middle decorative pattern temporary stop performance is executed in which only the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(A), while "4" and "5" vertically aligned as the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped, "4" and "6" vertically aligned as the left decorative pattern 8L are displayed. , "4" and "5" arranged vertically as the right decorative pattern 8R move downward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the combination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is shifted by one, and the second rows of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "645". Line up in a horizontal row as a losing mode. In addition, "8" of the left decorative pattern 8L and "6" of the right decorative pattern 8R are framed in, and "5" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has been temporarily stopped, are lined up in a horizontal row, and "856" is lost. It becomes the third row of decorative patterns. In this state, the middle decorative design 8C resumes its movement in accordance with the deceleration fluctuations of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R.

Due to this middle decorative pattern pause effect, the difference between the numbers ("5" and "4") represented by the respective patterns of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C in the second row "645" of the decorative pattern is "1". becomes. That is, the value is shifted by 1 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “5”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the second row of the decorative design is “1”. The difference between the numbers ("6" and "5") represented by the respective designs of the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the third row "856" of the subsequent decorative design is "1". That is, the value is shifted by 1 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers (“5” and “8”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the third row of the decorative design is “3”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(C), the fourth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the third row "856" of the decorative symbols are arranged in a losing manner of "167" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“7” and “6”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the fourth row of the decorative design is “1”. That is, the value is shifted by 1 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers ("6" and "1") represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the fourth row of the decorative design is "5".

After that, the medium decorative symbol temporary stop effect is executed again. "5" and "6" vertically aligned as the middle decorative pattern 8C are paused, "8" and "1" vertically aligned as the left decorative pattern 8L, and "6" and "6" vertically aligned as the right decorative pattern 8R. 7” move downward respectively. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the combination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is shifted by one, and the fourth rows of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "157". Line up in a horizontal row as a losing mode. In addition, "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and "8" of the right decorative pattern 8R are framed in, and "6" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has been temporarily stopped, are lined up in a horizontal row to form a losing mode of "368". It becomes the 5th column of decorative patterns. In this state, the middle decorative design 8C resumes its movement in accordance with the deceleration fluctuations of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R.

Due to this middle decorative design pause effect, the difference between the numbers ("7" and "5") represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the fourth row "157" of the decorative design is "2". becomes. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers ("5" and "1") represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the fourth row of the decorative design is "4". The difference between the numbers ("8" and "6") represented by the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C in the fifth column "368" of the following decorative patterns is "2". That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers ("6" and "3") represented by the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L in the fifth row of decorative patterns is "3".

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(E), the sixth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the fifth row "368" of the decorative symbols are arranged in a losing manner of "579" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“9” and “7”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the sixth row of the decorative design is “2”. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers (“7” and “5”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the sixth row of the decorative design is “2”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the seventh rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the sixth row "579" of the decorative symbols are lined up in a losing manner of "731" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“1” and “3”) represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the seventh row of the decorative design is “2”. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. The difference between the numbers (“3” and “7”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the seventh row of the decorative design is “4”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(G), the eighth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the seventh row "731" of the decorative symbols are lined up in a losing manner of "942" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers (“2” and “4”) represented by the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C in the eighth row of decorative patterns is “2”. That is, the value is shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “9”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the eighth column of the decorative design is “5”.

After that, the medium decorative symbol temporary stop effect is executed again. "3" and "4" vertically aligned as the middle decorative pattern 8C are paused, "7" and "9" vertically aligned as the left decorative pattern 8L, and "1" and "1" vertically aligned as the right decorative pattern 8R. 2” moves downward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(H), the combination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is shifted by one, and the eighth row of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "932". Line up in a horizontal row as a losing mode. In addition, "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are framed in, and "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has been temporarily stopped, are lined up in a horizontal row to form a losing mode of "243". It becomes the ninth row of decorative patterns.

Due to this middle decorative pattern pause effect, the difference between the numbers ("2" and "3") represented by the respective patterns of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C in the eighth row "932" of the decorative pattern is "1". becomes. That is, the value is shifted by 1 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers (“3” and “9”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the eighth column of the decorative design is “6”. The difference between the numbers (“3” and “4”) represented by the respective designs of the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the ninth row “243” of the following decorative designs is “1”. That is, the value is shifted by 1 from the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “2”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L of the ninth row of the decorative design is “2”.

Here, the middle decorative pattern temporary stop effect continues. "3" and "4" vertically lined up as the middle decorative pattern 8C are kept paused, "9" "2" vertically lined up as the left decorative design 8L, and "2" vertically lined up as the right decorative design 8R. ' and '3' respectively move downward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(I), the combination of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is shifted by two, and the ninth row of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are "233". Line up in a horizontal row as a losing mode. In addition, "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L and "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R are framed in, and "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has been temporarily stopped, are lined up in a horizontal row to form a winning mode of "444". This is the 10th column of decorative patterns.

Due to this intermediate decorative design pause effect, the difference between the numbers ("3" and "3") represented by the respective designs of the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the ninth column "233" of the decorative design is "0". becomes. That is, it returns to the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers (“3” and “2”) represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L of the ninth row of the decorative design is “1”. The difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the respective designs of the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the tenth column “444” of the following decorative design becomes “0”. That is, it returns to the predetermined value. Also, the difference between the numbers (“4” and “4”) represented by the central decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L in the tenth row of decorative patterns is “0”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(J), an effect is executed in which the difference between the figures represented by the respective patterns of the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C arranged in a horizontal row becomes "0". In other words, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C have the same numbers. The eleventh rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative patterns following the tenth row "444" of the decorative patterns are arranged in a winning manner of "555", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and displayed by decelerating and moving downward. . The difference between the numbers ("5" and "5") represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the 11th column of the decorative design is "0". Also, the difference between the numbers ("5" and "5") represented by the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L in the 11th row of decorative patterns is "0".

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(K), the twelfth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of decorative symbols following the eleventh row of decorative symbols "555" are arranged in a winning manner of "666" from the upper end of the display screen 7a. It is framed in and displayed as a deceleration movement downward. The difference between the numbers ("6" and "6") represented by the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C in the 12th column of the decorative design is "0". Also, the difference between the numbers ("6" and "6") represented by the middle decorative design 8C and the left decorative design 8L in the 11th column of the decorative design is "0".

After that, the thirteenth rows 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbols following the twelfth row "666" of the decorative symbols are arranged in a winning mode of "777", framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a, and decelerated and moved downward. be done. After that, the rows of decorative symbols before and after the thirteenth row of decorative symbols "777" move upward and downward and are out of the frame on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(L), only the 13th column "777" of the decorative symbols is displayed, and the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. This will notify you of the win.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the pattern number difference change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C of the set of decorative patterns have a predetermined difference in numbers represented by the respective patterns. After the first effect, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are shifted by 1 from the predetermined value. A second effect of moving together in a state of lining up so as to be can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, after the second effect, the difference between the numbers represented by the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C is shifted from the predetermined value by 2. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the characters move together while lined up so as to have the same value. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, after the third effect, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are arranged such that the difference between the numbers represented by the respective patterns becomes a predetermined value. It is possible to execute a fourth effect of moving together in a state of lining up. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, in the first effect, the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are set so that the difference between the numbers represented by the respective patterns becomes a predetermined value. The effect of moving together in a row is executed a plurality of times, and each time the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C move together in a row, the number represented by the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed. The numbers they represent change. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 65, in the first effect, the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the set of decorative patterns are arranged side by side. Each time the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L are aligned and moved together, the number represented by the middle decorative pattern 8C and the number represented by the left decorative pattern 8L are executed a plurality of times. The difference between According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, after the fourth effect, the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the left decorative pattern 8L are aligned with the same numbers and moved together. A fifth production can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the pattern number difference change effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the pattern number difference change effects A to C, the difference between the right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C has been described as a predetermined value. However, the difference between the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C may be a predetermined value, or the difference between the right decorative design 8R and the left decorative design 8L may be a predetermined value.

[Modification 2]
In the pattern number difference change effects A to C, the effects described above may be combined as appropriate.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns for notifying the propriety,
a first effect in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern of the set of decorative patterns are arranged and moved together so that the difference between the numbers represented by the respective patterns is a predetermined value; ,
After the first effect, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are arranged in a state such that the difference between the numbers represented by the respective patterns is a value shifted by 1 from the predetermined value. A second effect that moves;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
After the second effect, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are arranged in a state such that the difference between the numbers represented by the respective patterns is a value shifted by 2 from the predetermined value. Capable of executing a moving third production,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
After the third effect, the fourth decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern move together in a state in which the difference between the numbers represented by the respective patterns is the predetermined value. capable of performing
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
In the first production, the production in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern move together in a state in which the difference between the numbers represented by the respective patterns is equal to the predetermined value is performed a plurality of times. Each time the first decorative design and the second decorative design are aligned and moved together, the number represented by the first decorative design and the number represented by the second decorative design change. do,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
In the first production, the production in which the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern of the set of decorative patterns are aligned and moved together is executed a plurality of times. and every time the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern are aligned and moved together, the difference between the number represented by the second decorative pattern and the number represented by the third decorative pattern changes,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to claim 3,
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are aligned with the same number and move together can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The effect symbol superimposed effects A to F will be described below with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. This production pattern superimposition production can be executed during the variable production. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the effect symbol superimposition effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the effect symbol superimposed effect A and the effect symbol superimposed effect B. FIG.
[Production pattern superimposed production A]
In the performance symbol superimposed performance A, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

66(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the effect pattern superimposed effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol reaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. At this time, the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "6" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R are enlarged and displayed. As a result, there is a high possibility that the player will expect that the "6" symbol will form a ready-to-win mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), a dark effect is executed. The darkening effect is a effect in which the entire display screen 7a turns dark. Due to the darkening effect, the effect pattern is completely invisible and difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the "6" symbols of the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in an enlarged manner compared to the right symbol stop performance, and the "6" symbols of the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are positioned below. The "5" symbol located above the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol located above are overlapped and displayed. Also, part of the "6" pattern is framed out from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the moving speed of the medium production pattern 8C is slow enough to allow the medium production pattern 8C to be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and then the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the moving speed of the medium effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol reaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. In the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R, the enlarged “6” pattern returns to its original size, and the “5” pattern and the “7” pattern, which are patterns other than the “6” pattern, are non-existent. displayed. Of course, the "5" pattern and the "7" pattern may be displayed inconspicuously, such as by translucency. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern passes through the center and the "7" pattern stops. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols. This makes it easy to understand that the jackpot has been won.

[Production pattern superimposed production B]
In the performance symbol superimposed performance B, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left production pattern 8L and the middle right production patterns 8C and 8R is reversed. When the left effect pattern 8L is variably displayed, "7" pattern → "6" pattern → "5" pattern → "4" pattern → "3" pattern → "2" pattern → "1" pattern → "7" pattern → The patterns are displayed in descending order. On the other hand, when the middle right performance patterns 8C and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern The symbols are displayed in ascending order in the order of →“1” symbol→.

66(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol superimposed effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 66(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol reaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. At this time, the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "6" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R are enlarged and displayed. As a result, there is a high possibility that the player will expect that the "6" symbol will form a ready-to-win mode. At this time, the "6" pattern may be displayed so as to be framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(I), a dark effect is executed. The darkening effect is a effect in which the entire display screen 7a turns dark. Due to the darkening effect, the effect pattern is completely invisible and difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(J), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the "6" pattern of the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R is displayed in a larger size than the right pattern stop production, and the "6" pattern of the left production pattern 8L is positioned below "7". The pattern and the "5" pattern positioned above are displayed overlapping, and the "6" pattern of the right production pattern 8L is displayed overlapping the "5" pattern positioned below and the "7" pattern positioned above. . In addition, the moving speed of the middle production pattern 8C is slowed down to the extent that the middle production pattern 8C can be visually recognized, and part of the "6" patterns of the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R overlaps the middle production pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(K), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and then the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the moving speed of the medium effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol reaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. It should be noted that the "5" pattern and the "7" pattern may be displayed inconspicuously, such as by being translucent. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern passes through the center and the "7" pattern stops. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, the "6" symbol is fixed and stopped in the middle of the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. This makes it easy to understand that the jackpot has been won.

FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the effect symbol superimposed effect C and the effect symbol superimposed effect D. FIG.
[Production pattern superimposition production C]
In the performance symbol superimposed performance C, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

67A to 67F are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol superimposed effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the vertical center of the display screen 7a. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol reaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is a effect of displaying a plurality of predetermined images. Here, a plurality of smiley images SG are displayed so as to fill the display screen 7a. As a result, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a become difficult to see. Although the plurality of smiley images SG are images of the same size, smiley images SG of different sizes may be included. Also, although one type of smile image SG is used, two or more types of images may be used. Furthermore, the smile image SG may be displayed in a moving manner, and an effect may be performed in which the images move in a group.

When the display of the smiley image SG disappears and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R become visible, the symbol interval reduction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 67(D). The symbol interval reduction effect is an effect in which the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are narrowed in the column direction and the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are overlapped in the column direction. Here, as the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R, the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, the "7" pattern and the "8" pattern are shown overlapping. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the "7" symbol has become the ready-to-win symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and then the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the moving speed of the medium effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol reaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. As for the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R, the symbols "5", "6" and "8", which are symbols other than the ready-to-win symbol "7", are not displayed. Of course, the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "8" pattern may be displayed inconspicuously, such as translucent. If it is a big hit, the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "7" pattern passes through the center and the "8" pattern stops. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol. This makes it easy to understand that the jackpot has been won.

[Production pattern superimposed production D]
In the performance symbol superimposed performance D, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

67(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect pattern superimposed effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 67(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol reaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(I), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is a effect of displaying a plurality of predetermined images. Here, a plurality of smiley images SG are displayed so as to fill the display screen 7a. As a result, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a become difficult to see. Although the plurality of smiley images SG are images of the same size, smiley images SG of different sizes may be included. Also, although one type of smile image SG is used, two or more types of images may be used. Furthermore, the smile image SG may be displayed in a moving manner, and an effect may be performed in which the images move in a group.

When the display of the smiley image SG disappears and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R become visible, the symbol interval reduction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 67(J). The symbol interval reduction effect is an effect in which the interval in the column direction of the middle effect pattern 8C is narrowed and the middle effect pattern 8C overlaps in the column direction. Here, it is shown that '3', '4', '5', '6' and '7' are superimposed as the medium effect pattern 8C. In addition, the ready-to-win pattern is "6" pattern, and patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed in the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R. Symbols other than the “6” symbol may be translucent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(K), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "7" pattern are overlapped, and the frontmost "5" pattern disappears first. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern also disappears and the "7" pattern stops. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, the "6" symbol is fixed and stopped in the middle of the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. This makes it easy to understand that the jackpot has been won.

FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the effect symbol superimposed effect E and the effect symbol superimposed effect F. FIG.
[Production pattern superimposed production E]
In the performance symbol superimposed performance E, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

68(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the effect pattern superimposed effect E. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the vertical center of the display screen 7a. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol reaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is a effect of displaying a plurality of predetermined images. Here, a plurality of smiley images SG are displayed so as to fill the display screen 7a. As a result, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a become difficult to see. Although the plurality of smiley images SG are images of the same size, smiley images SG of different sizes may be included. Also, although one type of smile image SG is used, two or more types of images may be used. Furthermore, the smile image SG may be displayed in a moving manner, and an effect may be performed in which the images move in a group.

When the display of the smiley image SG disappears and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R become visible, the symbol interval reduction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 68(D). The symbol interval reduction effect is an effect in which the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are narrowed in the column direction and the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are overlapped in the column direction. Here, it is shown that the "6" pattern and the "7" pattern are overlapped as left and right production patterns 8L and 8R. By overlapping two performance symbols in this way, it is possible to give the player an expectation as to which performance symbol will form a reach. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the "7" symbol has become the ready-to-win symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and then the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the moving speed of the medium effect symbol 8C is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol reaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown. As for the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R, the symbol "6", which is a symbol other than the ready-to-win symbol "7", is not displayed. Of course, the "6" pattern may be displayed inconspicuously, such as by being translucent. If it is a big hit, the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "7" pattern passes through the center and the "8" pattern stops. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol. This makes it easy to understand that the jackpot has been won.

[Production pattern superimposition production F]
In the performance symbol superimposed performance F, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

68(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol superimposed effect F. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 68(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the left effect symbol 8L slows down and then the left effect symbol 8L stops. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the vertical center of the display screen 7a. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R slows down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol reaches the center of the display screen 7a is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(I), an image display effect is executed. The image display effect is a effect of displaying a plurality of predetermined images. Here, a plurality of smiley images SG are displayed so as to fill the display screen 7a. As a result, the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a become difficult to see. Although the plurality of smiley images SG are images of the same size, smiley images SG of different sizes may be included. Also, although one type of smile image SG is used, two or more types of images may be used. Furthermore, the smile image SG may be displayed in a moving manner, and an effect may be performed in which the images move in a group.

When the display of the smiley image SG disappears and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R become visible, the symbol interval reduction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 68(J). The symbol interval reduction effect is an effect in which the interval in the column direction of the middle effect pattern 8C is narrowed and the middle effect pattern 8C overlaps in the column direction. Here, it is shown that the "6" pattern and the "7" pattern are overlapped as the medium effect pattern 8C. In addition, the ready-to-win pattern is "6" pattern, and patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed in the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R. Symbols other than the “6” symbol may be translucent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(K), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The middle symbol stop effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, after the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol to be stopped are enlarged and displayed, one of the symbols is stopped. If it is a big hit, "6" symbols remain on the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, "7" symbols remain on the display screen 7a. Here, the explanation is continued assuming that it was a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, the "6" symbol is fixed and stopped in the middle of the left, middle and right performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R. This makes it easy to understand that the jackpot has been won.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the production pattern superimposition production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a variable display is performed in a plurality of symbol rows, and the symbols arranged in front and behind in a specific symbol row do not overlap in the first state (FIGS. 66 (B) (H), 67 (B) ( H), Figures 68 (B) (H)), the second state in which the patterns arranged in the front and rear overlap (Figures 66 (D) (J), Figures 67 (D) (J), Figures 68 (D) (J)) A symbol superimposition effect is executed. According to this configuration, the variable display of the symbols becomes novel, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control corresponds to "a production|presentation execution means."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, on the way from the first state in which the symbols do not overlap to the second state in which the symbols overlap, the specific symbol row is set to the third state in which it is difficult to see (FIGS. 66(C) and 66(I)). , FIG. 67(C)(I), FIG. 68(C)(I)). According to this configuration, by making it difficult to see, it is possible to give the player an expectation of how the subsequent performance symbols will be displayed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, by displaying the smile image SG superimposed on the specific symbol row, the specific symbol row is placed in the third state in which it is difficult to see (FIGS. 67(C) (I), 68(C) ) (I)). According to this configuration, by displaying the smile image SG to make it difficult to see, it is possible to give the player an expectation of how the subsequent performance patterns will be displayed, and enhance the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the symbol superimposition effect is executed by enlarging and displaying at least one symbol forming a specific symbol row (Figs. 66(D), 66(J), 68(K)). According to this configuration, since at least one pattern is enlarged and the patterns are overlapped, the variation display of the patterns becomes more original, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, part of the enlarged and displayed pattern is framed out from the display screen 7a in the pattern superimposition effect (Fig. 66(D)). According to this configuration, at least one pattern is enlarged to overlap the patterns and a part of the enlarged pattern is out of the frame. can.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the symbol superimposition effect is executed in a state where the symbols forming the specific symbol row are stopped and displayed (Figs. 66(D)(J), 67(D), 68( D)). According to this configuration, the positional relationship and the like of the symbols stopped and displayed are changed, so that the variable display of the symbols becomes more novel, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the symbol superimposition effect, the "6" symbol, which is the enlarged left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, is displayed overlapping the medium effect symbol 8C constituting the adjacent symbol row ( FIG. 66(J)). According to this configuration, the enlarged pattern overlaps the pattern forming the adjacent pattern row, so that the variation display of the pattern becomes more original, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, before the variable display of a plurality of symbol rows is completed, the second state in which the symbols aligned in front and behind in the specific symbol row are overlapped is returned to the first state in which the symbols aligned in front and behind are not overlapped ( Figures 66 (E) (K), Figures 67 (E) (L), Figures 68 (E) (L)). According to this configuration, since the pattern superimposition effect is executed during the variable display, the variable display of the symbols becomes more innovative, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the production pattern superimposition production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, an effect is performed such that all of the plurality of symbol rows are difficult to see. On the other hand, one or two of the left pattern row consisting of the left production pattern 8L, the middle pattern row consisting of the middle production pattern 8C, and the right pattern row consisting of the right production pattern 8R An effect may be performed to make it difficult to see.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, an effect is performed such that all of the plurality of symbol rows are difficult to see. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which such an effect of making the visibility difficult is not performed. Specifically, the effects of FIGS. 66(C)(I), 67(C)(I), and 68(C)(I) may be omitted.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, only the "6" pattern is enlarged and displayed (FIGS. 66(D) and (J)), but a plurality of symbols may be enlarged and displayed. At this time, for example, the symbol "6" and the symbol "7" may be displayed in an enlarged manner so as to form a double reach.

[Modification 4]
In the above-described embodiment, a darkening effect is performed (FIGS. 66(C) and (I)), but instead of a complete darkening, a solid display may be used.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine,
A performance executing means capable of performing variable display in a plurality of pattern rows and executing a pattern superimposition performance from a first state in which patterns arranged in front and behind in a specific pattern row do not overlap to a second state in which patterns arranged in front and behind overlap, is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1,
In the symbol superimposition effect, the effect execution means changes the specific symbol row to a third state in which the particular symbol row is difficult to see, on the way from the first state to the second state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
The effect executing means sets the third state by displaying a specific image that overlaps the specific symbol row.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
The effect execution means executes the symbol superimposition effect by enlarging and displaying at least one symbol constituting the specific symbol sequence.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4,
The effect executing means causes a part of the enlarged and displayed pattern to be framed out from the display screen in the pattern superimposition effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-5,
The effect execution means executes the symbol superimposition effect in a state in which the symbols forming the specific symbol row are stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-6,
The effect execution means displays the symbols in the second state in the symbol superimposition effect superimposed on the symbols forming the symbol row adjacent to the specific symbol row.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-7,
The effect executing means returns the symbols in the second state to the first state before the end of the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The effect symbol change effects A to F will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. This production pattern change production can be executed during the variable production. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the performance symbol change performance is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the performance symbol change performance A and the performance symbol change performance B. FIG.
[Production pattern change production A]
In the performance symbol change performance A, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

69(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), a symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variably displayed in a plurality of rows are stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "5" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is stopped at "4" symbol. In other words, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a losing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the right symbol enlargement effect (previous term) is executed. The right symbol enlargement effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol is enlarged. Here, the state where the "4" symbol, which is the right effect symbol 8R, is enlarged is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the right symbol enlargement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "4" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R is enlarged to such an extent that it cannot be recognized as "4". A part of the "4" pattern overlaps with the "5" pattern of the middle effect pattern 8C. The "5" pattern of the middle effect pattern 8C and the "6" pattern of the left effect pattern 8L are in a recognizable state, but the "4" pattern is not fully covered with the "4" pattern. The symbols may be enlarged and displayed so as to hide the "5" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C and the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the right symbol change effect is executed. The right pattern change production is a production in which the right production pattern becomes a production pattern different from the production pattern before enlargement. Here, the right production pattern 8R is a "6" pattern. The timing of the "6" pattern is not particularly limited, but it is conceivable to set the "6" pattern after the pattern becomes difficult to recognize due to enlarged display and before the pattern is reduced and becomes easy to see. The "6" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R is gradually reduced. At this time, the stopped medium effect pattern 8C starts to fluctuate again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the ready-to-win mode is formed by the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the reduced "6" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R. Also, the moving speed of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the "6" pattern of the middle effect pattern 8C is approaching the center of the display screen 7a. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern of the medium production pattern 8C stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern of the medium production pattern 8C does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a, and " 7" The symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols.

[Production pattern change production B]
In the performance symbol change performance B, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

69(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 69(G), a symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variably displayed in a plurality of rows are stopped. Here, the left production pattern 8L is stopped at "6" pattern, the middle production pattern 8C is stopped at "5" pattern, and the right production pattern 8R is stopped at "6" pattern. In other words, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a reach-losing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(H), medium symbol enlargement effect (early stage) is executed. The middle pattern enlargement production is a production in which the middle production pattern is enlarged. Here, the state where the "5" symbol, which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is enlarged is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(I), the middle symbol enlargement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "5" symbol of the medium effect symbol 8C is enlarged to such an extent that it cannot be recognized as "5". A part of the "5" pattern overlaps the "6" pattern of the left production pattern 8L, and a part of the "5" pattern overlaps the "6" pattern of the right production pattern 8R. This makes it difficult to recognize not only the middle effect pattern 8C but also the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R. The "5" pattern may be enlarged and displayed until the "5" pattern covers the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(J), a middle symbol change effect is executed. The medium pattern change production is a production in which the medium production pattern becomes a production pattern different from the production pattern before enlargement. Here, the medium effect pattern 8C is a "6" pattern. The timing of the "6" pattern is not particularly limited, but it is conceivable to set the "6" pattern after the pattern becomes difficult to recognize due to enlarged display and before the pattern is reduced and becomes easy to see. The "6" pattern of the medium effect pattern 8R is gradually reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(K), a middle symbol reduction effect is executed. The medium pattern reduction production is a production in which the medium production pattern is reduced. Here, the "6" pattern is reduced so as to approach the size of the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols.

FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the effect symbol change effect C and the effect symbol change effect D. FIG.
[Production pattern change production C]
In the performance symbol change performance C, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

70(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 70(A), a symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variably displayed in a plurality of rows are stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped at "6" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at "5" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is stopped at "4" symbol. In other words, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a losing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the right symbol rotation effect (early stage) is executed. The right symbol rotation effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol rotates. Here, the "4" symbol, which is the right effect symbol 8R, is shown rotating clockwise as indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), the right symbol rotation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "4" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R continues rotating clockwise as indicated by the arrow Y, and shows just before going out of the frame on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the right symbol change effect is executed. The right pattern change production is a production in which the right production pattern becomes another production pattern. Here, the right effect symbol 8R is a "6" symbol, showing a state in which it is framed in the display screen 7a. As indicated by the arrow Y, the right effect symbol 8R is rotating on the display screen 7a. The timing of the "6" pattern is not particularly limited. It should be noted that, along with the frame-in of the "6" symbol, the medium effect symbol 8C that had been stopped starts to fluctuate again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the "6" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "6" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R frame-in form a ready-to-win state. Also, the moving speed of the middle effect pattern 8C is slowed down, and the "6" pattern of the middle effect pattern 8C is approaching the center of the display screen 7a. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern of the medium production pattern 8C stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern of the medium production pattern 8C does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a, and " 7" The symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols.

[Production pattern change production D]
In the performance symbol change performance D, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

70(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 70(G), a symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variably displayed in a plurality of rows are stopped. Here, the left production pattern 8L is stopped at "6" pattern, the middle production pattern 8C is stopped at "9" pattern, and the right production pattern 8R is stopped at "6" pattern. In other words, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a reach-losing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(H), the middle symbol enlargement rotation effect (early stage) is executed. The medium design enlargement and rotation production is a production in which the medium production design is rotated after being enlarged. Here, a state in which the "9" symbol, which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is enlarged is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(I), the middle symbol enlargement rotation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the "9" symbol of the medium effect symbol 8C is rotated clockwise as indicated by the arrow Y after being enlarged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(J), a middle symbol change effect is executed. The middle pattern change production is a production in which the middle production pattern becomes another production pattern. Here, the medium effect pattern 8C is a "6" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(K), a middle symbol reduction effect is executed. The medium pattern reduction production is a production in which the medium production pattern is reduced. Here, the "6" pattern is reduced so as to approach the size of the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols.

FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the effect symbol change effect E and the effect symbol change effect F. FIG.
[Production pattern change production E]
In the performance symbol change performance E, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...". The production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra, which are numbers for identifying the patterns, and pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb, which are character images.

71(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect E. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 71(A), a symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variably displayed in a plurality of rows are stopped. Here, the left production pattern 8L is stopped at "9" pattern, the middle production pattern 8C is stopped at "6" pattern, and the right production pattern 8R is stopped at "7" pattern. In other words, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a losing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), the left symbol enlargement effect (previous term) is executed. The left symbol enlargement effect is an effect of enlarging and displaying the pattern information constituting the left effect symbol. Here, the pattern information 8Lb of the left effect pattern 8L is displayed in an enlarged manner. The identification information 8La is hidden due to the enlarged display of the pattern information 8Lb.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), the left symbol enlargement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the pattern information 8Lb of the left effect pattern 8L is further enlarged and displayed, and a part thereof overlaps the middle effect pattern 8C. Again, the identification information 8La is not displayed. The "6" pattern of the middle effect pattern 8C and the "7" pattern of the right effect pattern 8R are in a recognizable state, but the pattern information 8Lb is enlarged and displayed until the pattern information 8Lb covers the entire display screen 7a. , the "6" symbol of the middle effect symbol 8C and the "7" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R may be hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), the left symbol change effect is executed. The left pattern change effect is a effect in which the pattern information forming the left effect pattern becomes different pattern information. Here, the pattern information 8Lb of the left effect pattern 8L is changed to the same pattern information (symbol information of the teammate character) as the pattern information 8Rb of the right effect pattern 8R. The timing at which the picture information 8Lb changes is not particularly limited, but it may be changed after the picture information 8Lb is enlarged and displayed before the picture information 8Lb is reduced. In addition, with the change of the pattern information 8Lb, the stopped medium effect pattern 8C starts to fluctuate again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the identification information 8La of the left effect symbol 8L becomes "7" as the pattern information 8Lb is displayed in a reduced size, and the right effect symbol 8R forms a ready-to-win state. If it is a big hit, the "7" pattern of the middle production pattern 8C will stop at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "7" pattern of the middle production pattern 8C will not stop at the center of the display screen 7a. 8" The symbol stops at the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the “7” symbol.

[Production pattern change production F]
In the performance symbol change performance F, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...". The production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra, which are numbers for identifying the patterns, and pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb, which are character images.

71(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the effect symbol change effect F. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 71(G), a symbol stop effect is executed. The symbol stop effect is an effect in which all the effect symbols that are variably displayed in a plurality of rows are stopped. Here, the left production pattern 8L is stopped at "6" pattern, the middle production pattern 8C is stopped at "9" pattern, and the right production pattern 8R is stopped at "6" pattern. In other words, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in a reach-losing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(H), the middle symbol enlargement rotation effect (early stage) is executed. The medium design enlargement and rotation production is a production in which the medium production design is rotated after being enlarged. Here, the state where "9", which is the identification information 8Ca constituting the medium effect pattern 8C, is enlarged is shown. The identification information 8Ca is enlarged and displayed so as to cover the pattern information 8Cb so that the pattern information 8Cb is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(I), the middle symbol enlargement rotation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, "9" of the identification information 8Ca forming the medium effect symbol 8C is rotated clockwise as indicated by the arrow Y after being enlarged. At this time, part of the identification information 8Ca overlaps the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(J), a middle symbol change effect is executed. The middle pattern change production is a production in which the middle production pattern becomes another production pattern. Here, the identification information 8Ca of the middle effect pattern 8C is "6".

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(K), a middle symbol reduction effect is executed. The medium pattern reduction production is a production in which the medium production pattern is reduced. Here, "6" of the identification information 8Ca is reduced until it becomes the same size as the identification information 8La, 8Ra of the left and right production patterns 8L, 8R. At this time, the display color of the identification information 8Ca is also changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (big win) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, the pattern information 8Cb is also changed to the pattern information of the teammate character in accordance with the reduction of "6" of the identification information 8Ca.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the production pattern change production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute a symbol change effect in which a losing symbol, which is a symbol constituting a losing mode, is changed to a different symbol other than the losing symbol (FIGS. 69 (D) (J), FIG. 70(D)(J), FIG. 71(D)(J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for a big win even after the performance symbols are stopped in a losing mode, and to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control corresponds to "a production|presentation execution means."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, at least a part of the lost symbols is enlarged and displayed to change to another effect symbol (FIGS. 69(B), (C), (H), (I), FIG. 71(B)(C)(H)(I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the change in the effect pattern stand out, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, at least a part of the lost symbols are rotated and displayed to change to different performance symbols (FIGS. 70(B) to (D)(I)(J), FIG. J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the change in the effect pattern stand out, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, identification information, which is a "number" for identifying a plurality of symbols, is adopted as at least a part of the losing symbols (FIGS. 69(B)-(D)(H)- (J), FIGS. 70(B)-(D)(H)-(J), FIGS. 71(H)-(J)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the change in the production pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the lost pattern 8C is composed of the identification information 8Ca and the pattern information 8Cb. 71(G)-(L)). According to this configuration, the change in the effect pattern becomes novel, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a specific losing pattern is made difficult to see, and then the specific losing pattern is changed to a more easily visible state, thereby changing the losing pattern to another production pattern ( Figures 69(C)(D)(I)(J), Figures 70(C)(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player with the change in the effect pattern, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the winning pattern is changed to another effect pattern to form a ready-to-win mode or a winning mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player with the change in the effect pattern, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the lost symbol is changed to another effect symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player with the change in the effect pattern, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the production pattern change production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, at least a portion of the effect pattern is displayed in an enlarged manner or rotated so as to make the lost pattern difficult to see. On the other hand, a different image may be displayed or the accessory may be moved to make it difficult to see the lost pattern.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the rotating display of the "9" pattern was performed within the display screen 7a (FIGS. 70(H) to (J), FIGS. 71(H) to (J)), but the "9" pattern You may make it enlarge and display so that it cannot be recognized.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the identification information "9" is rotated to change to the identification information "6" (FIGS. 70(H) to (J), FIGS. 71(H) to (J)). At this time, by rotating "9" by 180 degrees, a figure that completely overlaps "6" may be obtained, or even if "9" is rotated by 180 degrees, a figure that does not completely overlap may be obtained. In the latter case, the rotating display of "9" is switched to "6" at a certain timing. Alternatively, in the latter case, the "6" pattern may be rotated 180 degrees from the beginning and displayed as if it were a "9".

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, in FIGS. 71(J) and (K), the display color is changed after the "9" which is the identification information 8Ca of the medium effect symbol 8C is completely rotated, but the rotation in FIG. 71(J) The display color may be changed during the presentation. Further, the display color may be changed according to the change of the pattern information 8Cb in FIG. 71(L).

[Modification 5]
In the above-described embodiment, the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a is used as the axis of rotation when the performance symbols are displayed in rotation. On the other hand, the effect pattern may be rotated and displayed with the direction parallel to the display screen 7a as the axis of rotation.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the effect is performed by rotating "9" to become "6", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, "4" may be rotated and changed to "5" on the way.

[Modification 7]
In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that the symbol change effect is executed only once. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the symbol change effect is executed a plurality of times. For example, by executing the symbol change effect a plurality of times, a configuration may be adopted in which the losing symbol is finally used as a ready-to-win symbol or as a winning symbol. Further, for example, by executing the pattern change effect multiple times, after changing the losing pattern to the ready-to-win pattern, it is stopped in the ready-to-win mode, and the stopped losing pattern in the ready-to-miss mode may be changed to the winning pattern. good.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and notifies winning or losing of a lottery by the stop mode of the symbols,
An effect executing means for executing a pattern change effect for changing a losing pattern, which is a pattern constituting a losing mode as the stop mode, to a different pattern other than the losing pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
The effect execution means enlarges and displays at least a part of the lost pattern and changes it to the different pattern in the pattern change effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1 or aspect A7-2,
The effect execution means rotates and displays at least a part of the lost symbol to change it to the different symbol in the symbol change effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2 or aspect A7-3,
At least part of the lost pattern is identification information for identifying a plurality of patterns,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-4,
The lost pattern is composed of the identification information and pattern information,
The effect execution means changes the identification information in the pattern change effect, and changes the pattern information according to the change in the identification information.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5,
In the pattern change effect, the effect execution means makes the specific losing pattern in a state that is difficult to see, and then changes the specific losing pattern to the different pattern by changing the specific losing pattern to a state that is easy to see. change,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-6,
The different pattern is a winning pattern that is a pattern that constitutes a winning mode, or a reach pattern that is a pattern that constitutes a ready-to-win mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A7-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-7,
The effect executing means executes the pattern change effect after the pattern stops changing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The symbol posture change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. FIG. This pattern attitude change effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a symbol posture change effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Design posture change effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the symbol posture change effect A. FIG. The pattern posture change effect is a performance when the decorative pattern temporarily stops after the variation or after the decorative pattern inclines in the first direction and then returns to the original posture. Figure 72 (A) ~ (G) is the production executed corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation, Figure 72 (H) ~ (N) is executed corresponding to the next second special figure fluctuation It is a production that will be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 72A, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and a character image holding a flat plate (tray) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. The character image is an image of a person displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and is shown holding a large tray overhead with both arms. Here, the tray is represented as a horizontally long rectangular image.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to display fluctuations corresponding to the current special figure fluctuation (the relevant fluctuation), as shown in FIG. Temporarily stop on the tray.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(B), "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped on the tray. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(C), it temporarily stops on the tray at "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in a state of being horizontally arranged on the tray in a losing mode of "635". Here, a game effect is started in which the player wins when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are temporarily stopped on the tray, are not dropped from the tray twice consecutively at the time of the change and at the time of the next change. Whether or not it will be a win in the next variation is determined by prefetching. In other words, an effect is executed in which the game of the variation is successful when the next variation is hit by the look-ahead, and the game is also successful in the next variation. Even if there is no win in the next variation, the game effect may be executed in that variation. In this case, an effect of failing in the game of the variation or the next variation is executed. That is, a failure performance is executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped on the tray are dropped from the tray.

As shown in FIG. 72(D), the tray supported by the person tilts to the right, causing the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped on the tray, to move to the right. An effect of moving in the direction and tilting to the right is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(E), the inclination of the tray returns to its original position, so that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern which have moved rightward and are tilted rightward are displayed. 8R returns to the original position at the original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(F), the tray supported by the person is tilted to the left, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped on the tray, are displayed. moves leftward and tilts leftward respectively. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(G), the inclination of the tray returns to its original position, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern which have moved to the left and are tilted to the left. 8R returns to its original position at its original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped in a state of being horizontally arranged on the tray in a losing mode of "635". At this time, a character image of "1st successful!" is displayed. This suggests that the variation game (first time) was successful. This game effect is executed also in the next change, and if it succeeds, it is a win. After that, the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the next special figure lottery is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(H), "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped on the tray. After that, "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stops on the tray, and then, as shown in FIG. 72(I), "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops on the tray. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in a state in which they are horizontally arranged on the tray in a failing manner of "314". Then, the second effect of the game is started in which the player wins when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped on the tray are not dropped twice in a row.

As shown in FIG. 72(J), the tray supported by the person tilts to the right, causing the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped on the tray. An effect of greatly moving to the right and tilting to the right is executed. In the second game, it moves more and tilts more than in the first game. Specifically, in FIG. 72(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move significantly to the right and tilt to the right more significantly than in FIG. 72(D). . After that, as shown in FIG. 72(K), the inclination of the tray returns to its original position, so that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L, which have largely moved to the right and are greatly inclined to the right, The decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(L), the tray supported by the person tilts to the left, resulting in a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern temporarily stopped on the tray. An effect is executed in which 8R moves greatly to the left and each of them leans greatly to the left. As described above, in the second game, the robot moves and tilts more than in the first game. Specifically, in FIG. 72(L), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are largely moved leftward and tilted largely leftward as compared to FIG. 72(F). . After that, as shown in FIG. 72(M), the inclination of the tray returns to its original position, so that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right The decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in a state of being horizontally arranged on the tray in a losing mode of "314". At this time, a character image of "Second success!!" is displayed. This suggests that the game of variation (second round) was successful. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(N), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are switched to the winning mode of "333", and the game is fixed and stopped. In addition, a character image of "big win!!" is displayed, and "333" big win is announced.

[Design posture change effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the symbol posture change effect B. FIG. The pattern posture change effect is a performance when the decorative pattern temporarily stops after the variation or after the decorative pattern inclines in the first direction and then returns to the original posture. Figure 73 (A) ~ (H) is the production executed corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation, Figure 73 (I) ~ (N) is executed corresponding to the next second special figure fluctuation It is a production that will be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 73(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and an A character image holding a flat plate (tray). Here, only the left decorative pattern 8L out of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed at a reduced speed and can be visually recognized, and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with high speed fluctuation and are difficult to be visually recognized. ing. The A character image is an image of a person displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which a tray is supported overhead with both arms. The A character image has the letter "A" on its face. Here, the tray is represented as a horizontally long rectangular image. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a so that two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when the deceleration fluctuates. are displayed vertically in a row. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, after starting high-speed fluctuation display corresponding to the current special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation), as shown in FIG. Deceleration fluctuation is displayed from top to bottom. The deceleration fluctuation here means moving at such a speed that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical pattern arrangement of the left decorative symbol 8L can be visually recognized. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed with high-speed fluctuations and are difficult to see. The high-speed movement means that the contents of the symbols included in the vertical pattern arrangement of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that it is difficult to see them. In this case, a vertical line image may be displayed along with high-speed movement. Here, the image on the vertical line is not displayed and nothing is displayed. The A character image pops up from the lower side of the display screen 7a in accordance with the deceleration fluctuation display of the left decorative pattern 8L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(B), "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped on the tray. At this time, "7" of the left decorative pattern 8L is also temporarily stopped above "6". That is, two symbols are displayed at the same time in the symbol row forming the left decorative symbol 8L. Thus, here, two symbols are simultaneously displayed in the same symbol row at the time of temporary stop. After that, the right decorative pattern 8R is decelerated, and deceleration fluctuation display is performed from top to bottom. At the same time, the C character image pops up from the lower side of the display screen 7a. The C character image is an image of a person displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which a tray is supported overhead with both arms. The C character image has the letter "C" on its face.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(C), "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped on the tray. At this time, "6" of the right decorative pattern 8R is also temporarily stopped above "5". After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C is decelerated, and decelerated variable display is performed from top to bottom. At the same time, the B character image pops up from the lower side of the display screen 7a. The B character image is an image of a person displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which the person is holding a tray overhead with both arms. The B character image has the letter "B" on its face.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(D), "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped on the tray. At this time, "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8R is also temporarily stopped above "3". As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in a state of being horizontally arranged on the tray in a losing mode of "635". Further, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in a state where the losing mode of "746" is horizontally arranged above "635". Here, a game effect is started in which the player wins when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are temporarily stopped on the tray, are not dropped from the tray twice consecutively at the time of the change and at the time of the next change. Whether or not it will be a win in the next variation is determined by prefetching. In other words, an effect is executed in which the game of the variation is successful when the next variation is hit by the look-ahead, and the game is also successful in the next variation. Even if there is no win in the next variation, the game effect may be executed in that variation. In this case, an effect of failing in the game of the variation or the next variation is executed. That is, a failure performance is executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped on the tray are dropped from the tray.

As shown in FIG. 73(E), the A character image and the C character image move to the right, and the supported tray tilts to the right. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is moved to the right, and an effect of tilting to the right is executed. At the same time, the B character image moves leftward and the supported tray tilts leftward, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped on the tray moves leftward and tilts leftward. A tilting effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(F), the inclination and position of the trays of the character images A to C return to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern 8L that has moved to the right and has been inclined to the right. , the right decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has been moved leftward and tilted leftward, also returns to its original posture at its original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(G), the A character image and the C character image move to the left, and the supported tray is tilted to the left, so that the left ornament temporarily stopped on the tray is displayed. An effect is executed in which the pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move leftward and tilt leftward. At the same time, the B character image moves to the right and the supported tray tilts to the right, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped on the tray moves to the right and tilts to the right. A tilting effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(H), the inclination and position of the trays of the character images A to C return to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern 8L moves leftward and is inclined leftward. , the right decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C that has moved rightward and tilted rightward also returns to its original posture at its original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped in a state of being horizontally arranged on the tray in a losing mode of "635". Also, above "635", "746" also stops. At this time, a character image of "1st successful!" is displayed. This suggests that the variation game (first time) was successful. This game effect is executed also in the next change, and if it succeeds, it is a win. After that, the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the next special figure lottery is started.

As shown in FIG. 73(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at high speed, and then decelerated and displayed above the character images A to C from top to bottom. be. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in a state of being horizontally arranged on the tray in a failing manner of "314". Further, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in a state where the losing mode of "425" is horizontally arranged above "314".

As shown in FIG. 73(J), the A character image and the C character image move greatly to the right, and the supported tray tilts greatly to the right, thereby temporarily stopping the left decoration on the tray. The pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are greatly moved to the right, and an effect is executed in which they are greatly tilted to the right. At the same time, the B character image largely moves to the left, and the supported tray greatly tilts to the left, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped on the tray largely moves to the left, and , an effect of leaning to the left is executed. In the second game, it moves more and tilts more than in the first game. More specifically, in FIG. 73(J), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move to the right more significantly than in FIG. 73(E), and tilt more to the right. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is largely moved leftward and tilted largely leftward. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(K), the inclination and position of the trays of the character images A to C return to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern moves greatly to the right and tilts greatly to the right. 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R return to their original positions at their original positions. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has largely moved to the left and has largely tilted to the left, also returns to its original position.

As shown in FIG. 73(L), the A character image and the C character image move greatly to the left, and the supported tray tilts greatly to the left, thereby temporarily stopping the left decoration on the tray. The pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are greatly moved to the left, and an effect is executed in which they are greatly tilted to the left. At the same time, the B character image moves to the right by a large amount, and the supported tray is tilted to the right by a large amount, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stopped on the tray moves to the right by a large amount, and , an effect of tilting to the right is executed. As described above, in the second game, the robot moves and tilts more than in the first game. More specifically, in FIG. 73(L), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are largely moved leftward and tilted largely leftward as compared to FIG. 73(F). In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is greatly moved to the right and tilted to the right. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(M), the tilt and position of the trays of the character images A to C return to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern moves greatly to the left and tilts greatly to the left. 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R return to their original positions at their original positions. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has largely moved to the right and has largely tilted to the right, also returns to its original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged side by side on the tray in the missing mode of "314" and "425". Temporarily stop. At this time, a character image of "Second success!!" is displayed. This suggests that the game of variation (second round) was successful. After that, as shown in FIG. 73(N), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are switched to the winning mode of "555", and the game is fixed and stopped. In addition, a character image of "big win!!" is displayed, and a "555" big win is announced.

[Pattern posture change effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the symbol posture change effect C. FIG. The pattern posture change effect is a performance when the decorative pattern temporarily stops after the variation or after the decorative pattern inclines in the first direction and then returns to the original posture. Figure 74 (A) ~ (G) is the production executed corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation, Figure 74 (H) ~ (N) is executed corresponding to the next second special figure fluctuation It is a production that will be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(A), on the display screen 7a, there are displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and an A character image, a B character image, and a C character image each holding a flat plate (tray). and is displayed. Here, the tray is represented as a horizontally long rectangular image. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed with high-speed fluctuation. The A character image is an image of a person displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which a tray is supported overhead with both arms. The A character image has the letter "A" on its face. The B character image is an image of a person displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which the person is holding a tray overhead with both arms. The B character image has the letter "B" on its face. The C character image is an image of a person displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and shows a state in which a tray is supported overhead with both arms. The C character image has the letter "C" on its face. Although the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. Special figure fluctuation) is displayed, and the special figure lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a so that two or more patterns can be visually recognized on the display screen 7a at the same time when the deceleration fluctuates. are displayed vertically in a row. Here, the pattern arrangements of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "987654321" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 74(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R start high-speed fluctuation display corresponding to the current special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation), and then, as shown in FIG. 74(B), Deceleration fluctuations are displayed from top to bottom, respectively. The deceleration fluctuation here means that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that the contents of the patterns included in the pattern arrangement in the vertical direction can be visually recognized. Say. On the other hand, high-speed movement means that the contents of the patterns included in the vertical pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move at such a speed that it is difficult to visually recognize them. . In this case, a vertical line image may be displayed along with high-speed movement. Here, an image on a vertical line is displayed.

After that, a game effect is started in which the player wins when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the tray are not dropped from the tray twice consecutively at the time of the change and at the time of the next change. Whether or not it will be a win in the next variation is determined by prefetching. In other words, an effect is executed in which the game of the variation is successful when the next variation is hit by the look-ahead, and the game is also successful in the next variation. Even if there is no win in the next variation, the game effect may be executed in that variation. In this case, an effect of failing in the game of the variation or the next variation is executed. In other words, a failure performance is executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the tray are dropped from the tray.

As shown in FIG. 74(C), the A character image and the C character image move to the right, and the supported tray is tilted to the right, so that the left decorative pattern is decelerated and displayed on the tray. 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved rightward, and an effect is executed in which they are tilted rightward. At the same time, the B character image moves to the left and the supported tray is tilted to the left, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C that is decelerating and fluctuating displayed on the tray moves to the left and points to the left. A production leaning toward is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(D), the inclination and position of the trays of the character images A to C return to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern 8L which has moved to the right and which has been inclined to the right. , the right decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has moved leftward and tilted leftward, also returns to its original posture at its original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(E), the A character image and the C character image move to the left, and the supported tray tilts to the left. An effect in which the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move to the left and are tilted to the left is executed. At the same time, the B character image moves to the right and the supported tray is tilted to the right, so that the middle decorative pattern 8C displayed on the tray moves to the right and faces to the right. A production leaning toward is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(F), the inclination and position of the trays of the character images A to C return to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern 8L moves leftward and is inclined leftward. , the right decorative pattern 8R returns to its original position. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has moved rightward and is tilted rightward, also returns to its original posture at its original position.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped in this order. Specifically, first, "6" of the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped on the tray. At this time, "7" of the left decorative pattern 8L is also temporarily stopped above "6". After that, "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped on the tray. At this time, "6" of the right decorative pattern 8R is also temporarily stopped above "5". After that, "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped on the tray. At this time, "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8R is also temporarily stopped above "3". As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in a state of being horizontally arranged on the tray in a losing mode of "635". Further, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped in a state where the losing mode of "746" is horizontally arranged above "635".

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and stopped in a state of being horizontally arranged on the tray in a losing mode of "635". Also, above "635", "746" also stops. That is, here, two symbols are simultaneously displayed in the same symbol row at the time of temporary stop. At this time, a character image of "1st successful!" is displayed. This suggests that the variation game (first time) was successful. This game effect is executed also in the next change, and if it succeeds, it is a win. After that, the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the next special figure lottery is started.

As shown in FIG. 74(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at high speed, and then decelerated and displayed above the character images A to C from top to bottom. be.

As shown in FIG. 74(I), the A character image and the C character image move greatly to the right, and the supported tray tilts greatly to the right. An effect is executed in which the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are greatly moved to the right and tilted to the right. At the same time, the B character image moves greatly to the left, and the supported tray tilts greatly to the left. At the same time, an effect of greatly tilting leftward is executed. In the second game, it moves more and tilts more than in the first game. More specifically, in FIG. 74(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move to the right more significantly than in FIG. 74(C), and tilt more to the right. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is largely moved leftward and tilted largely leftward. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(J), the inclination and position of the trays of the character images A to C return to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern moves greatly to the right and tilts greatly to the right. 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R return to their original positions at their original positions. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has largely moved to the left and has largely tilted to the left, also returns to its original position.

As shown in FIG. 74(K), the A character image and the C character image move greatly to the left, and the supported tray tilts greatly to the left. An effect is executed in which the decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are largely moved leftward and tilted largely leftward. At the same time, the B character image moves to the right by a large amount, and the supported tray is tilted to the right by a large amount. At the same time, an effect of tilting to the right is executed. As described above, in the second game, the robot moves and tilts more than in the first game. More specifically, in FIG. 74(K), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are largely moved leftward and tilted largely leftward as compared to FIG. 74(E). In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is greatly moved to the right and tilted to the right. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(M), the tilt and position of the trays of the character images A to C return to the original position, so that the left decorative pattern moves greatly to the left and tilts greatly to the left. 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R return to their original positions at their original positions. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has largely moved to the right and has been tilted to the right, also returns to its original position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged side by side on the tray in the missing mode of "314" and "425". Temporarily stop. At this time, a character image of "Second success!!" is displayed. This suggests that the game of variation (second round) was successful. After that, as shown in FIG. 74(M), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are switched to the winning mode of "555", and the game is fixed and stopped. In addition, a character image of "big win!!" is displayed, and a "555" big win is announced.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the pattern posture change effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped after the fluctuation (FIG. 74) or after the temporary stop (FIGS. 72 and 73). , the left and right decorative patterns 8L, 8R are tilted to the right, and then returned to the original posture. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, after the first effect, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R are tilted to the left, and then the second effect is executed to return to the original position. can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the first effect, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R, which are part of a set of decorative symbols for notifying success or failure, are displayed in the right direction. When tilted, the middle decorative pattern 8C, which is another part of the set of decorative patterns, tilts leftward. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the second effect, when the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R, which are part of the decorative symbols, are tilted to the left, other decorative symbols are used. A certain middle decorative pattern 8C is tilted to the right. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, in the first effect, when the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R are tilted to the right, they are moved to the right and then returned to their original positions. When returning to the posture, move in the direction to return to the original position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the first effect, a plurality of decorative symbols in the same symbol row are tilted in the first direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, when the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped after the variation in the variation next to the variation in which the first effect is executed, or After the temporary stop, the left and right decorative patterns 8L, 8R tilt rightward, and then return to the original posture. tilt. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the symbol posture change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the pattern posture change performances A and B, the performance in which the pattern posture is tilted to the left and right after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped is executed. However, at the same time when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped, an effect may be executed in which the attitude of the symbols is tilted to the left or right. In addition, in the symbol posture change effect C, the effect of tilting the symbol posture to the left and right is executed before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R temporarily stop. However, at the same time when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped, an effect may be executed in which the attitude of the symbols is tilted to the left or right.

[Modification 2]
In the pattern posture change performances A and B, the performance in which the posture of the pattern tilts left and right is executed after all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped. However, some of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may be temporarily stopped, and an effect may be executed in which the postures of all the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are tilted left and right while other patterns are fluctuating. In the pattern posture change performance C, a performance is executed in which the posture of the pattern tilts to the left and right while all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are changing. However, an effect may be executed in which the attitudes of all the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are tilted to the left and right while some of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating and the other patterns are temporarily stopped. .

[Modification 3]
In the pattern posture change performances A and B, the performance in which the posture of the pattern tilts left and right is executed after all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped. However, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are fixed and stopped, an effect may be executed in which the attitudes of all the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are tilted to the left and right.

[Modification 4]
In the pattern posture change effects B and C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are temporarily stopped while two patterns are vertically displayed. However, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped while only one symbol is displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the pattern posture change performances B and C, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C tilt in opposite directions when they tilt left and right. However, the left decorative design 8L, the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C may be tilted in the same direction.

[Modification 6]
In the pattern posture change effects B and C, the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed simultaneously in the same pattern row at the time of temporary stop. However, three or more symbols may be displayed simultaneously in the same symbol row.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A8-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
When the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped after the fluctuation, or after the temporary stop, the decorative pattern tilts in the first direction and then returns to the original posture.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-1,
After the first effect, the decorative pattern tilts in a second direction different from the first direction, and then a second effect that returns to the original posture can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
In the first effect, when a part of the decorative patterns of the set of decorative patterns for informing success or failure is tilted in the first direction, the other decorative patterns of the set of decorative patterns are tilted in the first direction. tilting in the second direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-3,
In the second effect, when the part of the decorative patterns tilts in the second direction, the other decorative patterns tilt in the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-4,
In the first effect, when the decorative pattern tilts in the first direction, it moves in the first direction, and when it returns to its original posture, it returns to its original position. to move to
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-5,
In the first effect, the plurality of decorative symbols in the same symbol row are tilted in the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A8-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-6,
In the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops after the variation, or after the temporary stop, the decorative pattern tilts in the first direction, and then returns to the original It is possible to execute a third effect of returning to the posture of
In the third production, it leans more in the first direction than in the first production,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Band image display effects A to F will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. FIG. This band image display effect can be executed during the variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the band image display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the band image display effect A and the band image display effect B. FIG.
[Band image display effect A]
In the band image display effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

75A to 75F are diagrams for explaining band image display effects A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 75(A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation speed (moving speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the vertical center of the display screen 7a. The middle effect pattern 8C forming the middle pattern row and the right effect pattern 8R forming the right pattern row fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the movement speed of the right effect symbol 8R that constitutes the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. In addition, as for the left effect pattern 8L, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the right performance symbol 8R stops at the "6" symbol following the left performance symbol 8L, and the ready-to-win state is formed. Similar to the left effect pattern 8L, the right effect pattern 8R has no symbols other than the "6" pattern. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle pattern variation effect is a effect in which the medium effect pattern 8C is displayed moving at a speed at which the medium effect pattern 8C can be visually recognized. Here, the "4", "5" and "6" symbols of the medium effect patterns 8C forming the medium pattern row are variably displayed. Also, at this time, the strip image OGC superimposed on the "4" pattern, the "5" pattern, and the "6" pattern forming the middle pattern row is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C constituting the medium pattern row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. Here, too, the band image OGC superimposed on the "5" pattern, "6" pattern, and "7" pattern forming the middle pattern row is displayed. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, even in the medium effect pattern 8C, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

75(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining band image display effects B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 75(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation speed (moving speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the vertical center of the display screen 7a. The middle effect pattern 8C forming the middle pattern row and the right effect pattern 8R forming the right pattern row fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R that constitutes the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. In addition, as for the left effect pattern 8L, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the band image OGR overlapping the "5", "6", and "7" patterns forming the right pattern row, and the band image OGC overlapping the medium effect pattern 8C forming the middle pattern row are displayed. It is

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(I), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the right performance symbol 8R stops at the "6" symbol following the left performance symbol 8L, and the ready-to-win state is formed. Similar to the left effect pattern 8L, the right effect pattern 8R has no symbols other than the "6" pattern. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Also displayed here are a band image OGR superimposed on the "6" symbol forming the right pattern row, and a band image OGC superimposed on the middle effect symbol 8C forming the middle symbol row.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(J), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle pattern variation effect is a effect in which the medium effect pattern 8C is displayed moving at a speed at which the medium effect pattern 8C can be visually recognized. Here, the "4", "5" and "6" symbols of the medium effect patterns 8C forming the medium pattern row are variably displayed. Here, too, the band image OGR overlapping the "6" pattern forming the right pattern row, and the band image OGC overlapping the "4", "5" and "6" patterns forming the middle pattern row are displayed. It is

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(K), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C constituting the medium pattern row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. Here, too, the band image OGR overlapping the "6" pattern forming the right pattern row, and the band image OGC overlapping the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern and the "7" pattern forming the middle pattern row are displayed. It is If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. In the medium effect pattern 8C, patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the band image display effect C and the band image display effect D. FIG.
[Band image display effect C]
In the band image display effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

76A to 76F are diagrams for explaining band image display effects C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 76(A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation speed (moving speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the vertical center of the display screen 7a. The middle effect pattern 8C forming the middle pattern row and the right effect pattern 8R forming the right pattern row fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row slows down, and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R that constitutes the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. In addition, as for the left effect pattern 8L, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the strip image OGR superimposed on the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "7" pattern forming the right pattern row is displayed. The band image OGR is displayed on the back side of the right effect symbol 8R. Therefore, regardless of the transparency of the band image OGR, the right effect pattern 8R is easily visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the right performance symbol 8R stops at the "6" symbol following the left performance symbol 8L, and the ready-to-win mode is formed. Similar to the left effect pattern 8L, the right effect pattern 8R has no symbols other than the "6" pattern. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle pattern variation effect is a effect in which the medium effect pattern 8C is displayed moving at a speed at which the medium effect pattern 8C can be visually recognized. Here, the "4", "5" and "6" symbols of the medium effect patterns 8C forming the medium pattern row are variably displayed. Also, at this time, the strip image OGC superimposed on the "4" pattern, the "5" pattern, and the "6" pattern forming the middle pattern row is displayed. Furthermore, a teammate character image CRA is displayed in the background image. The band image OGC is displayed on the back side of the medium effect symbol 8C, and is displayed on the front side of the background image. Therefore, regardless of the transparency of the band image OGR, the right effect pattern 8R is easily visible. On the other hand, depending on the transparency of the band image OGR, the teammate character image CRA may become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C constituting the medium pattern row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, even in the medium effect pattern 8C, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

76(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the band image display effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 76(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation speed (moving speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the vertical center of the display screen 7a. The middle effect pattern 8C forming the middle pattern row and the right effect pattern 8R forming the right pattern row fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row slows down, and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R that constitutes the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. In addition, as for the left effect pattern 8L, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the strip image OGR superimposed on the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "7" pattern forming the right pattern row is displayed. The band image OGR is displayed on the front side of the right effect symbol 8R. Therefore, depending on the transparency of the band image OGR, the right effect pattern 8R may become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(I), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the right performance symbol 8R stops at the "6" symbol following the left performance symbol 8L, and the ready-to-win state is formed. Similar to the left effect pattern 8L, the right effect pattern 8R has no symbols other than the "6" pattern. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(J), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle pattern variation effect is a effect in which the medium effect pattern 8C is displayed moving at a speed at which the medium effect pattern 8C can be visually recognized. Here, the "4", "5" and "6" symbols of the medium effect patterns 8C forming the medium pattern row are variably displayed. Also, at this time, the strip image OGC superimposed on the "4" pattern, the "5" pattern, and the "6" pattern forming the middle pattern row is displayed. Furthermore, a teammate character image CRA is displayed in the background image. The band image OGC is displayed on the front side of the background image and the medium effect pattern 8C. Therefore, depending on the transparency of the band image OGR, the middle effect symbol 8C and the teammate character image CRA may become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(K), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C constituting the medium pattern row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, even in the medium effect pattern 8C, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining band image display effect E and band image display effect F. FIG.
[Band image display effect E]
In the band image display effect E, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

77A to 77F are diagrams for explaining band image display effects E. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation speed (moving speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the vertical center of the display screen 7a. The middle effect pattern 8C forming the middle pattern row and the right effect pattern 8R forming the right pattern row fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row is slowed down, and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the movement speed of the right effect symbol 8R that constitutes the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. In addition, as for the left effect pattern 8L, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the strip image OGR superimposed on the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "7" pattern forming the right pattern row is displayed. The band image OGR is displayed on the back side of the right effect symbol 8R. Therefore, regardless of the transparency of the band image OGR, the right effect pattern 8R is easily visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the right performance symbol 8R stops at the "6" symbol following the left performance symbol 8L, and the ready-to-win mode is formed. Similar to the left effect pattern 8L, the right effect pattern 8R has no symbols other than the "6" pattern. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle pattern variation effect is a effect in which the medium effect pattern 8C is displayed moving at a speed at which the medium effect pattern 8C can be visually recognized. Here, the "4", "5" and "6" symbols of the medium effect patterns 8C forming the medium pattern row are variably displayed. Also, at this time, the strip image OGC superimposed on the "4" pattern, the "5" pattern, and the "6" pattern forming the middle pattern row is displayed. Also, a teammate character image CRA is displayed in the background image. Furthermore, a plurality of smiley images SG are displayed. These images are displayed in order from the front side in the order of smile image SG, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, band image OGC, and teammate character image CRA (background image). Therefore, if the transparency of the band image OGR is lowered, the teammate character image CRA can be made difficult to see, and if the number of smiley images SG is increased, images other than the smiley image SG can be made difficult to be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(E), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C constituting the medium pattern row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit. Although the band image OGC and the smile image SG are not displayed here, at least one of the band image OGC and the smile image SG may be displayed until the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, even in the medium effect pattern 8C, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

77(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining band image display effect F. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 77(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the variation speed (moving speed) of the left effect symbol 8L constituting the left symbol row is slowed down and the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. Here, it is shown that the "6" symbol among the left effect symbols 8L is stopped at the vertical center of the display screen 7a. The middle effect pattern 8C forming the middle pattern row and the right effect pattern 8R forming the right pattern row fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(H), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row slows down, and then the right effect symbol 8R stops. Here, the moving speed of the right effect symbol 8R that constitutes the right symbol row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" symbol approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. In addition, as for the left effect pattern 8L, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the strip image OGR superimposed on the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "7" pattern forming the right pattern row is displayed. The band image OGR is displayed on the front side of the right effect symbol 8R. Therefore, depending on the transparency of the band image OGR, the right effect pattern 8R may become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(I), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the right performance symbol 8R stops at the "6" symbol following the left performance symbol 8L, and the ready-to-win state is formed. Similar to the left effect pattern 8L, the right effect pattern 8R has no symbols other than the "6" pattern. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(J), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle pattern variation effect is a effect in which the medium effect pattern 8C is displayed moving at a speed at which the medium effect pattern 8C can be visually recognized. Here, the "4", "5" and "6" symbols of the medium effect patterns 8C forming the medium pattern row are variably displayed. Also, at this time, the strip image OGC superimposed on the "4" pattern, the "5" pattern, and the "6" pattern forming the middle pattern row is displayed. Also, a teammate character image CRA is displayed in the background image. Furthermore, a plurality of smiley images SG are displayed. The smiley images SG are moved and displayed in a group as indicated by the arrow Y. As shown in FIG. These images are displayed in order from the front side in the order of smile image SG, band image OGC, performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and teammate character image CRA (background image). Therefore, if the transparency of the band image OGR is lowered, it is possible to make the teammate character image CRA and the production design difficult to see, and if the number of smile images SG is increased, images other than the smile image SG can be made difficult to be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(K), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C constituting the medium pattern row is slowed down, and the state immediately before the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction is shown. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit. Although the band image OGC and the smile image SG are not displayed here, at least one of the band image OGC and the smile image SG may be displayed until the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. In the medium effect pattern 8C, patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the production pattern change production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the band images OGR and OGC superimposed on the performance symbols forming the symbol row are displayed along with the variable display (FIGS. 75(D), (E), (H) to (K), (B) (D) (H) (J), FIG. 77 (B) (D) (H) (J)). According to this configuration, the variable display in the symbol row can be emphasized, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Note that the band images OGR and OGC correspond to the "first image", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "display control means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the band image OGR overlapping the right effect symbol 8R constituting the right symbol row and the band image OGC overlapping the middle effect symbol 8C constituting the middle symbol row are displayed along with the variable display. (Figs. 75 (D) (E) (H) to (K), Figs. 76 (B) (D) (H) (J), Figs. 77 (B) (D) (H) (J)). According to this configuration, the variation display in the specific symbol row can be emphasized, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the band image OGC can be displayed on the back side of the production pattern 8C and on the front side of the teammate character image CRA as a background image (FIGS. 76(D) and 77(D). )). According to this configuration, the production pattern 8C is not covered with the band image OGC, and the appearance of the teammate character image CRA changes depending on the transparency of the band image OGC, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the band image OGC can be displayed on the front side of the production pattern 8C and on the front side of the teammate character image CRA as a background image (FIGS. 76(J) and 77(J). )). According to this configuration, the effect pattern 8C and the teammate character image CRA are covered with the band image OGC, and the appearance of the effect pattern 8C and the teammate character image CRA changes depending on the transparency of the band image OGC, so that the interest in the game is improved. can be done.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display a smile image SG that overlaps the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and is different from the band images OGC, OGR (FIGS. 77(D) and (J)). According to this configuration, together with the band images OGC and OGR, the variation display in the specific pattern row can be emphasized, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the smile image SG corresponds to the "second image".

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the smiley image SG different from the band images OGC and OGR can be displayed so as to overlap the plurality of performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R so as to form a group and move (Fig. 77 (J )). According to this configuration, together with the band images OGC and OGR, the variation display in the specific pattern row can be emphasized, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the band image display effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the band images OGC and OGR are displayed during the predetermined period of variable display of the effect symbols 8C and 8R. However, the band images OGC and OGR may be displayed during the variable display, and may be displayed for a short period of time.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the band image OGR overlapping the right effect symbol 8R and the band image OGC overlapping the middle effect symbol 8C were taken as examples. On the other hand, a strip image overlapping the left effect symbol 8L may be displayed. Also, a band image that straddles two or more symbol rows may be displayed. For example, a strip image overlapping the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the band image OGC is displayed on the front side of the teammate character image CRA (background image) (FIGS. 76(D)(J), 77(D)(J)). Therefore, it is possible to increase the transparency of the band image OGC to make it easier to recognize the teammate character image CRA, or to decrease the transparency of the band image OGC to make it difficult to recognize the teammate character image CRA.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, band images OGC and OGR are displayed on the front side of the production patterns 8R and 8C (FIGS. 76(H)(J) and 77(H)(J)). Therefore, the transparency of the band images OGC and OGR can be increased to make the performance patterns 8R and 8C easy to recognize, and the transparency of the band images OGC and OGR can be decreased to make the performance patterns 8R and 8C difficult to recognize.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the transparency of the band images OGC and OGR may be changed with time. For example, the degree of transparency is set low at the beginning of display, and the degree of transparency is increased in accordance with the fluctuation speed of the performance symbols 8C and 8R. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which band images having different degrees of transparency are displayed in one variation. For example, in FIGS. 76 and 77, the transparency of the band image OGC overlapping the middle effect symbol 8C is made different from the transparency of the band image OGR overlapping the right effect symbol 8R.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the opaque smiley image SG is displayed in the foreground (FIGS. 77(D) and (J)). On the other hand, an image having a certain degree of transparency may be used.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A9-1]
A gaming machine that performs variable display with a plurality of symbol rows, stops the plurality of symbol rows with one symbol included in the symbol row as a stop symbol, and notifies a lottery result,
display control means capable of displaying a first image overlapping at least two symbols forming the symbol row in accordance with the variable display of the symbol row;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-1,
The display control means displays the first image so as to overlap the symbols of a specific symbol row among the plurality of symbol rows.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A9-1 or aspect A9-2,
The display control means displays the first image on the back side of the pattern and on the front side of the background image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect A9-1 or aspect A9-2,
The display control means displays the first image on the front side of the pattern and on the front side of the background image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A9-1 to A9-4,
The display control means is capable of displaying a second image different from the first image overlapping the symbols of the symbol row.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-5,
The display control means moves and displays the second image so as to overlap the plurality of symbols in the symbol row.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A9-7]
A gaming machine according to aspects A9-1 to A9-6,
The display control means varies the transparency of the first image according to the variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The special trajectory variation effects A to F will be described below with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. FIG. This special trajectory variation effect can be executed during the variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a special trajectory variation effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the special trajectory variation effect A and the special trajectory variation effect B. FIG.
[Special trajectory variation effect A]
In the special trajectory variation performance A, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

78A to 78F are diagrams for explaining the special trajectory variation effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "2" design, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a special variation effect (previous term) is executed. The special variation effect is an effect in which the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are variably displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "moving display"). Here, "3" symbols, "4" symbols, and "5" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, the "2", "3", "4", and "5" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), a special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, "5" symbols, "6" symbols, and "7" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, the "4", "5", "6", and "7" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. Thus, the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (late stage) are different from the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (early stage). That is, the trajectories YL and YR change and the trajectory is not specified. It should be noted that here we have explained that the trajectory changes between the special variation production (early stage) and the special variation production (late stage), but it may be configured to change the trajectory in stages like this, or continuously from moment to moment. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the trajectory changes to

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both stopped at the "6" symbol, and the ready-to-win state is formed. At this time, patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed in the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(E), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, "4" symbols, "5" symbols and "6" symbols included in the intermediate effect symbols 8C forming the intermediate symbol row are displayed moving along the linear track YC. Note that the trajectory YC does not change, and the trajectory is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, even in the medium effect pattern 8C, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

[Special trajectory variation effect B]
In the special trajectory variation performance B, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

78(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the special trajectory variation effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 78(G), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "2" design, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(H), a special variation effect (early stage) is executed. The special variation effect is an effect in which the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are variably displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "moving display"). Here, "3" symbols, "4" symbols, and "5" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, the "2", "3", "4", and "5" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are moved and displayed so that the vertical direction is parallel to the tracks YL and YR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(I), a special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, "5" symbols, "6" symbols, and "7" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, the "4", "5", "6", and "7" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are moved and displayed such that the vertical direction is parallel to the tracks YL and YR. Thus, the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (late stage) are different from the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (early stage). That is, the trajectories YL and YR change and the trajectory is not specified. It should be noted that here we have explained that the trajectory changes between the special variation production (early stage) and the special variation production (late stage), but it may be configured to change the trajectory in stages like this, or continuously from moment to moment. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the trajectory changes to

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(J), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both stopped at the "6" symbol, and the ready-to-win state is formed. At this time, patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed in the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(K), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, "4" symbols, "5" symbols and "6" symbols included in the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol row are moved and displayed along the trajectory YC. At this time, the production pattern 8C is moved and displayed so that the vertical direction is parallel to the track YC. Note that the trajectory YC does not change, and the trajectory is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, even in the medium effect pattern 8C, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the special trajectory variation effect C and the special trajectory variation effect D. FIG.
[Special trajectory variation effect C]
In the special trajectory variation performance C, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

79A to 79F are diagrams for explaining the special trajectory variation effect C. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "2" design, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a special variation effect (previous term) is executed. The special variation effect is an effect in which the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are variably displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "moving display"). Here, "3" symbols, "4" symbols, and "5" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, "2", "3", "4", and "5" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. Furthermore, the production patterns 8L and 8R include patterns of various sizes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, "5" symbols, "6" symbols, and "7" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, the "4", "5", "6", and "7" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. Furthermore, the production patterns 8L and 8R include patterns of various sizes. Thus, the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (late stage) are different from the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (early stage). That is, the trajectories YL and YR change and the trajectory is not specified. It should be noted that here we have explained that the trajectory changes between the special variation production (early stage) and the special variation production (late stage), but it is also possible to configure the trajectory to change step by step in this way, or continuously from moment to moment. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the trajectory changes to

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both stopped at the "6" symbol, and the ready-to-win state is formed. At this time, patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed in the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. If the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size as the reach mode is formed. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, "4" symbols, "5" symbols and "6" symbols included in the intermediate effect symbols 8C forming the intermediate symbol row are displayed moving along the linear track YC. Also, the production pattern 8C includes patterns of various sizes. Note that the trajectory YC does not change, and the trajectory is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, even in the medium effect pattern 8C, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. In addition, when the "6" pattern is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the fixed stop effect.

[Special trajectory variation effect D]
In the special trajectory variation effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

79(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the special trajectory variation effect D. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 79(G), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "2" design, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(H), a special variation effect (previous term) is executed. The special variation effect is an effect in which the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are variably displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "moving display"). Here, "3" symbols, "4" symbols, and "5" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, "2", "3", "4", and "5" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are moved and displayed such that the vertical direction is perpendicular to the tracks YL and YR. Also, the production patterns 8L and 8R include patterns of various sizes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(I), a special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, "5" symbols, "6" symbols, and "7" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, the "4", "5", "6", and "7" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are moved and displayed so that the vertical direction is perpendicular to the tracks YL and YR. Also, the production patterns 8L and 8R include patterns of various sizes. Thus, the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (late stage) are different from the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (early stage). That is, the trajectories YL and YR change and the trajectory is not specified. It should be noted that here we have explained that the trajectory changes between the special variation production (early stage) and the special variation production (late stage), but it is also possible to configure the trajectory to change step by step in this way, or continuously from moment to moment. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the trajectory changes to

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(J), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol, and the ready-to-win state is formed. At this time, patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed in the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. If the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size as the reach mode is formed. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(K), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, "4" symbols, "5" symbols and "6" symbols included in the middle effect symbols 8C forming the middle symbol row are moved and displayed along the trajectory YC. At this time, the production pattern 8C is moved and displayed so that the vertical direction is perpendicular to the trajectory YC. Also, the production pattern 8C includes patterns of various sizes. Note that the trajectory YC does not change, and the trajectory is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. In the medium effect pattern 8C, patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. In addition, when the "6" pattern is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the fixed stop effect.

FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the special trajectory variation effect E and the special trajectory variation effect F. FIG.
[Special trajectory variation effect E]
In the special trajectory variation performance E, the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

80(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the special trajectory variation effect E. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "2" design, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a special variation effect (previous term) is executed. The special variation effect is an effect in which the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are variably displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "moving display"). Here, "3" symbols, "4" symbols, and "5" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, "2", "3", "4", and "5" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. Furthermore, the production patterns 8L and 8R include patterns of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the production patterns 8L and 8R are not uniform.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, "5" symbols, "6" symbols, and "7" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, the "4", "5", "6", and "7" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. Furthermore, the production patterns 8L and 8R include patterns of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the production patterns 8L and 8R are not constant. Thus, the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (late stage) are different from the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (early stage). That is, the trajectories YL and YR change, and the trajectory is not specified. It should be noted that here we have explained that the trajectory changes between the special variation production (early stage) and the special variation production (late stage), but it is also possible to configure the trajectory to change step by step in this way, or continuously from moment to moment. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the trajectory changes to

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, both the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol, and the ready-to-win state is formed. At this time, patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed in the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. If the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size as the reach mode is formed. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(E), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, "4" symbols, "5" symbols and "6" symbols included in the intermediate effect symbols 8C forming the intermediate symbol row are displayed moving along the linear track YC. In addition, the effect pattern 8C includes patterns of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the effect pattern 8C are not constant. Note that the trajectory YC does not change, and the trajectory is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(F), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, even in the medium effect pattern 8C, the patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. In addition, when the "6" pattern is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the fixed stop effect.

[Special trajectory variation effect F]
In the special trajectory variation effect F, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

80(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the special trajectory variation effect F. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 80(G), a fixed stop effect (losing) is executed. The fixed stop production (loss) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at "1" pattern, the middle effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "2" design, and the right effect pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at "8" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(H), a special variation effect (previous term) is executed. The special variation effect is an effect in which the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are variably displayed (hereinafter also referred to as "moving display"). Here, "3" symbols, "4" symbols, and "5" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, "2", "3", "4", and "5" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the vertical direction of the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R has an appropriate angle with respect to the tracks YL and YR. Moreover, the performance patterns 8L and 8R include patterns of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the performance patterns 8L and 8R are not uniform.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(I), a special variation effect (late stage) is executed. Here, "5" symbols, "6" symbols, and "7" symbols included in the left effect symbol 8L are moved and displayed along the trajectory YL. Also, the "4", "5", "6", and "7" symbols included in the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed along the trajectory YR. At this time, the vertical direction of the left production pattern 8L and the right production pattern 8R has an appropriate angle with respect to the tracks YL and YR. Moreover, the performance patterns 8L and 8R include patterns of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the performance patterns 8L and 8R are not constant. Thus, the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (late stage) are different from the trajectories YL and YR in the special variation performance (early stage). That is, the trajectories YL and YR change and the trajectory is not specified. It should be noted that here we have explained that the trajectory changes between the special variation production (early stage) and the special variation production (late stage), but it may be configured to change the trajectory in stages like this, or continuously from moment to moment. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the trajectory changes to

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(J), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern stops in a ready-to-win mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are both stopped at the "6" symbol, and the ready-to-win state is formed. At this time, patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed in the left and right production patterns 8L and 8R. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. If the "6" symbol is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size as the reach mode is formed. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(K), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The intermediate symbol stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the intermediate effect symbol 8C constituting the intermediate symbol row is slowed down, and then the intermediate effect symbol 8C is stopped. Here, "4" symbols, "5" symbols and "6" symbols included in the middle effect symbols 8C constituting the middle symbol row are moved and displayed along the trajectory YC. At this time, the vertical direction of the production pattern 8C has an appropriate angle with respect to the trajectory YC. In addition, the effect pattern 8C includes patterns of various sizes, and the intervals in the arrangement direction of the effect pattern 8C are not constant. Note that the trajectory YC does not change, and the trajectory is specified. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the vertical center of the display screen 7a, and the "7" pattern stops. do. Here, the explanation will be continued on the assumption that it is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(L), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. The fixed stop production (jackpot) is a production in which the production pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined and stopped at the "6" symbol. In the medium effect pattern 8C, patterns other than the "6" pattern are not displayed. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous. In addition, when the "6" pattern is enlarged or reduced, it returns to the standard size with the fixed stop effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the special trajectory variation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first variation display (Figs. 78(E)(K), Figs. 79(E)(K), Figs. , a second variation display in which the trajectory of the production pattern is not specified (Figs. 78(B)(C)(H)(I), Figs. 79(B)(C)(H)(I), Figs. 80(B)(C )(H)(I)). According to this configuration, the monotonousness of the variable display can be eliminated, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, the microcomputer 91 for production|presentation control corresponds to a "variation display means."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the second variable display is performed during the first period from when the variation starts to when the ready-to-win mode is formed by the stop symbols (FIGS. 78(B), (C), (H) ( I), FIGS. 79(B)(C)(H)(I), FIGS. 80(B)(C)(H)(I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the variation display up to the formation of the ready-to-win state novel, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first variable display is performed in the second period after the formation of reach (FIGS. 78(E)(K), FIGS. 79(E)(K), FIGS. 80(E)(K )). According to this configuration, since the trajectory of the variable display is specified after the reach is formed, the variable display becomes easy to understand, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a plurality of symbols constituting the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed including symbols of different sizes (FIGS. 79(B), (C), (E), (H). ) (I) (K), FIG. 80 (B) (C) (E) (H) (I) (K)). According to this configuration, the monotonousness of the variable display can be further eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the distances between the plurality of symbols forming the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not constant (Fig. 80 (B), (C), (E), (H), (I) ( K)). According to this configuration, the monotonousness of the variable display can be further eliminated, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the performance symbol 8C is moved along a linear trajectory in the first variable display (FIGS. 78(E), 79(E), and 80(E)). According to this configuration, the variable display becomes easier to understand in comparison with the second variable display, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modified example of the special trajectory variation effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, in one variation, the first variable display in which the trajectory of the performance symbol is specified and the second variable display in which the trajectory of the performance symbol is not specified are performed. On the other hand, the variable display may be performed only by the first variable display in which the trajectory of the effect symbol is specified.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the second variable display is performed in parallel with respect to the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R. On the other hand, the second variable display for the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R may be performed in order. For example, the second variable display is performed for the left effect symbol 8L, and after the left effect symbol 8L is stop-displayed, the second variable display is performed for the right effect symbol 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the second variable display is performed in parallel with respect to the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R. On the other hand, the second variable display may be performed for one of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R, and the first variable display may be performed for the other.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the second variable display is performed in parallel with respect to the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R. On the other hand, the second variable display may be performed in parallel with respect to the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this case, the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R may be stopped almost simultaneously. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which stops the medium production|presentation pattern 8C through reach formation by the production|presentation patterns 8L and 8R on either side. Furthermore, after forming the reach with the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R, the first variable display may be performed for the medium performance symbols 8C.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the performance symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C that are variably displayed include symbols of various sizes. The size of the pattern may be changed stepwise or continuously in the variable display (moving display) on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the intervals in the arrangement direction of the performance symbols 8L, 8R, 8C that are variably displayed are not constant. The interval in the arrangement direction may be changed stepwise or continuously in the variable display (moving display) on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, as an example of the case where the trajectory is not specified, the trajectory is changed during the variable display. On the other hand, the case where the trajectory is not specified may include the case where the movement is not displayed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A10-1]
A gaming machine,
variable display means capable of executing a first variable display in which the trajectory of the symbols variably displayed in multiple rows is specified and a second variable display in which the trajectory of the symbols is not specified;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-1,
The variable display means performs the second variable display in a first period from when the variation starts to when the ready-to-win state is formed by the stop symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-2,
The variable display means performs the first variable display in a second period after the formation of the reach.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-3,
In at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display, a plurality of symbols forming a specific symbol row include symbols of different sizes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-4,
In at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display, the distance between a plurality of symbols forming a specific symbol row is not constant.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-5,
The variable display means moves the pattern along a linear trajectory in the first variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-5,
changing the size of a predetermined symbol among the plurality of symbols constituting the specific symbol row according to the variable display;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A10-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect A10-6,
changing the distance between a plurality of symbols constituting the specific symbol row according to the variable display;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning symbol movement effects A to F will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. FIG. This winning symbol movement effect can be executed during the variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the winning symbol movement effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the winning symbol movement effect A and the winning symbol movement effect B. FIG.
[Hit pattern moving effect A]
In the winning symbol movement effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

81(A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining the winning symbol movement effect A. FIG.
After the fluctuation start and reach formation, as shown in FIG. 81(A), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "7" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed. showing the situation. Note that the direction of movement in the variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C is downward as indicated by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are not displayed in the medium effect symbol 8C. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), the symbol movement effect (previous term) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the stopped symbol. Here, performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as winning symbols stopped at the "6" symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, part of the left effect pattern 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the entire left effect pattern 8L is framed out of the display screen 7a, and most of the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are framed out of the display screen 7a. After that, the entire production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), the image display effect (early stage) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the teammate character image CRA is displayed while moving on the display screen 7a. Here, the teammate character image CRA is shown framed in from the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. The teammate character image CRA is moved and displayed in the same direction as the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R as indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, a plurality of related images KG related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is an image showing "6" composed of segments.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), an image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, a state is shown in which the teammate character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the related image KG is also displayed.

[Hit pattern moving effect B]
In the winning symbol moving effect B, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

81(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the winning symbol movement effect B. FIG.
After the fluctuation start and reach formation, as shown in FIG. 81(G), the middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "7" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed. showing the situation. Note that the direction of movement in the variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C is downward as indicated by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(H), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are not displayed in the medium effect symbol 8C. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(I), the symbol movement effect (previous period) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the stopped symbol. Here, performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as winning symbols stopped at the "6" symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, part of the left effect pattern 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(J), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the entire left effect pattern 8L is framed out of the display screen 7a, and most of the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are framed out of the display screen 7a. After that, the entire production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(K), the image display effect (early stage) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the teammate character image CRA is displayed while moving on the display screen 7a. Here, the teammate character image CRA is shown framed in from the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The teammate character image CRA is moved and displayed in the direction opposite to the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R as indicated by the arrow ID. The teammate character CRA enters the frame so that the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R come back from the direction in which they have exited the frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(L), an image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the teammate character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, a plurality of related images KG related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is an image showing "6" composed of segments.

FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the winning symbol movement effect C and the winning symbol movement effect D. FIG.
[Hit pattern moving effect C]
In the winning symbol movement effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

FIGS. 82A to 82F are diagrams for explaining the winning symbol movement effect C. FIG.
After the fluctuation start and reach formation, as shown in FIG. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "7" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed. showing the situation. Note that the direction of movement in the variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C is downward as indicated by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, in the medium effect symbol 8C, the "6" symbol is stopped at the center of the display screen 7a, and the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol which are the missing symbols other than the "6" symbol are also displayed. The lost pattern may be displayed in a translucent manner so as not to stand out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), the symbol movement effect (previous term) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the stopped symbol. Here, performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as winning symbols stopped at the "6" symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, part of the left effect pattern 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol as the missing symbols are still displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the entire left effect pattern 8L is framed out of the display screen 7a, and most of the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are framed out of the display screen 7a. After that, the entire production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol as the missing symbols are still displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), the image display effect (early stage) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the teammate character image CRA is displayed while moving on the display screen 7a. Here, the teammate character image CRA is shown framed in from the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. The teammate character image CRA is moved and displayed in the same direction as the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R as indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, a plurality of related images KG related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is a reduced image of the "6" pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), an image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the teammate character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the related image KG is also displayed.

[Hit pattern moving effect D]
In the winning symbol movement effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

82(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the winning symbol movement effect D. FIG.
After the start of fluctuation and reach formation, as shown in FIG. 82(G), medium symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "7" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed. showing the situation. Note that the direction of movement in the variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C is downward as indicated by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(H), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, in the medium effect symbol 8C, the "6" symbol is stopped in the center of the display screen 7a, and the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol which are the missing symbols other than the "6" symbol are also displayed. The lost pattern may be displayed in a translucent manner so as not to stand out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(I), the symbol movement effect (previous period) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the stopped symbol. Here, performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as winning symbols stopped at the "6" symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. In addition, the "5" symbol and the "7" symbol, which are the losing symbols included in the effect symbol 8C, are also moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID in the same manner as the winning symbol. At this time, part of the left effect pattern 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a. In addition, the entire "5" symbol, which is a lost symbol, is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(J), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the entire left effect pattern 8L is framed out of the display screen 7a, and most of the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are framed out of the display screen 7a. After that, the entire production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(K), the image display rendering (early stage) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the teammate character image CRA is displayed while moving on the display screen 7a. Here, the teammate character image CRA is shown framed in from the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. The teammate character image CRA is moved and displayed in the direction opposite to the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R as indicated by the arrow ID. The teammate character CRA enters the frame so that the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R come back from the direction in which they have exited the frame. At this time, a plurality of related images KG related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is an image obtained by reducing the "6" pattern, and includes images of different sizes. The related images KG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow GD so as to form a group.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(L), the image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the teammate character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Here also, the related images KG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow GD so as to form a group.

FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the winning symbol movement effect E and the winning symbol movement effect F. FIG.
[Hit pattern moving effect E]
In the winning symbol movement effect E, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

FIGS. 83A to 83F are diagrams for explaining the winning symbol movement effect E. FIG.
After the start of fluctuation and reach formation, as shown in FIG. 83(A), medium symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "7" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed. showing the situation. Note that the direction of movement in the variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C is downward as indicated by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are not displayed in the medium effect symbol 8C. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), the symbol movement effect (previous period) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the stopped symbol. Here, performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as winning symbols stopped at the "6" symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, part of the left effect pattern 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the entire left effect pattern 8L is framed out of the display screen 7a, and most of the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are framed out of the display screen 7a. After that, the entire production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), the image display effect (early stage) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the teammate character image CRA is displayed while moving on the display screen 7a. Here, the teammate character image CRA is shown framed in from the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. The teammate character image CRA is moved and displayed in the same direction as the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R as indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, a plurality of related images KG related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is an image showing "6" composed of segments.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), an image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the teammate character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, the related image KG is also displayed. Furthermore, a smile image SG is displayed. The smile image SG is an image different from the related image KG, and is an opaque image.

[Hit pattern moving effect F]
In the winning symbol movement effect F, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

83(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the winning symbol movement effect F. FIG.
After the start of fluctuation and reach formation, as shown in FIG. 83(G), medium symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern, the "6" pattern, and the "7" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed. showing the situation. Note that the direction of movement of the performance symbols 8L, 8R, and 8C in the variable display is downward as indicated by the arrow HD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(H), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, the symbols other than the "6" symbol are not displayed in the medium effect symbol 8C. Patterns other than the "6" pattern may be displayed semi-transparently so as to be inconspicuous.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(I), the symbol movement effect (previous period) is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the stopped symbol. Here, performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as winning symbols stopped at the "6" symbol are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. At this time, part of the left effect pattern 8L is framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(J), the symbol movement effect (late stage) is executed. Here, the direction of movement of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R as the winning symbols is changed, and displayed to move in the direction indicated by the arrow ID. Most of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are framed out from the lower part of the display screen 7a. After that, the entire production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are framed out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(K), the image display effect (early stage) is executed. The image display effect is an effect in which the teammate character image CRA is displayed while moving on the display screen 7a. Here, the teammate character image CRA is shown framed in from the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Also, a plurality of smiley images SG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow GD so as to form a group.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(L), an image display effect (late stage) is executed. Here, it is shown that the teammate character image CRA framed in the display screen 7a is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. At this time, a plurality of related images KG related to the "6" symbol, which is the winning symbol, are displayed. The related image KG is an image showing "6" composed of segments. Again, a plurality of smiley images SG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow GD so as to form a group.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the winning symbol movement effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when a big win is achieved, a big win notification effect is executed, and then an effect of moving the symbols in the big win mode is executed (FIGS. 81(B)-(D)(H)-( J), FIGS. 82(B)-(D)(H)-(J), FIGS. 83(B)-(D)(H)-(J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by starting to move the effect symbol informing of the big win, and to improve the interest of the game. Incidentally, the jackpot notification effect corresponds to the "first effect", the symbol movement effect corresponds to the "second effect", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect executing means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the moving direction of the stopped jackpot symbols (the direction indicated by the arrow ID) is different from the moving direction (the direction indicated by the arrow HD) in the variable display. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the movement of the performance symbol that has notified the big win, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the stopped jackpot symbols are moved and displayed and framed out from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 81 (D) (J), FIGS. 82 (D) (J), and FIG. 83 (D) ( J)). According to this configuration, the performance symbols informing of the big win start to move and the performance symbols protrude from the screen, thereby giving a surprise to the player and improving the amusement of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after moving and displaying the stopped jackpot symbols, the related image KG related to the jackpot symbols and the teammate character image CRA not related to the jackpot symbols are displayed (FIGS. 81(E) and (F)). )(K)(L), FIG. 82(E)(F)(K)(L), FIG. 83(E)(F)(K)(L)). According to this configuration, the effect after the notification of the big win becomes novel, and the amusement of the game can be improved. The related image KG corresponds to the "first image", the teammate character image CRA corresponds to the "second image", and the image display effect corresponds to the "third effect".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of related images KG are displayed and moved to form a group (FIGS. 82(K) and (L)). According to this configuration, the effect after the notification of the big win becomes even more innovative, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the teammate character image CRA is framed in the display screen 7a (Figs. 81(E)(K), Figs. 82(E)(K), Figs. 83(E)(K)). According to this configuration, the effect after the notification of the big win becomes even more innovative, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the winning symbol movement effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved and displayed in a direction different from the moving direction in the variable display. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are moved and displayed in the same direction as the moving direction in the variable display.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the related image KG and the smile image SG are displayed in front of the teammate character image CRA (FIG. 1). Alternatively, at least one of the related image KG and the smile image SG may be translucently displayed so that the friendly character image CRA on the back side can be visually recognized even when it overlaps the friendly character image CRA. good too.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, when moving the related image KG and the smile image SG, they are moved from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the related image KG and the smile image SG may be moved in any direction.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the direction of movement is changed in the course of moving the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (FIGS. 83(I) and (J)), but this movement direction is not limited, and any direction can be used. There may be.

[Modification 5]
The display color and transparency of the related image KG and the smile image SG in the above embodiment may be changed stepwise or continuously during display.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and notifies winning or losing of a lottery by the stop mode of the symbols,
A performance executing means capable of executing a first performance of stop-displaying the symbols in the winning mode when winning the lottery and then executing a second performance of moving the stopped-displayed winning-mode symbols in a specific direction. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The specific direction is a direction different from the movement direction in the variable display of the pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
The effect executing means frames out the pattern of the winning mode from the display screen in the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a third effect of displaying a first image related to the symbol of the winning mode and a second image not related to the symbol of the winning mode after executing the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-4,
The effect executing means, in the third effect, displays a plurality of the first images and moves them in a group.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect B1-3 or Aspect B1-4,
The effect executing means causes the second image to be framed in the display screen in the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-3 to B1-6,
The effect executing means displays a third image different from the second image together with the second image in the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-7,
The effect execution means moves and displays the third image so that the third image forms a group.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-8,
The effect executing means, in the second effect, moves the pattern of the winning mode in the first direction as the specific direction, and then moves it in a second direction different from the first direction as the specific direction. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning symbol mode changing effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. This symbol mode change effect can be executed during the variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the pattern mode change effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect A and the symbol mode change effect B. FIG.
[Design mode change effect A]
In the symbol mode change effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

FIGS. 84A to 84F are diagrams for explaining the symbol mode change effect A. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the ready-to-reach formation effect, when the effect button 63 is pressed, a mode change effect is executed as shown in FIG. 84(C). The aspect change effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the effect pattern. Specifically, the left, middle, right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from a mode composed only of identification information to a mode composed of identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The medium effect pattern 8C is also changed to a mode composed of the identification information 8Ca and the pattern information 8Cb. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. All of the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the stop of the production design, as shown in FIG. 84(F), the mode change production is executed. The aspect change effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the effect pattern. Specifically, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changed from a mode composed of identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb to a mode composed only of identification information. .

[Design mode change effect B]
In the symbol mode change effect B, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

84(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the symbol mode change effect B. FIG.
First, as shown in FIG. 84(G), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(H), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the ready-to-win formation effect, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the mode change effect is executed as shown in FIG. 84(I). The aspect change effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the effect pattern. Specifically, the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R are changed from a mode composed only of identification information to a mode composed of identification information 8La and 8Ra and pattern information 8Lb and 8Rb.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(J), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. The mode of the middle production pattern 8C is not changed. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(K), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. At this time, the left and right performance patterns 8L, 8R are configured with identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the stop of the production design, as shown in FIG. 84(L), the mode change production is executed. The aspect change effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the effect pattern. Specifically, the left and right performance patterns 8L, 8R are changed from the mode in which the identification information 8La, 8Ra and the pattern information 8Lb, 8Rb are configured to the mode in which the identification information alone is configured.

FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect C. FIG.
[Design mode change effect C]
In the symbol mode change effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

First, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction.

When the effect button 63 is pressed during the middle symbol stop effect, as shown in FIG. 85(D), the mode change effect is executed. The aspect change effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the effect pattern. Specifically, the medium effect pattern 8C is changed from a mode composed only of identification information to a mode composed of identification information 8Ca and pattern information 8Cb. In the case of a big hit, the "6" symbol stops in the center of the display screen 7a, and in the case of a loss, the "6" symbol does not stop in the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" symbol appears in the center of the display screen 7a. to stop. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), a win notification effect is executed. The hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in a jackpot mode. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C is configured by the identification information 8Ca and the pattern information 8Cb.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the stop of the production design, as shown in FIG. 85(F), the mode change production is executed. The aspect change effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the effect pattern. Specifically, the medium effect pattern 8C is changed from a mode composed of the identification information 8Ca and the picture information 8Cb to a mode composed only of the identification information.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 85(G) to 85(K), an image display erasing effect is executed. The image display erasing effect is an effect of erasing after displaying a plurality of predetermined images. Here, the effect is to erase after displaying a plurality of smiley images SG. Images of different sizes are mixed in the plurality of smiley images SG.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(G), the effect of displaying the smiley image SG on the display screen 7a is repeated, and the multiple smiley images SG hide the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 85(H), the smile image SG is further increased on the display screen 7a, and almost all of the effect symbols are covered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(I), the smiley images SG on the display screen 7a disappear one by one, and the performance symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are approaching a state in which they can be visually recognized. Next, as shown in FIG. 85(J), the number of smiley images SG on the display screen 7a is further reduced, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are approaching a state in which the whole can be seen. Then, as shown in FIG. 85(K), the smile image SG is completely erased from the display screen 7a.

In this series of image display erasing effects, the mode of the effect pattern changes. Specifically, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from normal "6" patterns to segment "6" patterns. The timing of the change is while the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are difficult to see. Of course, the timing of change is not limited.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(L), left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged and displayed. At this time, part of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be framed out from the display screen 7a.

FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the symbol mode change effect D. FIG.
[Design mode change effect D]
In the symbol mode change effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

First, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a variable start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is a effect in which the effect pattern starts to change. Here, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), a ready-to-win effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction.

When the effect button 63 is pressed during the middle symbol stop effect, as shown in FIG. 86(D), the mode change effect is executed. The aspect change effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the effect pattern. Specifically, the medium effect pattern 8C is changed from a mode composed only of identification information to a mode composed of identification information 8Ca and pattern information 8Cb. In the case of a big hit, the "6" symbol stops in the center of the display screen 7a, and in the case of a loss, the "6" symbol does not stop in the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" symbol appears in the center of the display screen 7a. to stop. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), a win notification effect is executed. The hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in a jackpot mode. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. In addition, the middle effect pattern 8C is configured by the identification information 8Ca and the pattern information 8Cb.

Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the stop of the production design, as shown in FIG. 86(F), the mode change production is executed. The aspect change effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the effect pattern. Specifically, the medium effect pattern 8C is changed from a mode composed of the identification information 8Ca and the picture information 8Cb to a mode composed only of the identification information.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 86(G) to 86(I), an image movement effect is executed. The image moving effect is a effect of displaying and moving a plurality of predetermined images. Here, the effect is such that a plurality of teammate character images MCG are moved into the frame from the right end of the display screen 7a and out of the frame from the left end. Images of different sizes are mixed in the plurality of teammate character images MCG. The teammate character image MCG is an image of the teammate character similar to the images of the pattern information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb when the modes of the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changed, as will be described later. That is, the teammate character image MCG is an image related to the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

First, as shown in FIG. 86(G), the teammate character image MCG is framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a and moved leftward as indicated by the arrow GD. Here, the right effect pattern 8R is covered with the teammate character image MCG and is in a state of being difficult to see. Next, as shown in FIG. 86(H), the teammate character image MCG is moved leftward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow GD, and the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed. becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(I), the teammate character image MCG is further moved to the left as indicated by the arrow GD and goes out of the frame from the left end of the display screen 7a. Here, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are in a state of being easily visually recognized. The middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are changed to a mode composed only of the pattern information 8Cb and 8Rb. At this time, the left effect pattern 8L is in a state of being covered with the teammate character image MCG. Then, as shown in FIG. 86(J), when all teammate character images MCG are out of the frame from the left end of the display screen 7a, the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R can be visually recognized. At this time, like the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R, the left effect pattern 8L is also changed to a mode composed only of the pattern information 8Lb. The picture information 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Rb are pictures of teammate characters similar to the teammate character image MCG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(J), a mode change effect is executed. The aspect change effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the effect pattern. Here, the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changed from a mode composed only of picture information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb to a mode composed of identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and picture information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb. Be changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(L), a mode change effect is further executed. The aspect change effect is an effect that changes the aspect of the effect pattern. In this case, the left, middle, and right performance patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are changed from the mode composed of the identification information 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra and the picture information 8Lb, 8Cb, 8Rb to the mode composed only of the identification information.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the pattern mode change effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the player presses the production button 63, the mode of the production pattern is changed (FIGS. 84 (C) to (E) (I) to (K), FIG. 85 (D ) (E), FIG. 86 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, pressing the effect button 63 changes the mode of the effect pattern, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the effect button 63 corresponds to the "operating means", the mode of the effect pattern composed only of the identification information corresponds to the "first mode", and the mode of the effect pattern composed of the identification information and the pattern information corresponds to " 2nd aspect", and the production control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "display control means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the mode of specific production symbols is changed. Specifically, the mode of the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed (Fig. 84 (C) to (E)), or the mode of the left and right production patterns 8L, 8R is changed (Fig. 84 (I) to (K)), and change the aspect of the medium effect pattern 8C (FIGS. 85(D) and (E), FIGS. 86(D) and (E)). According to this configuration, pressing the production button 63 changes the mode of the specific production pattern, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the aspect of the production pattern is changed during the variable display (Figs. 84 (C) to (E) (I) to (K), Figs. (D)(E)). According to this configuration, since the aspect of the effect pattern changes during the variable display, the width of the variable effect is widened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the effect symbols that have been variably displayed are stopped and displayed, the mode of the effect symbols is returned to the original mode (FIGS. 84 (F) (L), 85 (F), FIG. 86(F)). According to this configuration, since the aspect of the production pattern changes with the stop display, the width of the variable production is widened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode, a plurality of smiley images SG are displayed (FIGS. 85(G) to (K)), or a plurality of teammate character images are displayed. MCG is displayed (FIGS. 86(G) to (J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a surprise to the player after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in the form of a big win, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Note that the smile image SG and the teammate character image CRA correspond to the "predetermined image", and the image display erasing effect for displaying a plurality of smiley images SG and the image movement effect for moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG are the "group effect". Equivalent to

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the mode of the effect pattern is changed in accordance with the image display erasing effect of displaying a plurality of smiley images SG and the image moving effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG (Fig. 85 (K), FIG. 86 (J)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a further surprise to the player after the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the form of a big win, and to improve the interest of the game. The mode of "6" symbols composed of segments in FIG. 85(K) and the mode of effect symbols composed only of pattern information in FIG. 86(J) correspond to the "third mode".

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the design mode change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the performance button 63 is pressed after the ready-to-win formation performance, but of course, the performance pattern mode may be changed by pressing the performance button 63 before the ready-to-win formation performance.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, an effect that prompts the pressing of the effect button 63 is not particularly performed, but an effect that prompts the pressing of the effect button 63 may be performed. For example, a button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a message image such as "press" is displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the mode of the effect pattern is changed in accordance with the image display erasing effect of displaying a plurality of smiley images SG and the image moving effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG. At this time, all aspects of the left, middle, and right production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed (Fig. 85(K), Fig. 86(J)). On the other hand, it may be configured such that only the aspect of a specific production pattern is changed. In other words, the configuration may be such that the mode of at least one of the left, middle, right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and notifies winning or losing of a lottery by the stop mode of the symbols,
an operation means operable by a player;
Display control means for changing the mode of the pattern from the first mode to the second mode when the operation means is operated,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The display control means changes a specific pattern among the patterns from the first mode to the second mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
The display control means changes the mode of the pattern from the first mode to the second mode during the variable display of the pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3,
The display control means changes the mode of the pattern from the second mode to the first mode when the pattern is stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3 or aspect B2-4,
The display control means executes a group effect of displaying a plurality of predetermined images after the symbols are stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
The display control means changes the mode of the pattern to a third mode in accordance with the group effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-6,
The display control means further changes the pattern changed to the third mode to the fourth mode (Fig. 85 (L), Fig. 86 (K)),
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-7,
The display control means returns the pattern changed to the fourth mode to the first mode (FIG. 86 (L)),
A gaming machine characterized by:

Group advance notice continuous effects A to F will be described below with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. This group advance notice continuous effect can be executed during the variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the instruction to execute the group announcement continuous effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103, and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the group advance notice continuous effect A and the group advance notice continuous effect B. FIG.
[Group notice continuous production A]
In the group advance notice continuous effect A, the effect patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

FIGS. 87A to 87F are diagrams for explaining group advance notice continuous effect A. FIG.
After the variable start effect, the ready-to-reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 87(A). The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach forming effect, the first group advance notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 87(B) and (C). The first group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 so that the teammate character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 of different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and then frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, the teammate character MCG1 is displayed moving at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1.

In FIG. 87B, the teammate character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R. In FIG. 87(C), the teammate character image MCG1 has moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the left effect symbol 8L.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 87(D) and (E). The second group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 so that the teammate character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 of different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and then frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, teammate character MCG2 is displayed moving at the second speed as indicated by arrow v2.

In FIG. 87(D), the teammate character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG2 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. In FIG. 87(E), the teammate character image MCG2 has moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character image MCG2 overlaps the left effect symbol 8L. Also, here, a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(F), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols.

[Group notice continuous production B]
In the group advance notice continuous effect B, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

87(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining group announcement continuous effect B. FIG.
After the variable start effect, as shown in FIG. 87(G), the ready-to-reach formation effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach forming effect, the first group advance notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 87(H) and (I). The first group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 so that the teammate character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 of different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and then frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, the teammate character MCG1 is displayed moving at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1.

In FIG. 87(H), the teammate character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R. In FIG. 87(I), the teammate character image MCG1 has moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the left effect symbol 8L.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 87(J) and (K). The second group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 so that the teammate character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 of different sizes enter the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a, move from the upper side of the display screen 7a toward the lower side, and frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a. out. Here, teammate character MCG2 is displayed moving at the second speed as indicated by arrow v2.

In FIG. 87(J), the teammate character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG2 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. In FIG. 87(K), the teammate character image MCG2 has moved to the lower side of the display screen 7a. Also, here, a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(L), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols.

FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the group advance notice continuous effect C and the group advance notice continuous effect D. FIG.
[Group notice continuous effect C]
In the group advance notice continuous effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

FIGS. 88A to 88F are diagrams for explaining group advance notice continuous effect C. FIG.
After the variable start effect, the ready-to-reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 88(A). The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach formation effect, the first group advance notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 88(B) and (C). The first group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 so that the teammate character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 of different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and then frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do.

In FIG. 88B, the teammate character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the moving display is performed at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1. In FIG. 88(C), the teammate character image MCG1 has moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the left effect symbol 8L. At this time, the enemy character image TCG is displayed so as to cover the right performance pattern. Along with the display of the enemy character image TCG, the movement speed of the friend character image MCG changes. Specifically, as indicated by an arrow v3, the moving display is performed at a third speed that is lower than the first speed.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 88(D) and (E). The second group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 so that the teammate character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 of different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and then frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, teammate character MCG2 is displayed moving at the second speed as indicated by arrow v2.

In FIG. 88(D), the teammate character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG2 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. In FIG. 88(E), the teammate character image MCG2 has moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character image MCG2 overlaps the left effect symbol 8L. Also, here, a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols.

[Group notice continuous effect D]
In the group advance notice continuous effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

88(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the group advance notice continuous effect D. FIG.
After the variable start effect, reach forming effect is executed as shown in FIG. 88(G). The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach forming effect, the first group advance notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 88(H) and (I). The first group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 so that the teammate character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 of different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and then frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, the teammate character MCG1 is displayed moving at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1.

In FIG. 88(H), the teammate character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R. In FIG. 88(I), the teammate character image MCG1 has moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the left effect symbol 8L.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 88(J) and (K). The second group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 so that the teammate character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 of different sizes enter the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a, move from the upper side of the display screen 7a toward the lower side, and frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a. out.

In FIG. 88(J), the teammate character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG2 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. At this time, the moving display is performed at the second speed as indicated by the arrow v2. In FIG. 88(K), the teammate character image MCG2 has moved to the lower side of the display screen 7a. Also, here, a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. At this time, the teammate character image MCG2 is moved and displayed at the fourth speed as indicated by the arrow v4. The fourth speed changes according to the moving speed of the medium effect symbol 8C. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(L), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols.

FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the group advance notice continuous effect E and the group advance notice continuous effect F. FIG.
[Group notice continuous production E]
In the group advance notice continuous effect E, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

FIGS. 89A to 89F are diagrams for explaining the group announcement continuous effect E. FIG.
After the variable start effect, the reach forming effect is executed as shown in FIG. 89(A). The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach forming effect, the first group advance notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 89(B) and (C). The first group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 so that the teammate character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 of different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and then frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do.

In FIG. 89B, the teammate character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the moving display is performed at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1. In FIG. 89(C), the teammate character image MCG1 has moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the left effect symbol 8L. At this time, an enemy character image TCG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The enemy character image TCG is displayed overlapping the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. The moving speed of the friend character image MCG changes with the display of the enemy character image TCG. Specifically, as indicated by an arrow v3, the moving display is performed at a third speed that is lower than the first speed.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 89(D) and (E). The second group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 so that the teammate character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 of different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and then frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do. Here, teammate character MCG2 is displayed moving at the second speed as indicated by arrow v2.

In FIG. 89(D), the teammate character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG2 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. In FIG. 89(E), the teammate character image MCG2 has moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character image MCG2 overlaps the left effect symbol 8L. Also, here, a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols.

[Group notice continuous effect F]
In the group advance notice continuous effect F, the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

89(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the group advance notice continuous effect F. FIG.
After the variable start effect, reach forming effect is executed as shown in FIG. 89(G). The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach forming effect, the first group advance notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 89(H) and (I). The first group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 so that the teammate character images MCG1 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 of different sizes frame in from the right end of the display screen 7a, move from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, and then frame out from the left end of the display screen 7a. do.

In FIG. 89(H), the teammate character image MCG1 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the moving display is performed at the first speed as indicated by the arrow v1. In FIG. 89(C), the teammate character image MCG1 has moved to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the teammate character image MCG1 overlaps the left effect symbol 8L. At this time, an enemy character image TCG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The enemy character image TCG is displayed overlapping the production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R. The moving speed of the friend character image MCG changes with the display of the enemy character image TCG. Specifically, as indicated by an arrow v3, the moving display is performed at a third speed that is lower than the first speed.

After the first group notice effect, the second group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 89(J) and (K). The second group notice effect is a effect of moving a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 so that the teammate character images MCG2 form a group. Specifically, a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 of different sizes enter the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a, move from the upper side of the display screen 7a toward the lower side, and frame from the lower end of the display screen 7a. out.

In FIG. 89(J), the teammate character image MCG2 is an opaque image, and the teammate character image MCG2 overlaps the right effect symbol 8R and the left effect symbol 8L. At this time, the enemy character image TCG displayed in the first group announcement effect continues to be displayed, and the ally character image MCG2 is moved and displayed at the third speed as indicated by the arrow v3. In FIG. 89(K), the teammate character image MCG2 has moved to the lower side of the display screen 7a. Also, here, a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. At this time, the teammate character image MCG2 is moved and displayed at the fourth speed as indicated by the arrow v4. The fourth speed changes according to the moving speed of the medium effect symbol 8C. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(L), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the group advance notice continuous effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a first group announcement effect is executed in which a plurality of teammate character images MCG1 are moved so as to form a group of teammate character images MCG1. 87(B)-(E)(H)-(K), FIGS. 88(B)-(E)(H)-(K) , FIGS. 89(B)-(E)(H)-(K)). According to this configuration, the notice effect in the variable effect becomes novel, and the amusement of the game can be improved. The friendly character MCG1 corresponds to the "first image", the first group notice effect corresponds to the "first effect", the friendly character MCG2 corresponds to the "second image", and the second group notice effect corresponds to " 2nd effect", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect executing means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the moving speed of the friend character image MCG1 in the first group notice effect and the moving speed of the friend character image MCG2 in the second group notice effect are changed (FIGS. 88(B) and (C)). (J) (K), FIG. 89 (B) (C) (H) to (K)). According to this configuration, the notice effect in the variable effect becomes more novel, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the teammate character image MCG1 in the first group notice effect and the teammate character image MCG2 in the second group notice effect are moved in different directions (FIGS. 87(H) to (K), FIG. 88(H)-(K), FIG. 89(H)-(K)). According to this configuration, the advance notice effect in the variable effect becomes more novel, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enemy character image TCG superimposed on the effect pattern is displayed in at least one of the first group notice effect and the second group notice effect (FIGS. 88(C), (I), FIG. 89(C)). (I) (J)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will be surprised by the display of the enemy character image TCG, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the enemy character image TCG corresponds to the "third image".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the enemy character image TCG is displayed superimposed on the production pattern to make the specific production pattern difficult to see (FIGS. 88(C)(I), 89(C)(I)). (J)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will be surprised by the display of the enemy character image TCG, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, at least one of the friend character image MCG1 in the first group notice effect and the friend character image MCG2 in the second group notice effect is displayed in front of the enemy character image TCG (FIG. 89 (C ) (I) (J)). According to this configuration, the moving display of the teammate character images MCG1 and MCG2 is conspicuous, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the group advance notice continuous effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the friend character images MCG1 and MCG2 are moved at the third speed, which is lower than the first speed, along with the display of the enemy character image TCG. At this time, the third speed may be set to "0" to temporarily stop the movement of the teammate character images MCG1 and MCG2. In that case, it is conceivable to restart the movement of the teammate character images MCG1 and MCG2 at the timing when the enemy character image TCG is hidden. Alternatively, the third speed may be changed finely.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described embodiment, a part of the production pattern is covered with the enemy character image TCG. On the other hand, the enemy character image TCG may be displayed so as to cover the entire display screen 7a so as to cover the entire production pattern. In this way, it is possible that the production pattern becomes difficult to be visually recognized temporarily, so that expectations for the subsequent variable display may increase, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the fourth speed is set according to the moving speed of the medium effect symbol 8C. This fourth speed may be the same as the moving speed of the middle effect pattern 8C, or may be double or half the moving speed of the middle effect pattern 8C.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the first group notice effect and the second group notice effect are executed after forming the ready-to-win state, but the execution timing of the first group notice effect and the second group notice effect is not particularly limited. For example, both the first group notice effect and the second group notice effect may be executed before forming the reach. Also, for example, the first group advance notice effect may be executed before the reach formation, and the second group notice effect may be executed after the reach formation. As the timing before reach formation, timing immediately after the start of fluctuation or timing of stopping the left symbol can be considered. As the timing after reach formation, the timing immediately after reach formation as in the present embodiment or the timing after the fluctuating middle effect pattern becomes visible can be considered.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the performance symbols may be promoted at the timing when the performance symbols become difficult to see due to the enemy character image TCG and the ally character images MCG1 and MCG2. For example, the reach symbol is promoted to an advantageous reach symbol.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, at least one of the enemy character image TCG and allied character images MCG1 and MCG2 may be an image having transparency such as transparent or translucent, or the transparency may be changed during the production. .

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and notifies winning or losing of a lottery by the stop mode of the symbols,
executing a first effect of moving the plurality of first images such that the first images form a group; Equipped with effect execution means capable of executing a second effect to move,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The effect executing means changes at least one of a moving speed of the first image in the first effect and a moving speed of the second image in the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1 or aspect B3-2,
The effect executing means moves the first image in the first effect and the second image in the second effect in different directions,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
The effect executing means displays a third image superimposed on the pattern in at least one of the first effect and the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
The effect execution means makes the specific pattern difficult to see by displaying the third image superimposed on the pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4 or aspect B3-5,
The effect executing means displays at least one of the first image in the first effect and the second image in the second effect in front of the third image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The multiple image movement effects A to F will be described below with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. This multi-image moving effect can be executed during the variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a multiple image movement effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. FIG.

FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the multiple image movement effect A and the multiple image movement effect B. FIG.
[Multiple Image Movement Effect A]
In the plural image moving effect A, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

FIGS. 90A to 90F are diagrams for explaining the plural image movement effect A. FIG.
After the variable start effect, the ready-to-reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 90(A). The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the ready-to-win effect, the image moving effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 90(B) to (E). In the image moving effect, a plurality of friend character images MCG framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and out of the frame from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character images TCG framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a are performed. An effect of moving downward and out of the frame from the lower end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 90(B), on the display screen 7a, four teammate character images MCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the friend character image MCG.

In FIG. 90(C), on the display screen 7a, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, all teammate character images MCG are framed out of the display screen 7a, and only enemy character images TCG are displayed.

In FIG. 90(D), on the display screen 7a, five teammate character images MCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD in front of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the friend character image MCG. It should be noted that the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize them.

In FIG. 90(E), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, all teammate character images MCG are framed out of the display screen 7a, and only enemy character images TCG are displayed. Also, here, a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. Note that when all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image moving effect ends.

[Multiple Image Movement Effect B]
In the multiple image movement effect B, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

90(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the multiple image movement effect B. FIG.
After the variable start effect, as shown in FIG. 90(G), the ready-to-reach formation effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the medium effect symbol 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the ready-to-win effect, the image moving effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 90(H) to (K). In the image moving effect, a plurality of friend character images MCG framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and out of the frame from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character images TCG framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a are performed. An effect of moving leftward and out of the frame from the left end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 90(H), on the display screen 7a, four teammate character images MCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the friend character image MCG.

In FIG. 90(I), on the display screen 7a, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, all teammate character images MCG are framed out of the display screen 7a, and only enemy character images TCG are displayed.

In FIG. 90(J), on the display screen 7a, five teammate character images MCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD in front of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the friend character image MCG.

In FIG. 90(K), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, all teammate character images MCG are framed out of the display screen 7a, and only enemy character images TCG are displayed. Also, here, a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(L), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. Note that when all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image moving effect ends.

FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the plural image movement effect C and the plural image movement effect D. FIG.
[Multiple Image Movement Effect C]
In the plural image moving effect C, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

FIGS. 91A to 91F are diagrams for explaining the multi-image movement effect C. FIG.
After the variable start effect, the reach forming effect is executed as shown in FIG. 91(A). The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the ready-to-win effect, the image moving effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 91(B) to (E). In the image moving effect, a plurality of friend character images MCG framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and out of the frame from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character images TCG framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a are performed. An effect of moving downward and out of the frame from the lower end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 91(B), four teammate character images MCG1 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD1 on the display screen 7a. Two teammate character images MCG2 different from the teammate character image MCG1 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD2. Furthermore, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD. As for the anteroposterior relationship between the images, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the farthest side, and the ally character image MCG1, the enemy character image TCG, and the ally character image MCG2 are displayed in order from the far side.

In FIG. 91(C), on the display screen 7a, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the teammate character images MCG1 and MCG2 are all framed out of the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed.

In FIG. 91(D), on the display screen 7a, five teammate character images MCG1 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD1. Also, two teammate character images MCG2 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD2. Furthermore, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD. As for the anteroposterior relationship between the images, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the farthest side, and the ally character image MCG1, the enemy character image TCG, and the ally character image MCG2 are displayed in order from the far side.

In FIG. 91(E), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the teammate character images MCG1 and MCG2 are all framed out of the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character image TCG is displayed. Also, here, a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. Note that when all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image moving effect ends.

[Multiple Image Movement Effect D]
In the multiple-image moving effect D, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

91(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the multi-image movement effect D. FIG.
After the variable start effect, as shown in FIG. 91(G), the ready-to-reach formation effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win mode. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

After the reach forming effect, the image moving effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 91(H) to (K). In the image moving effect, a plurality of friend character images MCG framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and out of the frame from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character images TCG framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a are performed. An effect of moving downward and out of the frame from the lower end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 91(H), four teammate character images MCG1 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD1 on the display screen 7a. Two teammate character images MCG2 different from the teammate character image MCG1 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD2. Furthermore, two enemy character images TCG1 and one enemy character image TCG2 whose display color is different from that of the enemy character image TCG1 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD. As for the anteroposterior relationship between the images, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the farthest side, and in order from the far side, the ally character image MCG1, the enemy character images TCG1, TCG2, and the ally character image MCG2. there is

In FIG. 91(I), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character images TCG1 and one enemy character image TCG2 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. . Here, the teammate character images MCG1 and MCG2 are all framed out of the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character images TCG1 and TCG2 are displayed.

In FIG. 91(J), on the display screen 7a, five teammate character images MCG1 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD1. Also, two teammate character images MCG2 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD2. Furthermore, two enemy character images TCG1 and one enemy character image TCG2 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD. As for the anteroposterior relationship between the images, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the farthest side, and in order from the far side, the ally character image MCG1, the enemy character images TCG1, TCG2, and the ally character image MCG2. there is

In FIG. 91(K), on the display screen 7a, one enemy character image TCG1 and one enemy character image TCG2 are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. . Here, the teammate character images MCG1 and MCG2 are all framed out of the display screen 7a, and only the enemy character images TCG1 and TCG2 are displayed. Also, here, a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "5" pattern and the "6" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "6" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. If it is a big hit, the "6" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "6" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(L), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at "6" symbols. Note that when all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image moving effect ends.

FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the multiple image movement effect E and the multiple image movement effect F. FIG.
[Multiple image movement effect E]
In the plural image moving effect E, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

FIGS. 92A to 92F are diagrams for explaining the multiple image movement effect E. FIG.
After the variable start effect, the ready-to-reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 92(A). The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Also, an enemy character image TCG is displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TDB.

After the reach forming effect, the image moving effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 92(B) to 92(E). In the image moving effect, a plurality of friend character images MCG framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and out of the frame from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character images TCG framed in from the upper end of the display screen 7a are performed. An effect of moving downward and out of the frame from the lower end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 92(B), on the display screen 7a, four teammate character images MCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the friend character image MCG.

In FIG. 92(C), on the display screen 7a, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, all teammate character images MCG are framed out of the display screen 7a, and only enemy character images TCG are displayed.

In FIG. 92(D), on the display screen 7a, five teammate character images MCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD in front of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the friend character image MCG. It should be noted that the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize them.

In FIG. 92(E), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, all teammate character images MCG are framed out of the display screen 7a, and only enemy character images TCG are displayed. The left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R, which are ready-to-win symbols, are changed to "7" symbols, and the middle symbol stop performance is executed here. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "6" pattern and the "7" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "7" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. If it is a big hit, the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "7" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "8" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at the "7" symbol. Note that when all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image moving effect ends.

[Multiple image movement effect F]
In the multiple image movement effect F, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed so as to move downward. The pattern arrangement of the left, middle and right production patterns 8L, 8C and 8R is the same. When production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, "1" pattern → "2" pattern → "3" pattern → "4" pattern → "5" pattern → "6" pattern → "7" pattern → "1" The symbols are displayed in ascending order such as "symbol →...".

92(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the plural image movement effect F. FIG.
After the variable start effect, as shown in FIG. 92(G), the ready-to-reach formation effect is executed. The ready-to-win formation production is a production in which the production pattern forms a ready-to-win state and stops. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "6" symbol to form a ready-to-win state. At this time, the medium effect pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Also, an enemy character image TCG is displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TDB.

After the ready-to-win effect, the image moving effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 92(H) to (K). In the image moving effect, a plurality of friend character images MCG framed in from the lower end of the display screen 7a are moved upward and out of the frame from the upper end, and a plurality of enemy character images TCG framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a are performed. An effect of moving leftward and out of the frame from the left end is performed in parallel.

In FIG. 92(H), on the display screen 7a, four teammate character images MCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD in front of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the friend character image MCG.

In FIG. 92(I), on the display screen 7a, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, all teammate character images MCG are framed out of the display screen 7a, and only enemy character images TCG are displayed.

In FIG. 92(J), on the display screen 7a, five teammate character images MCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow MD in front of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, three enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the friend character image MCG. It should be noted that the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize them.

In FIG. 92(K), on the display screen 7a, two enemy character images TCG are displayed moving in the direction indicated by the arrow TD in front of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, all teammate character images MCG are framed out of the display screen 7a, and only enemy character images TCG are displayed. The left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R, which are ready-to-win symbols, are changed to "7" symbols, and the middle symbol stop performance is executed here. The medium design stop effect is an effect in which the moving speed of the medium effect pattern 8C slows down and the medium effect pattern 8C stops. Here, the "6" pattern and the "7" pattern included in the medium effect pattern 8C are displayed, showing how the "7" pattern approaches the center of the display screen 7a in the vertical direction. If it is a big hit, the "7" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and if it is a loss, the "7" pattern does not stop at the center of the display screen 7a and the "8" pattern stops at the center of the display screen 7a. do. The explanation is continued assuming that it is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(F), a big hit notification effect is executed. The big hit notification effect is a effect in which the effect pattern is stopped in the form of a big win. Here, all of the left, middle, and right performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped at the "7" symbol. Note that when all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, the image moving effect ends.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the multiple image movement effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of teammate character images MCG and MCG1 are moved in directions indicated by arrows MD and MD1, and a plurality of enemy character images TCG, TCG1 and TCG2 are moved in directions indicated by arrows TD. (Fig. 90 (B) (D) (H) (J), Fig. 91 (B) (D) (H) (J), Fig. 92 (B) (D) (H) (J)). According to this configuration, since a plurality of ally character images MCG, MCG1 and a plurality of enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2 are moved and displayed in parallel, the variation performance becomes novel and the interest of the game is improved. can be done. The teammate character images MCG and MCG1 correspond to the “first image”, the direction indicated by the arrows MD and MD1 corresponds to the “first direction”, and the effect of moving the plurality of teammate character images MCG and MCG1 is the “first image”. 1 effect", the enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2 correspond to the "second image", the direction indicated by the arrow TD corresponds to the "second direction", and the plurality of enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2 corresponds to the "second effect", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "effect executing means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when moving the teammate character image MCG1, a plurality of teammate character images MCG2 are moved (FIGS. 91(B), (D), (H), and (J)). Also, when moving the enemy character image TCG1, the enemy character image TCG2 with a different display color is moved ((H) to (K) in FIG. 91). According to this configuration, the variable effect becomes more innovative, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the friend character image MCG2 and the enemy character image TCG2 correspond to the "third image".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, effects are intermittently executed to move the plurality of teammate character images MCG and MCG1 in the directions indicated by the arrows MD and MD1 (FIGS. 90(B), (D), (H) and (J)). , FIGS. 91(B)(D)(H)(J), FIGS. 92(B)(D)(H)(J)). According to this configuration, since the movement effect of the teammate character images MCG and MCG1 is intermittently executed, the change effect becomes more original, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, effects are continuously executed to move the plurality of enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2 in the direction indicated by the arrow TD (FIGS. 90(B)-(E)(H)-( K), FIGS. 91(B)-(E) (H)-(K), FIGS. 92(B)-(E) (H)-(K)). According to this configuration, since the movement effect of the enemy character images TCG, TCG1, and TCG2 is continuously executed, the change effect becomes more innovative, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when all of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed, the execution of the performance of moving the teammate character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2 is stopped. (Fig. 90(F)(L), Fig. 91(F)(L), Fig. 92(F)(L)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand the end of the variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, before moving and displaying the plurality of teammate character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the plurality of enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2, the enemy character image TCG is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow TDB. (Fig. 92 (A) (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player an expectation that something will happen, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Modification]
A modification of the multiple image movement effect will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the friend character image MCG2 and the enemy character image TCG2 as the "third image" are moved in the directions indicated by the arrows MD2 and TD, respectively. On the other hand, the moving direction of the "third image" is not particularly limited. For example, the teammate character image MCG2 may be moved in a direction different from that of the teammate character image MCG1. Also, for example, the enemy character image TCG2 may be moved in a direction different from that of the enemy character image TCG1. Also, the moving speed of the "third image" is not particularly limited. For example, the teammate character image MCG2 may be moved at a speed different from that of the teammate character image MCG1. Further, for example, the enemy character image TCG2 may be moved at a speed different from that of the enemy character image TCG1. According to these configurations, the chaos in the image movement effect increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the teammate character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2 are moved so as to draw straight trajectories. On the other hand, at least one of the teammate character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2 may be moved so as to draw a curved trajectory. In this case, at least part of the curved trajectory drawn by the image may be displayed together with the image.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the effects of moving the teammate character images MCG, MCG1, and MCG2 are intermittently executed. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the effect of moving the teammate character images MCG, MCG1, and MCG2 is continuously executed. Also, the effect of moving the teammate character images MCG, MCG1, and MCG2 may be executed only once without being repeated.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the effects of moving the enemy character images TCG, TCG1, and TCG2 are continuously executed. On the other hand, it is also possible to intermittently execute the effect of moving the enemy character images TCG, TCG1, and TCG2. Also, the effect of moving the enemy character images TCG, TCG1, and TCG2 may be executed only once without being repeated.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the teammate character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2 are opaque images. On the other hand, at least one of the friend character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2 may be an image having transparency. Alternatively, the transparency of at least one of the teammate character images MCG, MCG1, MCG2 and the enemy character images TCG, TCG1, TCG2 may be changed during movement display.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine that performs variable display of symbols and notifies winning or losing of a lottery by the stop mode of the symbols,
A first effect of moving a plurality of first images in a first direction and a second effect of moving a plurality of second images in a second direction different from the first direction are executed in parallel. have the means
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The effect executing means moves a plurality of third images in either one of the first effect and the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2,
The effect execution means is capable of intermittently executing the first effect during the variable display of the symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-3,
The effect execution means is capable of continuously executing the second effect during the variable display of the symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4,
The effect execution means stops execution of the first effect and the second effect when all of the symbols are stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a third effect of moving the second image in a third direction before executing the first effect and the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The production mode selection effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. FIG. This production mode selection production is executed during the variation production of decorative symbols. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the effect mode selection effect, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Production mode selection production A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the effect mode selection effect A. FIG. The performance mode selection performance has a period during which the performance mode can be switched by the player's operation during the variation of the decorative pattern, and a period during which the performance mode is not switched despite the player's operation during the same variation. It is a performance.

Here, the gaming machine 1 is capable of selecting a plurality of performance modes with different background images, music, etc. during the normal state variation performance. The performance mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. - 特許庁In the production mode selection production A, when all of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, the period during which the switching of the production mode by operating the select button 68 is effective (operation effective period), and the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 are displayed. , 8R2 are displaying the deceleration fluctuation display or stopped, the switching of the presentation mode by the operation of the select button 68 becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). That is, when all the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are difficult to see, the switching of the production mode is effective, and when even one pattern is visible, the switching of the production mode is disabled.

The game machine 1 is set with a "battle presentation mode", a "dark presentation mode" and a "happy presentation mode", and one of these presentation modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of a fight between an enemy character and an ally character is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark production mode". In the "happy production mode", a heart background image is displayed.

In the production mode selection production A, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2, production mode suggestive images, background images of enemy characters and ally characters, and pending images. An icon 9A and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L2, a middle decorative pattern 8C2, and a right decorative pattern 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the set of patterns is displayed in a variable manner. represents the variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation), and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. In FIG. 93(A), decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed variation corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation).

The effect mode suggesting image is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the effect mode suggesting image does not move from the upper left position of the display screen 7a. It is also displayed continuously over multiple fluctuations. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, the period during which the effect mode switching is effective (operation valid period), and when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is shown in FIG. 93(B). Switch to "dark production mode".

As shown in FIG. 93(B), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "dark effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are continuously displayed with high speed fluctuation. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, the period during which the effect mode switching is effective (operation valid period) continues, and when the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is It switches to the "happy production mode" shown in FIG.93(C).

As shown in FIG. 93(C), when the effect mode is further switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed again at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "happy effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are continuously displayed with high speed fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(D), the variation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L2 is reduced to display deceleration variation, and the pattern of the left decorative pattern 8L2 becomes visible. A part of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 (left decorative pattern 8L2) becomes the deceleration fluctuation display and the patterns become visible, so that the switching of the production mode becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period).

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(E), the left decorative symbol 8L2 is temporarily stopped at "3". In addition, the variation speed of the right decorative pattern 8R2 is reduced to display deceleration variation, and the pattern of the right decorative pattern 8R2 becomes visible. Since some of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 (the left decorative pattern 8L2 and the right decorative pattern 8R2) are visible, the period during which switching of the production mode is disabled (operation disabled period) continues. In this state, when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is not switched, but instead, an effect mode change suggesting image after the end of fluctuation composed of a character image of "will be switched after completion" is displayed. The effect mode change suggestion image after the end of the variation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in the current variation, but that the effect mode is switched after the current variation ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(F), the right decorative pattern 8R2 is temporarily stopped at "5", the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C2 is reduced, and the deceleration fluctuation display is performed, and then temporarily stopped at "7". do. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixed and stopped in the losing mode of "375". Since the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, it is a period (operation disabled period) in which switching of the production mode is disabled. The display of the effect mode change suggesting image after the end of the variation disappears after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was displayed. Also, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending digestion.

FIG. 93(G) shows a state in which the next variation has started. The next variation is started, and decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed variation. Since the presentation mode change suggesting image after the end of the variation in the previous variation is displayed (FIG. 93(E)), the presentation mode is switched immediately after the start of the next variation regardless of the presence or absence of operation by the player. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected "battle effect mode". The pending icon 9A shifts to the right and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C as shown in FIG. 93(H). Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode switching is valid (operation valid period), and when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is shown in FIG. 93(I). Switch to "dark production mode".

As shown in FIG. 93(I), when the production mode is switched, the display contents of the production mode suggestion image are changed at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "dark effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are continuously displayed with high speed fluctuation. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, the period during which the effect mode switching is effective (operation effective period) continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(J), the variation speed of the left decorative symbol 8L2 is reduced and the deceleration variation display is performed, and the symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L2 becomes visible. A part of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 (left decorative pattern 8L2) becomes the deceleration fluctuation display and the patterns become visible, so that the switching of the production mode becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). In this state, when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is not switched, but instead, an effect mode change suggesting image after the end of fluctuation composed of a character image of "will be switched after completion" is displayed. The effect mode change suggestion image after the end of the variation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in the current variation, but that the effect mode is switched after the current variation ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(K), the left decorative symbol 8L2 is temporarily stopped at "6". In addition, the variation speed of the right decorative pattern 8R2 is reduced to display deceleration variation, and the pattern of the right decorative pattern 8R2 becomes visible. Since some of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 (the left decorative pattern 8L2 and the right decorative pattern 8R2) are visible, it is a period in which switching of the production mode is disabled (operation disabled period). The display of the effect mode change suggesting image after the end of the variation disappears after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(L), the right decorative pattern 8R2 is temporarily stopped at "3", the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C2 is reduced, and a deceleration fluctuation display is performed, and then temporarily stopped at "3". do. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixed and stopped in the losing mode of "633". The production mode suggestion image maintains the displayed state. Since the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, it is a period (operation disabled period) in which switching of the production mode is disabled. Also, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending digestion. As a result, the pending icon 9C disappears and the screen is switched to the standby screen.

FIG. 93(M) shows the state of switching to the standby screen. Since the effect mode change suggesting image after the end of the variation is displayed during the variation in FIG. 93(J), the effect mode is switched immediately after switching to the standby screen after the end of the variation regardless of whether or not the player performs an operation. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected “happy effect mode”. The effect mode suggesting image is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "happy production mode" is selected here, the character image of "happy production mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are not displayed, the effect mode switching is valid (operation valid period), and when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is switched.

When a ball is entered into the first starting port 20 while the standby screen of FIG. 93(M) is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 8C2 and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuation. The production mode suggesting image moves to the upper left of the display screen 7a and its original size is restored. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed variation, the effect mode switching is valid (operation valid period).

[Production mode selection production B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the effect mode selection effect B. FIG. The performance mode selection performance has a period during which the performance mode can be switched by the player's operation during the variation of the decorative pattern, and a period during which the performance mode is not switched despite the player's operation during the same variation. It is a performance.

Here, the gaming machine 1 is capable of selecting a plurality of performance modes with different background images, music, etc. during the normal state variation performance. The performance mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. - 特許庁In the production mode selection production B, when all of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the switching of the production mode by the operation of the select button 68 becomes valid period (operation valid period), and the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2. , 8R2 are displaying the deceleration fluctuation display or stopped, the switching of the presentation mode by the operation of the select button 68 becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). That is, when all the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are difficult to see, the switching of the production mode is effective, and when even one pattern is visible, the switching of the production mode is disabled.

The game machine 1 is set with a "battle presentation mode", a "dark presentation mode" and a "happy presentation mode", and one of these presentation modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of a fight between an enemy character and an ally character is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark production mode". In the "happy production mode", a heart background image is displayed.

In the production mode selection production B, first, as shown in FIG. 94(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2, production mode suggestion images, background images of enemy characters and ally characters, and pending images. An icon 9A and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L2, a middle decorative pattern 8C2, and a right decorative pattern 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the set of patterns is displayed in a variable manner. represents the variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation), and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. In FIG. 94(A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed variation corresponding to the current special figure variation (the variation).

The effect mode suggesting image is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the effect mode suggesting image does not move from the upper left position of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the presentation mode suggestion image disappears after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since it was displayed. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode switching is effective period (operation valid period), and when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is shown in FIG. 94(B). Switch to "dark production mode".

As shown in FIG. 94(B), when the effect mode is switched, the effect mode suggestion image is newly displayed at the same position with the display content changed. Specifically, an effect mode suggestion image is newly displayed in which a character image of the currently selected “dark effect mode” is displayed inside a rectangular image. After that, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the effect mode suggesting image disappears after a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed since it was newly displayed. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are continuously displayed with high speed fluctuation. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, the period during which the effect mode switching is effective (operation valid period) continues, and when the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is It switches to the "happy production mode" shown in FIG. 94(D).

As shown in FIG. 94(D), when the effect mode is switched, the effect mode suggesting image with the changed display contents is newly displayed. Specifically, an effect mode suggestion image is newly displayed in which a character image of the currently selected “happy effect mode” is displayed inside a rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are continuously displayed with high speed fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 94(E), the variation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L2 is reduced and the deceleration variation display is performed, and the pattern of the left decorative pattern 8L2 becomes visible. A part of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 (left decorative pattern 8L2) becomes the deceleration fluctuation display and the patterns become visible, so that the switching of the production mode becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). After a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the effect mode suggesting image was newly displayed, the display disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(F), the left decorative symbol 8L2 is temporarily stopped at "3". In addition, the variation speed of the right decorative pattern 8R2 is reduced to display deceleration variation, and the pattern of the right decorative pattern 8R2 becomes visible. Since some of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 (the left decorative pattern 8L2 and the right decorative pattern 8R2) are visible, the period during which switching of the production mode is disabled (operation disabled period) continues. In this state, when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is not switched, but instead, an effect mode change suggesting image after the end of fluctuation composed of a character image of "will be switched after completion" is displayed. The effect mode change suggestion image after the end of the variation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in the current variation, but that the effect mode is switched after the current variation ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(G), the right decorative pattern 8R2 is temporarily stopped at "5", the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C2 is reduced, and a deceleration fluctuation display is performed, and then temporarily stopped at "7". do. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixed and stopped in the losing mode of "375". Since the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, it is a period in which the switching of the production mode is disabled (operation disabled period). The display of the effect mode change suggesting image after the end of the variation disappears after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was displayed. Also, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending digestion.

FIG. 94(H) shows a state in which the next variation has started. The next variation is started, and decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed variation. Since the presentation mode change suggesting image after the end of the variation in the previous variation is displayed (FIG. 94(F)), the presentation mode is switched immediately after the start of the next variation regardless of whether or not the player performs an operation. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected "battle effect mode". The pending icon 9A shifts to the right and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C as shown in FIG. 94(I). Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed variation, the effect mode switching is valid (operation valid period). After a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the effect mode suggesting image was newly displayed, the display disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(J), the variation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L2 is reduced and the deceleration variation display is performed, and the pattern of the left decorative pattern 8L2 becomes visible. A part of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 (left decorative pattern 8L2) becomes the deceleration fluctuation display and the patterns become visible, so that the switching of the production mode becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). The production mode suggestion image remains disappeared.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(K), the left decorative symbol 8L2 is temporarily stopped at "6". In addition, the variation speed of the right decorative pattern 8R2 is reduced to display deceleration variation, and the pattern of the right decorative pattern 8R2 becomes visible. Since some of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 (the left decorative pattern 8L2 and the right decorative pattern 8R2) are visible, it is a period in which switching of the production mode is disabled (operation disabled period). In this state, when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is not switched, but instead, an effect mode change suggesting image after the end of fluctuation composed of a character image of "will be switched after completion" is displayed. The effect mode change suggestion image after the end of the variation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in the current variation, but that the effect mode is switched after the current variation ends. The production mode suggestion image remains disappeared.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(L), the right decorative pattern 8R2 is temporarily stopped at "3", the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C2 is reduced, and the display is decelerated and changed, and then temporarily stopped at "3". do. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixed and stopped in the losing mode of "633". The production mode suggestion image remains disappeared. The display of the effect mode change suggesting image after the end of the variation disappears after a predetermined period of time has passed since it was displayed. Since the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, it is a period (operation disabled period) in which switching of the production mode is disabled. Also, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending digestion. As a result, the pending icon 9C disappears and the screen is switched to the standby screen.

FIG. 94(M) shows the state of switching to the standby screen. Since the effect mode change suggesting image after the end of the variation is displayed during the variation in FIG. 94(K), the effect mode is switched immediately after switching to the standby screen after the end of the variation regardless of whether the player has operated. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected “dark effect mode”. The effect mode suggesting image is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "dark effect mode" is selected here, the character image of the "dark effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are not displayed, the effect mode switching is valid (operation valid period), and when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is switched.

When a ball is entered into the first starting hole 20 while the standby screen of FIG. 94(M) is being displayed, as shown in FIG. 8C2 and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuation. The production mode suggesting image moves to the upper left of the display screen 7a and its original size is restored. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed variation, the effect mode switching is valid (operation valid period).

[Production mode selection production C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the effect mode selection effect C. FIG. The performance mode selection performance has a period during which the performance mode can be switched by the player's operation during the variation of the decorative pattern, and a period during which the performance mode is not switched despite the player's operation during the same variation. It is a performance.

Here, the gaming machine 1 is capable of selecting a plurality of performance modes with different background images, music, etc. during the normal state variation performance. The performance mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. - 特許庁In the production mode selection production C, unlike the production mode selection production AB, when even one of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 is displayed with high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode switching by the operation of the select button 68 is valid during the period (operation valid period), and when the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are all decelerating variable display or stopped, switching of the production mode by operating the select button 68 becomes an invalid period (operation invalid period). That is, when even one pattern of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 is difficult to see, the switching of the production mode is effective, and when all the patterns are visible, the switching of the production mode is disabled.

The game machine 1 is set with a "battle presentation mode", a "dark presentation mode" and a "happy presentation mode", and one of these presentation modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of a fight between an enemy character and an ally character is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark production mode". In the "happy production mode", a heart background image is displayed.

In the production mode selection production C, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the display screen 7a displays decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2, production mode suggesting images, background images of the enemy character and the ally character, and a pending image. An icon 9A and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L2, a middle decorative pattern 8C2, and a right decorative pattern 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the set of patterns is displayed in a variable manner. represents the variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation), and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. In FIG. 95(A), decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed fluctuation corresponding to the current special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation).

The effect mode suggesting image is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "happy production mode" is selected here, the character image of "happy production mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Here, the effect mode suggesting image does not move from the upper left position of the display screen 7a. It is also displayed continuously over multiple fluctuations. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, the effect mode switching is valid (operation valid period).

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(B), the variation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L2 is reduced and the deceleration variation display is performed, and the pattern of the left decorative pattern 8L2 becomes visible. Some of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (the left decorative pattern 8L2) became deceleration fluctuation display and the patterns became visible, but not all the patterns were visible, so switching the production mode was not possible. A valid period (operation valid period) is maintained. When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is switched to the "battle effect mode" shown in FIG. 95(C).

As shown in FIG. 95(C), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed again at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are temporarily stopped when the left decorative symbol 8L2 is "6". In addition, the variation speed of the right decorative pattern 8R2 is reduced to display deceleration variation, and the pattern of the right decorative pattern 8R2 becomes visible. Some of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 (left decorative pattern 8L2 and right decorative pattern 8R2) are now visible, but not all patterns are visible, so switching the production mode is maintained for a valid period (operation valid period). When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is switched to the "dark effect mode" shown in FIG. 95(D).

As shown in FIG. 95(D), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed again at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "dark effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. The decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are temporarily stopped when the right decorative symbol 8R2 is "3", and the fluctuation speed of the middle decorative symbol 8C2 is reduced, resulting in deceleration fluctuation display. As a result, all of the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, and the effect mode is switched to an invalid period (operation invalid period). In this state, when the player operates the select button 68, the effect mode is not switched, but instead, an effect mode change suggesting image after the end of fluctuation composed of a character image of "will be switched after completion" is displayed. The effect mode change suggestion image after the end of the variation suggests that the effect mode is not switched in the current variation, but that the effect mode is switched after the current variation ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(E), the medium decorative pattern 8C2 is temporarily stopped at "5". As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixed and stopped in the losing mode of "633". Since the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, it is a period in which the switching of the production mode is disabled (operation disabled period). After the fluctuation ends, the display of the effect mode change suggesting image is maintained until the fluctuation ends. Also, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C disappears due to the pending digestion.

FIG. 95(F) shows a state in which the next variation has started. The next variation is started, and decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed variation. Since the effect mode change suggesting image after the end of the variation in the previous variation is displayed (Fig. 95(D)), the effect mode is switched immediately after the start of the next variation regardless of whether or not there is an operation by the player. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected “happy effect mode”. The pending icon 9A shifts to the right and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed variation, the effect mode switching is valid (operation valid period).

As shown in FIG. 95(G), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are decelerated all at once after being displayed with high-speed fluctuation, and are displayed with deceleration fluctuation. All of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in a deceleration variation, and the symbols can be visually recognized. As shown in FIG. 95(H), when the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is not switched, but instead the effect mode is changed after the fluctuation is completed, which is composed of a character image of "switch after completion". A suggested image is displayed. As described above, the effect mode change suggestion image after the end of variation suggests that the effect mode will not be switched in the current variation, but that the effect mode will be switched after the current variation ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(I), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are again displayed with high-speed fluctuation. As a result, during the same fluctuation, the period during which the switching of the production mode is effective (operation effective period). At the same time, an image suggesting that the mode can be switched again is displayed, which is composed of a text image of "Mode can be switched again!". When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is switched to the "battle effect mode" shown in FIG. 95(J).

As shown in FIG. 95(J), when the effect mode is switched, the display content of the effect mode suggestion image is changed again at the same position. Specifically, the character image of the currently selected "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are maintained in the high-speed fluctuation display, the effect mode switching is effective period (operation effective period).

As shown in FIG. 95(K), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are decelerated all at once after being displayed with high-speed fluctuation, and are displayed with deceleration fluctuation. All of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in a deceleration variation, and the symbols can be visually recognized. As shown in FIG. 95(L), when the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the effect mode is not switched, but instead the effect mode is changed after the fluctuation is completed, which is composed of a character image of "switch after completion". A suggested image is displayed. As described above, the effect mode change suggestion image after the end of variation suggests that the effect mode will not be switched in the current variation, but that the effect mode will be switched after the current variation ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(M), the left decorative symbol 8L2 is temporarily stopped at "3". Next, the right decorative pattern 8R2 is temporarily stopped at "3". After that, the middle decorative pattern 8C2 is temporarily stopped at "3". As a result, the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are fixed and stopped in the losing mode of "633". Since the decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are visible, it is a period (operation disabled period) in which switching of the production mode is disabled. After the fluctuation ends, the presentation mode change suggesting image and the presentation mode suggesting image disappear. The change icon (the relevant pending icon) 9C disappears due to pending digestion.

FIG. 95(N) shows a state in which the next variation has started. The next variation is started, and decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed in high-speed variation. Since the effect mode change suggesting image after the end of the variation in the previous variation is displayed (FIG. 95(L)), the effect mode is switched immediately after the start of the next variation regardless of whether or not there is an operation by the player. Specifically, the effect mode suggestion image is switched to the currently selected “dark effect mode”. The pending icon 9A shifts to the right and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Since the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2, and 8R2 are displayed with high-speed variation, the effect mode switching is valid (operation valid period).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the production mode selection production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, a first period (FIG. 93 ( A) to (C)), after the first period, during the same variation as the first period, the second period in which the production mode is not switched despite the operation of the select button 68 by the player (Fig. 93 (D) to (F)) can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 94 and 95 are the same.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93(E) to (G) and (J) to (M), when the player operates the select button 68 during the second period, the second In the second period, the performance mode is not switched, and after the fluctuation in the second period is completed, the performance can be executed in which the performance mode is switched. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 94 and 95 are the same.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93(E) and (J), when the player operates the select button 68 during the second period, the variation during the second period ends. After that, a suggestion image is displayed that suggests that the production mode will be switched. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 94 and 95 are the same.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93(E) to (G), when the player operates the select button 68 during the second period, The performance mode is switched at the time of change, and a performance mode suggesting image suggesting the performance mode after switching is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 94 and 95 are the same.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93(J) to (M), when the player operates the select button 68 during the second period, the variation during the second period ends. After that, the performance mode is switched on the standby screen, and a performance mode suggesting image suggesting the performance mode after the switching is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved. 94 and 95 are the same.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, after the first period, when the moving speeds of the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 change, the second period starts. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the production mode selection production is shown.
[Modification 1]
The contents of the presentation mode selection presentations A to C may be appropriately combined.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images and operation means capable of being operated by a player,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first period during which the effect mode can be switched by the player operating the operation means during the variation of the decorative pattern;
After the first period, during the same variation as the first period, a second period in which the performance mode is not switched despite the operation of the operation means by the player can be executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
When the player operates the operation means during the second period, the production mode is not switched during the second period, and the production mode is switched after the variation during the second period is completed. capable of performing
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-2,
When the player operates the operating means during the second period, a suggestive image is displayed suggesting that the production mode will be switched after the fluctuation during the second period is completed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-3,
When the player operates the operation means during the second period, the production mode is switched at the next fluctuation of the fluctuation during the second period, and the production suggesting the production mode after switching. A mode suggesting image will appear,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-3,
When the player operates the operation means during the second period, the production mode is switched on the standby screen after the fluctuation during the second period is completed, and the production mode after switching is changed. Suggesting production mode Suggestion image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5,
After the first period, when the movement speed of the decorative pattern changes, the second period starts.
A gaming machine characterized by:

96 to 98, the separation and combination effects A to C of the effect patterns will be described below. 96 to 98, various movable accessories, various decorative members, and various background images arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. 96 is a diagram for explaining the separation and combination effect A of the production patterns, FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the separation and combination production B of the production patterns, and FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the separation and combination production C of the production patterns. It is a figure for doing.

In this separation and combination performance of performance patterns, when the performance patterns composed of a number pattern and a character pattern are separated from the number pattern and the character pattern, the number pattern and the character pattern are united again. It is a performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the separation and combination effect of the effect pattern, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the display device 7 .

Here, the performance design will be explained first, and the performance design separation and combination performance A, the performance design separation and combination performance B, and the performance design separation and combination performance C will be explained in order.

[Direction design]
The left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are composed of numeral patterns and character patterns as coin-shaped stereoscopic images. The pattern of the character is a stereoscopic image, and the image is arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of a coin. The numbers are three-dimensional images, and some of the numbers are coin-shaped three-dimensional images. It is arranged in front of the character's design in a protruded state and united with the character's design so that at least a part of the character's design is covered with the number design. The production pattern is a pattern of a number, and a pattern of a character corresponding to the pattern of the number is attached.

Specifically, the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. . Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) are configured with different character patterns having multiple colors (full colors), respectively, and the character patterns are displayed large as the main effect pattern. be. Therefore, the size of the number pattern is smaller than the size of the character pattern attached to the number pattern. In this way, since the number symbols (odd number symbol and even number symbol) each have a color, for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same number symbol and displayed temporarily. Then, the ready-to-win is formed, and then the production is developed. The player himself/herself can obtain an opportunity to discover the relationship (regularity) between the performance and the relationship (regularity). As a result, the number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) each have a different color, which contributes to the enhancement of interest.

Specifically, the effect pattern is as follows: character A is attached to the number "1", character B is attached to the number "2", character C is attached to the number "3", and character C is attached to the number "4". is assigned the character D, the number "5" is assigned the character E, the number "6" is assigned the character F, the number "7" is assigned the character G, the number "8" is assigned the character H is attached, the character I is attached to the number "9", and different character designs having a plurality of colors (full colors) are attached to the figures of the numbers. For example, the character A may be attached to the numbers "1" and the numbers "7" and overlapped, and the character C may be attached to the numbers "3" and the numbers "8" and overlapped. In this case, the number "7" is a character A whose display mode is different from the character A attached to the number "1", and the number "8" is displayed differently from the character C attached to the number "3". Assume that a character C is in a mode.

In the state where the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the center of the number pattern in the performance pattern is arranged on the horizontal line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. state. On the display screen 7a, a vertically elongated belt-shaped area having a distance length obtained by dividing the horizontal distance dimension of the display screen 7a into three equal parts, a left vertically elongated belt-shaped area as a variation area of the left production pattern 8L, and a middle area as a variation area of the middle production pattern 8C. The side vertically elongated belt-shaped area is arranged as a right vertically elongated belt-shaped area as a variation area of the right effect pattern 8R. The position where the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stop-displayed in this way is hereinafter referred to as "stop position". In addition, the variable effects (variable display) of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are different in the separation and combination effect A of the effect pattern and the separation and combination effect B and C of the effect pattern. A detailed explanation will be given later.

Briefly explaining the variable icon and the pending icon, the variable icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R which are currently fluctuating as the digestion of the first special figure pending is displayed on the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. In the region of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a first reservation display area is provided as a first special figure reservation. In this first holding display area, holding icons 9A can be displayed (can be placed) at four holding display positions 9Ad (on rectangular images (pedestal images)), and up to four holding icons 9A can be stocked. It is possible to do so. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and so on, from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is equal to the size of the reserved display position 9Ad (horizontal distance dimension). dimension) (both distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same distance dimension). This is for distinguishing between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the suspended icon 9A displayed at the suspended display position 9Ad.

[Separation and combination of production patterns A]
Next, the separation and combination effect A of the effect symbols will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 96(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, when the left effect symbol 8L is at the stop position, the number "2" symbol 8La having a bright blue color is added to the character B symbol 8Lb. , the medium effect symbol 8C is stop-displayed with the bright green number "3" symbol 8Ca attached to the character C symbol 8Cb, and the right effect symbol 8R is the bright blue number "6" symbol. A pattern 8Rb of a character F is added to 8Ra, and the display is stopped, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a because the loss is confirmed.

Here, the pending icon 9A is displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad to the third pending display position 9Ad, and no pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, only three pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, first, the effect pattern slowly floats from the stop position upward to the separated and combined position separated by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) in a relaxed display mode. Move (slowly).

When the left effect symbol 8L moves completely to the separation and combination position, the left effect symbol 8L starts to move vertically from the upper side of the left vertically elongated strip area toward the lower side, while the symbol 8Lb of the character B starts to move vertically to the number "2". The pattern 8La is clockwise along the left fluctuation curve 8LaK, which is a planar curve in which the rightmost point of the elliptical arc curve passes through the separation and coalescing position and the left side is open. It starts moving in a display mode that pops out toward the lower side of the left side of the display screen 7a. In this way, when the left effect pattern 8L moves to the separation and combination position and floats, the left effect pattern 8L starts to separate into the number "2" pattern 8La and the character B pattern 8Lb. The left variation curve 8LaK is arranged in the left vertically elongated strip area.

When the symbol 8Lb of the character B starts to move to the lower side, the symbol 8Lb of the character C following the symbol 8Lb of the character B (that is, the character corresponding to the symbol 8La of the number "3" following the symbol 8La of the number "2") The pattern 8Lb) of C enters from the outside to the inside of the upper side of the left vertically elongated area, and moves downward. When the symbol 8La of the number "2" starts to move clockwise toward the near side along the left fluctuation curve 8LaK, the symbol 8La of the number "4" following the symbol 8La of the number "3" moves to the left side of the display screen 7a. , and moves clockwise toward the separation and coalescence position along the left variation curve 8LaK.

When the right effect symbol 8R moves completely to the separation and combination position, the right effect symbol 8R starts to move vertically from the upper side to the lower side of the right vertically elongated belt-like area, while the right effect symbol 8R is the number "6". The leftmost point of the elliptical arc curve passes through the separation and coalescing position and the right side is an open curve along the right variation curve 8RaK, which is a planar curve. It starts to move toward the lower side of the right side of the display screen 7a in a popping display mode. In this way, when the right effect pattern 8R moves to the separation and combination position and floats, the right effect pattern 8R starts to separate into the number "6" pattern 8Ra and the character F pattern 8Rb. Note that the right variation curve 8RaK is arranged in the right vertically elongated strip area.

When the symbol 8Rb of the character F starts to move to the lower side, the symbol 8Rb of the character G subsequent to the symbol 8Rb of the character F (that is, the character corresponding to the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" following the symbol 8Ra of the number "6") The G pattern 8Rb) enters the upper side of the right vertically elongated area from the outside to the inside, and moves downward. When the number "6" symbol 8Ra starts to move counterclockwise toward the near side along the right variation curve 8RaK, the number "7" symbol 8Ra following the number "6" symbol 8Ra appears on the display screen 7a. It becomes a display form intruding from the upper side of the right side to the inside, and moves counterclockwise along the right side variation curve 8RaK toward the separation and combination position.

When the middle effect pattern 8C moves to the separation and combination position, the middle effect pattern 8C starts to move vertically from the upper side of the middle vertically elongated strip area toward the lower side. " pattern 8Ca is clockwise along the horizontal middle fluctuation curve 8CaK, which is a planar curve that is closed while the lowest point of the elliptical curve passes through the separation and coalescence position, leftward Start moving towards In this way, when the middle effect pattern 8C moves to the separation and combination position and floats, the middle effect pattern 8C starts to separate into the number "3" pattern 8Ca and the character C pattern 8Cb. In addition, the upper curve portion and the lower curve portion of the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK are arranged in the middle vertical belt-shaped region, while the right curve portion of the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK is located in the middle vertical belt-shaped region. It is arranged in a state straddling the boundary between the middle vertical belt-shaped area and the right vertical belt-shaped area, and the left curve part of the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK extends from the middle vertical belt-shaped area to the left vertical belt-shaped area. , and is arranged in a state straddling the boundary between the middle vertical band-shaped region and the left vertical band-shaped region.

When the pattern 8Cb of the character C starts to move to the lower side, the pattern 8Cb of the character D following the pattern 8Cb of the character C (that is, the character corresponding to the pattern 8Ca with the number "4" following the pattern 8Ca with the number "3") The pattern 8Cb) of D enters from the outer side of the upper side of the middle vertically elongated area to the inner side, and moves downward. When the number "3" pattern 8Ca starts to move leftward along the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK, the number "4" pattern 8Ca following the number "3" pattern 8Ca is the most of the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK. It becomes a display mode intruding to the right side from the vertical line passing through the upper point, and moves toward the separation and coalescence position along the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK, while the number "3" symbol 8Ca is the middle side fluctuation curve. When the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of 8CaK is reached, the display is drawn in from the left side of this vertical line and disappears from the display screen 7a.

96(C) and (D), the character pattern changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the lower side, as shown in FIGS. Along with the display mode changing at high speed, the number patterns gradually change from a low speed to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed (accelerating) from a low speed along each fluctuation curve. It becomes a display mode that fluctuates. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed.

After that, the effect pattern decelerates just before the temporary stop, changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and moves to the separation and combination position. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 96(E), the left effect pattern 8L is a character pattern 8Lb that enters from the outside of the upper side of the left vertically elongated region and moves downward from a high speed gradually. While lowering (deceleration), the pattern 8Lb of the character A gradually changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, moving toward the separation and combination position, and entering from the upper left side of the display screen 7a to the inside. While the number pattern 8La moving along the left-side fluctuation curve 8LaK gradually decreases (decreases) from a high speed, it gradually changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and the number "1" having a bright green color. The pattern 8La moves toward the separation and combination position. At this time, the patterns of the characters other than the pattern 8Lb of the character A gradually change from a translucent state to a transparent state, and are hidden when the pattern 8Lb of the character A reaches the separation and combination position. (it disappears from the display screen 7a). In addition, at this time, the number patterns other than the number "1" pattern 8La gradually change from a translucent state to a transparent state, and when the number "1" pattern 8La reaches the separation and combination position, It is in a non-displayed state (disappeared from the display screen 7a). The number pattern 8La that moves along the left variation curve 8LaK moves only within the left vertically elongated belt-shaped area when entering from the upper side of the left side of the display screen 7a to the inside, and moves to the middle side adjacent to the right side of the left vertically elongated belt-shaped area. There is no intrusion into the vertically elongated strip area.

At the same time when the pattern 8Lb of the character A reaches the separation and combination position, the pattern 8La of the number "1" having bright green also reaches the position of separation and combination, and the pattern 8La of the number "1" is arranged in front of the pattern 8Lb of the character A. It will be in a state of being united. At the separated and united position, when the symbol 8La of the number "1" and the symbol 8Lb of the character A are united, a part of the symbol 8Lb of the character moves (here, the character A in the symbol 8Lb of the character A is displayed). The two corners on the head of the head are repeatedly shown to open and close). In addition, when the symbol 8La of the number “1” and the symbol 8Lb of the character A are merged at the separation and combination position, the symbol 8La of the number “1” and the symbol 8Lb of the character A remain in this merged state (that is, the mutual relationship between the symbol 8La of the number “1” and the symbol 8Lb of the character A (without changing the positional relationship) in small increments in the vertical direction with reference to the separation and coalescence position (for example, with the separation and coalescence position as the reference, only 2.5 mm upward and 2.5 mm downward (that is, the swing width is 5 mm )) You may make it become the state of the 1st temporary stop display of the left production|presentation pattern 8L to move. In this case, a part of the pattern 8Lb of the character A may be displayed in a moving display mode, or a stationary display mode in which a part of the pattern 8Lb of the character A does not move.

When the symbol 8La of the number "1" and the symbol 8Lb of the character A are combined (or when the left effect symbol 8L is in the state of the first temporary stop display), the right effect symbol 8R is shown in FIG. As shown in (F), the pattern 8Rb of the character entering from the outside of the upper side of the right vertically elongated area and moving downward gradually slows down (decelerates) from a translucent state to an opaque state. state, the pattern 8Rb of the character G moves toward the separation and combination position, and the number pattern 8La moves inward from the upper side of the right side of the display screen 7a and moves along the right variation curve 8RaK at high speed. While gradually reducing the speed (deceleration), the translucent state gradually changes to the opaque state, and the pattern 8Ra of the numeral "7" having bright red moves toward the separating and combining position. At this time, the patterns of the characters other than the pattern 8Rb of the character G gradually change from a translucent state to a transparent state, and are hidden when the pattern 8Rb of the character G reaches the separation and combination position. (it disappears from the display screen 7a). Also, at this time, the patterns of the numbers other than the pattern 8Ra of the number "7" gradually change from the translucent state to the transparent state, and when the pattern 8Ra of the number "7" arrives at the separation and combination position, It is in a non-displayed state (disappeared from the display screen 7a). The number pattern 8Ra that moves along the right variation curve 8RaK moves only within the right vertical band-shaped area when entering from the upper side of the right side of the display screen 7a to the inside, and moves to the middle side adjacent to the left side of the right vertical strip-shaped area. There is no intrusion into the vertically elongated strip area.

At the same time when the pattern 8Rb of the character G reaches the separation and combination position, the pattern 8Ra of the bright red number "7" also reaches the separation and combination position, and the pattern 8Ra of the number "7" is arranged in front of the pattern 8Rb of the character G. It will be in a state of being united. At the separated and united position, when the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" and the symbol 8Rb of the character G are united, a part of the symbol 8Rb of the character moves (here, the character G in the symbol 8Rb of the character G The display mode of moving the sword held by the right hand up and down is repeated). In addition, when the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" and the symbol 8Rb of the character G are merged at the separation and combination position, the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" and the symbol 8Rb of the character G remain in this merged state (that is, the mutual relationship between the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" and the symbol 8Rb of the character G is (without changing the positional relationship) in small increments in the vertical direction with reference to the separation and coalescence position (for example, with the separation and coalescence position as the reference, only 2.5 mm upward and 2.5 mm downward (that is, the swing width is 5 mm )) You may make it become the state of the 1st temporary stop display of the moving right production|presentation pattern 8R. In this case, a part of the pattern 8Rb of the character G may be displayed in a moving display mode, or a stationary display mode in which a part of the pattern 8Rb of the character G may not move.

When the symbol 8Ra of the number "7" and the symbol 8Rb of the character G are united (or when the right effect symbol 8R is in the state of the first temporary stop display), the medium effect symbol 8C is shown in FIG. As shown in (G), the pattern 8Cb of the character entering from the outside of the upper side of the middle vertically elongated area and moving downward gradually slows down (decelerates) from a translucent state to an opaque state. state, the pattern 8Cb of the character F moves toward the separation and coalescing position, and enters the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK from the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK to the right side. The number pattern 8Ca moving along gradually changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state while gradually decreasing (deceleration) from a high speed, and the bright blue number "6" pattern 8Ca separates and unites. Move towards position. At this time, the patterns of the characters other than the pattern 8Cb of the character F gradually change from a translucent state to a transparent state, and are hidden when the pattern 8Cb of the character F arrives at the separation and combination position. (it disappears from the display screen 7a). At this time, the figures other than the number "6" figure 8Ca gradually change from the translucent state to the transparent state, and when the number "6" figure 8Ca reaches the separation and combination position, It is in a non-displayed state (disappeared from the display screen 7a). In addition, when the number pattern 8Ca moving along the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK enters the right side from the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK, in addition to the middle vertically long strip area, It may invade and move into the right vertical strip that is adjacent to the right of the strip, and it may invade and migrate into the left vertical strip that is adjacent to the left of the middle vertical strip. In this regard, the number symbols 8Ca moving along the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK are the number symbols 8La moving along the left fluctuation curve 8LaK, the number symbols 8Ra moving along the right fluctuation curve 8RaK, is different from

At the same time when the pattern 8Cb of the character F reaches the separation and combination position, the pattern 8Ca of the bright blue number "6" also reaches the separation and combination position, and the pattern 8Ca of the number "6" is arranged in front of the pattern 8Cb of the character F. It will be in a state of being united. At the separation and combination position, when the figure 8Ca of the number "6" and the figure 8Cb of the character F are united, a part of the character figure 8Cb moves (here, the character F in the figure 8Cb of the character F is displayed). The display mode of moving the sword held by the right hand up and down is repeated). In addition, when the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" and the symbol 8Cb of the character F are merged at the separation and combination position, the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" and the symbol 8Cb of the character F remain in this merged state (that is, the symbol 8Ca of the number "6" and the symbol 8Cb of the character F are mutually (without changing the positional relationship) in small increments in the vertical direction with reference to the separation and coalescence position (for example, with the separation and coalescence position as the reference, only 2.5 mm upward and 2.5 mm downward (that is, the swing width is 5 mm )) You may make it become the state of the 1st temporary stop display of the left production|presentation pattern 8L to move. In this case, a part of the pattern 8Cb of the character F may be displayed in a moving display mode, or a stationary display mode in which a part of the pattern 8Cb of the character F does not move.

In this way, first, when the left effect symbol 8L is in a state where the symbol 8La of the number "1" and the symbol 8Lb of the character A are combined (or when the left effect symbol 8L is in the state of the first temporary stop display), the character The display mode in which the two corners of the character A's head in the A symbol 8Lb are closed and opened is repeated, and then the right effect symbol 8R is a symbol "7" symbol 8Ra and the character G symbol 8Rb. When the combined state is reached (or when the right effect pattern 8R is in the state of the first temporary stop display), the display mode in which the sword held by the right hand of the character G in the pattern 8Rb of the character G is moved up and down is repeated. , When the middle effect pattern 8C is a state in which the pattern 8Ca of the number "6" and the pattern 8Cb of the character F are combined (or when the middle effect pattern 8C is in the state of the first temporary stop display), the pattern of the character F By repeating the display mode of moving up and down the sword held by the right hand of the character F in 8Cb, as shown in FIG. The number pattern and the character pattern in , are combined, and further, a display mode is obtained in which a part of the character pattern moves.

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R move from the separated and combined position to the stop position in a state in which the number pattern and the character pattern are combined, as shown in FIG. 96(I). When it reaches the stop position, it moves slowly (low speed) in a display mode that slowly sinks downward, and when it reaches the stop position, it moves vertically in small increments (for example, 2.5 mm upward with the stop position as a reference, A state of temporary stop display, which is a display mode in which the display moves downward by 2.5 mm (that is, by a swing width of 5 mm), is established. The left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are combined with the number pattern and the character pattern. The "1" symbol 8La derails from the trajectory of the left fluctuation curve 8LaK, the number "6" symbol 8Ca in the middle production pattern 8C derails from the trajectory of the middle fluctuation curve 8CaK, and the number "7" in the right production pattern 8R. symbol 8Ra derails from the trajectory of the right variation curve 8RaK. Incidentally, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in the state of the first temporary stop display at the separated and united position, the temporary stop display here becomes the second temporary stop display, The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in the state of the second temporary stop display.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop positions as shown in FIG. When the characters are stopped and displayed, the display mode in which part of the character pattern in the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R moves ends, and the character pattern becomes stationary. It should be noted that when the loss is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the above-described variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started again, and the left When the production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned in the same number pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern are fixed. When the symbols 8R of the same number are stop-displayed together, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game is started in which a profit is given to the player.

In addition, in the separation and combination effect A of the production pattern, the number pattern 8La in the left production pattern 8L intrudes from the upper side of the left side of the display screen 7a along the left fluctuation curve 8LaK to the inside of the left fluctuation curve 8LaK. After passing through the rightmost point, which is the separation and combination position, it moves clockwise in a display mode that pops out toward the lower side of the left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the number pattern 8La in the left effect pattern 8L is moving clockwise along the planar left side fluctuation curve 8LaK. However, the upper end of the left variation curve 8LaK, in which the number pattern 8La in the left effect pattern 8L intrudes inward from the upper side of the left side of the display screen 7a, is arranged in the depth direction, and the number pattern 8La in the left effect pattern 8L is placed on the display screen. By arranging the lower end of the left fluctuation curve 8LaK that protrudes toward the lower side of the left side of 7a in the front direction (that is, the upper end of the left fluctuation curve 8LaK is arranged on the back side, and the lower end of the left fluctuation curve 8LaK is arranged on the front side The left variation curve 8LaK may be arranged three-dimensionally. Along with this, the size of the number pattern 8La in the left effect pattern 8L that intrudes inward from the upper side of the left side of the display screen 7a becomes smaller, and the number in the left effect pattern 8L that protrudes toward the lower side of the left side of the display screen 7a. The size of the pattern 8La of is increased. In addition, along with this, the normal line on the surface (front surface) of the number pattern 8La in the left production pattern 8L moves so as to be parallel to the tangential direction of the left fluctuation curve 8LaK. The surface (front surface) of the number pattern 8La in the left effect pattern 8L shown in (F) faces forward (toward the player).

In addition, the number pattern 8Ra in the right effect pattern 8R intrudes inward from the upper side of the right side of the display screen 7a along the right variation curve 8RaK, and moves the separation and coalescence position, which is the leftmost point of the right variation curve 8RaK. After passing through the display screen 7a, it moved counterclockwise in a manner of popping out toward the lower side of the right side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the number pattern 8Ra in the right production pattern 8R moves counterclockwise along the planar right variation curve 8RaK. However, the upper end of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK, in which the number pattern 8Ra in the right effect pattern 8R enters from the upper side of the right side of the display screen 7a, is arranged in the depth direction, and the number pattern 8Ra in the right effect pattern 8R is placed on the display screen. By arranging the lower end of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK projecting toward the lower side of the right side of 7a in the front direction (that is, placing the upper end of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK on the back side and the lower end of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK on the front side By arranging), the right variation curve 8RaK may be arranged three-dimensionally. Along with this, the size of the number pattern 8Ra in the right effect pattern 8R that intrudes inward from the upper side of the right side of the display screen 7a becomes smaller, and the number in the right direction pattern 8R that pops out toward the lower side of the right side of the display screen 7a. The size of the pattern 8Ra of is increased. In addition, along with this, the normal to the surface (front surface) of the number pattern 8Ra in the right production pattern 8R moves so as to be parallel to the tangential direction of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK, and at the separation and combination position, as shown in FIG. The surface (front face) of the number pattern 8Ra in the right effect pattern 8R shown in (G) faces forward (toward the player).

In addition, the number pattern 8Ca in the middle production pattern 8C enters the right side from the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK along the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK, and enters the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK. It passed through the lower point, the separation-coalescence position, and again moved clockwise in a manner sucked in from the left side of the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the medium fluctuation curve 8CaK. At this time, the number pattern 8Ca in the middle production pattern 8C moves clockwise along the flat middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK. However, by arranging the uppermost point of the middle-side fluctuation curve 8CaK in the depth direction and arranging the separation and coalescing position, which is the lowest point of the middle-side fluctuation curve 8CaK, in the front direction (that is, the middle-side fluctuation By placing the uppermost point of the curve 8CaK on the back side and arranging the separation and coalescing position, which is the lowest point of the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK, on the front side), the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK is three-dimensionally arranged. good too. Along with this, the medium production design that enters from the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the medium fluctuation curve 8CaK to the right side, or is sucked from the left side of the vertical line passing through the uppermost point of the medium fluctuation curve 8CaK The size of the number pattern 8Ca in 8C is reduced, and the size of the number pattern 8Ca in the medium effect pattern 8C passing through the separation and combination position which is the lowest point of the middle side fluctuation curve 8CaK is increased. In addition, along with this, the normal line on the surface (front surface) of the number pattern 8Ca in the middle production pattern 8C moves so as to be parallel to the tangential direction of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK, shown in FIG. 96 (G) In front of the separated and combined position, it turns around and the surface (front surface) of the number pattern 8Ca in the middle effect pattern 8C faces forward (to the player side). It rotates again and moves so that the normal line on the surface (front surface) of the number pattern 8Ca in the medium effect pattern 8C is parallel to the tangential direction of the right fluctuation curve 8RaK.

In addition, the character pattern 8Lb in the left effect pattern 8L, the character pattern 8Cb in the middle effect pattern 8C, and the character pattern 8Rb in the right effect pattern 8R move vertically from the upper side to the lower side of each vertically elongated belt-shaped area. It started to change. However, when moving from the upper side to the lower side of each vertically elongated belt-shaped area, the size of the character pattern is changed from a small state to a gradually increasing state, and the depth direction is changed as a moving display mode of the character pattern. A display mode may be adopted in which the character is held and the design of the character approaches the front from the back side.

[Separation and combination of production patterns B]
Next, the separation and combination effect B of the effect symbols will be described with reference to FIG. 97 . In the above-described production pattern separation and combination production A, the production pattern variation production (variation display) is started and executed until it is stopped and displayed, whereas in the production design separation and combination production B, the customer waiting state. is displayed on the display screen 7a, the game is executed when the player starts the game and the game ball enters the start hole, or the game is started while the player is playing In that it is executed when the game screen is switched to the standby screen and displayed on the display screen 7a due to the fact that the game ball does not enter the mouth for a while, the separation and combination effect A of the effect pattern and the effect are performed. It is different from the pattern separation and coalescence effect B. Furthermore, in the separation and combination effect A of the production pattern, the number pattern and the character pattern are separated or combined at the separation and combination position, whereas in the separation and combination effect B of the production pattern, the stop position 3, the separation and combination effect A of the effect pattern and the separation and combination effect B of the effect pattern are different in that the number pattern and the character pattern are separated or combined.

Here, the player who has played the game while sitting in front of the gaming machine 1 finishes the game and leaves the seat after the loss is confirmed and displayed, and then the left performance symbol 8L where the loss is confirmed and displayed. In a state where the screen of the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R is switched to the waiting screen in which the customer is waiting, the player (or another player) sits in front of the gaming machine 1 again and plays the game. will be described.

First, when the waiting screen in which the gaming machine 1 is in the customer waiting state is displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIGS. part of the pattern 8Lb moves (here, the two corners of the character A's head in the pattern 8Lb of the character A are repeatedly closed and opened), The medium effect pattern 8C is displayed in a display mode in which a part of the character pattern 8Cb moves at the stop position (here, in the pattern 8Cb of the character F, the display mode in which the sword held by the right hand of the character F moves up and down is repeated. ), and the right effect pattern 8R has a display mode in which a part of the character pattern 8Rb moves at the stop position (here, in the character G pattern 8Rb, the sword held by the right hand of the character G is moved up and down. The moving display mode is repeated). In other words, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R themselves are stopped and displayed at the stop position, but one of the character designs in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. The display mode is such that the part moves, and the number pattern is separated from the character pattern and is not displayed (the number pattern disappears from the display screen 7a).

After that, the player (or another player) sits in front of the gaming machine 1 to start the game, and when the game ball enters the first start hole 20, as shown in FIG. 97(C), In order to start the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols, the left performance symbols 8L are united by displaying (appearing) again the bright green symbol 8La of the number "1" in front of the symbol 8Lb of the character A. In the intermediate effect pattern 8C, the pattern 8Ca of the number "6" having a bright blue color is again displayed (appears) in front of the pattern 8Cb of the character F, and is combined with the pattern 8Cb. The right effect pattern 8R is displayed (appears) again in front of the pattern 8Rb of the character G, and the pattern 8Ra of the number "7" in bright red is displayed (appears) again, and is stopped in a state of being united. displayed state. When the characters are stopped and displayed, the display mode in which part of the character pattern in the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R moves ends, and the character pattern becomes stationary.

When the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a state in which the number pattern and the character pattern are united, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97(D), the effect pattern fluctuates. A production (variable display) is started, and after the production pattern moves slowly (at a low speed) in a display mode in which the production pattern floats for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) once upward from the stop position (in other words, the production pattern stops. After the display is canceled, the production pattern is about to move from now on), and the speed is gradually increased from low speed to the bottom, changing from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. It becomes a display mode that fluctuates. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed.

After that, the production pattern decelerates just before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. The pattern 8La of "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed with the pattern 8Lb of the character B attached, and the pattern 8Rb of the character F is attached to the pattern 8Ra of the number "6" having a bright blue right effect pattern 8R. 8Cb of the character C is added to the pattern 8Ca of the number "3" having a bright green medium effect pattern 8C, and a temporary stop display is performed.

In the state where the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, a part of the symbol 8Lb of the character B is displayed in a moving display mode (here, the two corners of the head of the character B in the symbol 8Lb of the character B are closed). The display mode of opening and closing is repeated). In addition, when the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, a part of the symbol 8Rb of the character F is displayed (here, the sword held by the right hand of the character F in the symbol 8Rb of the character F is moved up and down). The moving display mode is repeated). In addition, in the state where the medium effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, a part of the pattern 8Cb of the character C is displayed in a moving display mode. (The display mode that moves to the left is repeated). In the state of temporary stop display, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are further moved upward and downward with reference to the stop position (for example, upward by 2.0 with reference to the stop position). A display mode in which the display moves 5 mm downward by 2.5 mm (that is, by a swing width of 5 mm) may be used.

When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since the temporary stop display, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop positions as shown in FIG. 97(F). , The symbols of the same number are not aligned, and the loss is confirmed. When the characters are stopped and displayed, the display mode in which part of the character pattern in the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R moves ends, and the character pattern becomes stationary. When the loss is confirmed, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. It should be noted that, in the state of the temporary stop display, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed in a display mode in which they move vertically with reference to the stop position, they move to the stop position. It will be stopped and displayed.

After that, although the player is playing the game, the state in which the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 continues for a while, which is humiliating for the player, but shown in FIG. 97(F). The game screen is switched to a standby screen in which the gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state, and the standby screen is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the game screen is switched to the standby screen, as shown in FIG. 97(G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed at the stop position in FIG. The figure of the number is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a).

Specifically, when the game screen is switched to the standby screen, the left effect symbol 8L stopped and displayed at the stop position in FIG. It is hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and only the symbol 8Lb of the character B is displayed. 8Ca is separated and hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), leaving only the symbol 8Cb of the character C, and the right effect symbol 8R stopped and displayed at the stop position in FIG. The "6" pattern 8Ra is separated and hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), leaving only the character F pattern 8Rb. In other words, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R themselves are stopped and displayed at the stop position, but one of the character designs in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. The display mode is such that the part moves, and the number pattern is separated from the character pattern and is not displayed (the number pattern disappears from the display screen 7a).

When the figure of each number is separated from the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R and is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the game machine 1 is in a customer waiting state. is displayed on the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. In the pattern 8Lb, the two corners on the head of the character B are repeatedly closed and opened.), and in the right design pattern 8R, the part of the pattern 8Rb of the character F moves. (Here, the display mode in which the sword held by the character F's right hand is moved up and down in the pattern 8Rb of the character F is repeated). A part of the pattern 8Cb of the character C in the middle effect pattern 8C is displayed in a moving display mode (here, in the pattern 8Cb of the character C, the display mode in which the sword held by the character C with both arms moves up and down is repeated) is).

97(H), the character B's symbol 8Lb in the left effect pattern 8L in FIG. 97(E) moves. is the same moving display mode as the display mode in which a part of is moved, and the display mode in which part of the character C's symbol 8Cb in the middle effect symbol 8C in FIG. 97(H) moves is the middle effect symbol in FIG. 97(E) This is the same moving display mode as the display mode in which part of the symbol 8Cb of the character C in 8C moves, and the display mode in which part of the symbol 8Rb of the character F in the right effect symbol 8R in FIG. This is the same moving display mode as the display mode in which part of the symbol 8Rb of the character F in the right effect symbol 8R in (E) moves.

After that, the player plays the game, and when the game ball finally enters the first start hole 20, the left effect symbol 8L is bright in front of the character A symbol 8Lb, as shown in FIG. 97(I). The pattern 8La of the number "2" having blue color is displayed (appears) again and is in a state of being combined and stopped, and the middle production pattern 8C has a bright green color in front of the pattern 8Cb of the character F. The symbol 8Ca of the number "3" is displayed (appears) again and is combined into a state of being stopped, and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "6" having a bright blue color in front of the symbol 8Rb of the character G. ' symbol 8Ra is again displayed (appears) and combined into a state of being stopped and displayed. When the characters are stopped and displayed, the display mode in which part of the character pattern in the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R moves ends, and the character pattern becomes stationary. Here, when the player plays a game and the game ball finally enters the first start hole 20, the game ball enters the first start hole 20 continuously, and two holding icons 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a. There are only two stocked items that are displayed in , and have not been digested.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. After moving slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (in other words, the stop display of the performance pattern is canceled, so that the performance pattern is about to move from now on) ), the display mode changes at a high speed from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed toward the lower side. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

After that, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the patterns of the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, while the left effect pattern 8L and the middle effect pattern 8C are determined. , and when the right performance symbols 8R are stop-displayed together with symbols of the same number, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

In addition, in the separation and combination effect B of the effect pattern, as shown in FIGS. 97(A), (B), (G), (H), during standby, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect Although the pattern 8R itself is stopped and displayed at the stop position, part of the character pattern in the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in a moving display mode, and the number pattern is separated from the character pattern. (the state in which the pattern of the numbers has disappeared from the display screen 7a). At this time, in addition to a display mode in which a part of the character's pattern moves, there may be a case in which each production pattern itself, which is a coin-shaped stereoscopic image, rotates. For example, the left effect pattern 8L rotates to the left side of the left effect pattern 8L with the right side of the left effect pattern 8L facing forward and the left direction pattern 8L rotating about the vertical line passing through the center of the coin as the axis of rotation. is rotated to the right side of the left effect pattern 8L which is directed to the front side. The middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R also rotate in the same manner as the left production pattern 8L. Of course, when the left effect pattern 8L, the right effect pattern 8R, and the left effect pattern 8L are in the rotating display mode, the display mode in which part of the character pattern moves continues.

In addition, in the separation and combination effect B of the effect pattern, as shown in FIGS. 97(A), (B), (G), (H), during standby, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, the right effect Although the pattern 8R itself is stopped and displayed at the stop position, part of the character pattern in the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R is displayed in a moving display mode, and the number pattern is separated from the character pattern. (the state in which the pattern of the numbers has disappeared from the display screen 7a). At this time, the speaker 67 speaks voices such as "It's a game", "It's still to come", "I'm waiting", etc. may be output (flowed) from

[Separation and combination of production patterns C]
Next, the separation and combination effect C of the effect symbols will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-mentioned production pattern separation and combination production A, the production pattern variation production (variation display) is started and executed until it is stopped and displayed, and in the production design separation and combination production B, the customer waits for In the state where the screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is executed when the player starts the game and the game ball enters the starting hole, or the game ball enters the starting hole while the player is playing the game. is executed when the game screen is switched to the standby screen and displayed on the display screen 7a due to a state in which no balls are entered for a while. In that it is executed in a specific round (specific round screen) during the winning game (opening screen) or when a profit is given to the player, the separation and combination effects A and B of the production patterns and the separation and combination production C of the production patterns are performed. are different. Furthermore, in the separation and combination effect A of the production pattern, the number pattern and the character pattern are separated or combined at the separation and combination position, and in the separation and combination production B of the production pattern, the number pattern and the number pattern are combined at the stop position. The pattern of the character is separated or combined, and in the separation and combination effect C of the performance pattern, when the winning is displayed, the number pattern and the character pattern are separated, and when the winning game is completed, the number pattern is displayed. The separation and combination effects A and B of the production patterns and the separation and combination production B of the production patterns are different in that the pattern of the character is combined with the character.

As shown in FIG. 98(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is a number "2" symbol 8La having a bright blue color and a character B symbol 8Lb. , the medium effect symbol 8C is stop-displayed with the number "3" symbol 8Ca having a bright green color and the symbol 8Cb of the character C is attached and stopped, and the right effect symbol 8R is a number "6" symbol having a bright blue color. A pattern 8Rb of a character F is attached to 8Ra, and the display is stopped, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a because the loss is confirmed.

Here, the pending icon 9A is displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad and the second pending display position 9Ad, and the pending icon is not displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two pending icons 9A stocked without being digested. In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 .

Subsequently, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. ) is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad. Then, only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, the effect pattern once moves upward from the stop position and moves slowly (at a low speed) in a display mode in which it floats for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (in other words Then, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode that is about to move from now on), and the speed is gradually increased from a low speed toward the bottom to change from an opaque state to a translucent state. , resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed.

After that, the production pattern decelerates just before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. A pattern 8Lb of the character F is attached to a pattern 8La of "6", and a temporary stop display is performed, and the display mode in which the sword held by the right hand of the character F in the pattern 8Lb of the character F is moved up and down is repeated, and the medium effect pattern 8C is bright. A symbol 8Cb of a character F is attached to a symbol 8Ca of the number "6" having blue color, and a symbol 8Cb of a character F is temporarily displayed. A pattern 8Rb of the character F is attached to a pattern 8Ra of the number "6" in which the pattern 8R is bright blue, and the pattern 8Rb of the character F is temporarily stopped, and the display mode in which the sword held by the right hand of the character F in the pattern 8Rb of the character F moves up and down is repeated. be In other words, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in alignment with the same number pattern (here, the number "6" pattern having bright blue color).

After that, the display mode in which the sword held by the right hand of the character F in the pattern 8Lb of the character F is moved up and down ends, and the pattern of the character F becomes a stationary display mode, and the left effect pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, and the pattern of the character F is displayed. The display mode in which the sword held by the right hand of the character F is moved up and down in 8Cb ends, the pattern of the character F becomes stationary, and the medium effect pattern 8C is stopped and displayed, and the right hand of the character F in the pattern 8Rb of the character F. After the display mode in which the sword held by is moved up and down, the pattern of the character F becomes a stationary display mode, and the right performance pattern 8R is stop-displayed. In other words, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stop-displayed in line with the same number pattern (here, the number "6" pattern having bright blue color).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 98(D), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), the variable display position 9Cd, and the first reserved display position 9Ad. ~When the fourth pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A are also hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), a large message image MG1 saying "jackpot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to display the jackpot. screen.

At the timing when the big win display screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, the figure "6" having a bright blue color is selected from the character F's patterns 8Lb, 8Cb and 8Rb in the production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R. 8La, 8Ca, and 8Ra are separated from each other.

Subsequently, when the message image MG1 is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the jackpot opening starts as shown in FIG. Character F's patterns 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Rb in the production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C, and right production pattern 8R (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "character F's pattern") aligned with the pattern of "6". A plurality of characters enter from the upper right side of the display screen 7a toward the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. A display mode in which a plurality of items appear (appear) one after another from the upper right side of the display screen 7a toward the lower left side of the display screen 7a and disappear from the lower left side of the display screen 7a is repeatedly performed. The jackpot opening is started, and the pattern of the character F entering from the upper right side of the display screen 7a has a display mode in which a part of the pattern of the character F moves (here, the character F in the pattern of the character F is displayed). The display mode of moving the sword held in the right hand up and down is repeated).

When the jackpot opening ends, the symbols of the plurality of characters F are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. Is displayed). A message image MG2 of "Round 1" indicating Round 1 is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. After that, when the completion of the round progresses and the round 5 which is the specific land is started (the screen of the round 5 which is the specific round screen is displayed), the upper left side of the display screen 7a is displayed as shown in FIG. , a message image MG3 of "Round 5" indicating Round 5 is displayed, and a plurality of patterns of the character F appear (appear) from the lower side of the display screen 7a one after another from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The disappearing display mode is repeated. Round 5, which is a specific land, is started, and the design of the character F entering from the upper side of the display screen 7a is displayed in a manner in which a part of the design of the character F moves (here, the design of the character F is A display mode in which the sword held by the right hand of the character F is moved up and down is repeated). The display mode in which part of the design of character F in FIG. 98(H) moves is the same as the display mode in which part of the design of character F moves in FIGS. The direction in which the pattern of character F moves in 98(H) (the direction from the upper left side to the lower right side of the display screen 7a (the direction of a straight line downward to the left)) and the direction in which the pattern of character F moves in FIG. 98(F). (the direction of the vertical line from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a) is different.

When Round 5, which is a specific land, ends, the patterns of a plurality of characters F are hidden on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a). As shown in 98(I), in the center of the display screen 7a, the number of big wins is indicated by "Number of big wins: 1" on the upper row, and the number of game balls acquired is indicated by "Total number: XXXX" on the lower row. A message image MG4 is displayed (numbers are displayed in "XXXX").

At the timing when this jackpot ending screen is displayed on the display screen 7a, the patterns 8La, 8Ca, 8Ra of the bright blue number "6" and the pattern of the character F in the production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C and the right production pattern 8R. 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Rb return to the combined state.

When the jackpot ending ends, as shown in FIG. 98(J), the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 98(C) from the big win ending screen are stopped. At the position, the game screen is switched to the game screen in the state of being stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. After moving slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (in other words, the stop display of the performance pattern is canceled, the display mode in which the performance pattern is about to move from now on) ), the speed gradually increases from a low speed toward the bottom, and the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad is moved to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A is not digested and stocked does not exist at all.

After that, when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the patterns of the same number and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L and the middle effect pattern 8C are determined. , and when the right performance symbols 8R are stop-displayed together with symbols of the same number, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game in which a profit is awarded to the player is started.

In addition, in the effect pattern separation and combination effect C, when Round 5, which is a specific land, is started, as shown in FIG. A display mode in which a plurality of images appear one after another (appear) and disappear from the lower side of the display screen 7a has been repeatedly performed. At this time, a display mode may be included in which the patterns of other characters also appear (appear) from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a and disappear from the lower side of the display screen 7a while being mixed with the pattern of the character F. . At this time, the patterns of the other characters are also displayed in such a manner that part of the patterns of the other characters move. In this way, for example, when a screen for switching from a left-handed game to a right-handed game, which is advantageous to the player, is displayed on the display screen 7a after the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 98 (G ), the pattern of another character appears in the pattern of the character F, so that the screen for switching to the right-handed game may be displayed on the display screen 7a after the jackpot game is finished. can be given to the player.

In addition, in the effect pattern separation and combination effect C, when Round 5, which is a specific land, is started, the pattern of the character F moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 98(G). A display mode in which a plurality of images appear one after another (appear) and disappear from the lower side of the display screen 7a has been repeatedly performed. At this time, a part of the pattern of the character F was displayed in a moving manner. The display mode in which part of the design of character F moves is the same as the display mode in which part of the design of character F moves when the temporary stop display is performed in FIG. 98(C). However, in FIG. 98(G), the display mode in which part of the pattern of character F moves differs from the display mode in which part of the pattern of character F moves when the temporary stop display is performed in FIG. 98(C). It is also possible to adopt a display mode in which part of the pattern of F has a different action. In this way, for example, when a screen for switching from a left-handed game to a right-handed game, which is advantageous to the player, is displayed on the display screen 7a after the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 98 (G ), the screen for switching to the right-handed game may be displayed on the display screen 7a after the jackpot game is completed by setting a display mode in which a part of the pattern of the character F performs a different action. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Further, when the opening of the jackpot is started, a plurality of patterns of the character F appear (appear) one after another from the upper right side of the display screen 7a toward the lower left side of the display screen 7a and disappear from the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The pattern was repeated. However, in the opposite direction, a plurality of designs of the character F appear (appear) one after another from the lower left side of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side of the display screen 7a and disappear from the upper right side of the display screen 7a. may be Alternatively, for example, a plurality of characters F may enter the display screen 7a from the outside of the display screen 7a in a swirling manner, swirl toward the center of the display screen 7a, be sucked in, and disappear. In the opposite direction, the pattern of the character F may be displayed in such a manner that a plurality of symbols jump out and disappear from the display screen 7a while spiraling outward from the center of the display screen 7a. Further, for example, a plurality of patterns of the character F may appear (appear) from the right side of the display screen 7a toward the left side and then disappear from the left side of the display screen 7a. A plurality of patterns of the character F appear (appear) from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the right side and then disappear from the right side of the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the separation and combination effect of the effect pattern will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the left effect pattern 8L, which is a coin-shaped stereoscopic image, the middle effect pattern 8C, which is a coin-shaped stereoscopic image, and the right effect pattern 8R, which is a coin-shaped stereoscopic image, indicate the result of the lottery. The image display device 7 (display device) displays (a plurality of types of images) in a stationary manner through a variable display. The character design (first image) and the number design (second image) are separated from the character design (first image) and the number design (second image) can be displayed. 2 images) are combined, a first effect of stopping and displaying the combined character pattern (first image) and number pattern (second image) can be executed. (Figures 96 (C) to (J) in the separation and combination effect A of the production pattern, Figures 97 (A) to (C) in the separation and combination effect B of the production pattern, and Figure 98 (D) in the separation and combination effect C of the production pattern ~ (J)). According to this configuration, the character design (first image) and the number design (second image) are united from the separated state of the character design (first image) and the number design (second image). Afterwards, the united character design (first image) and number design (second image) are stopped and displayed. It is possible to provide the player with a novel performance that has never been seen before, such as separation and combination by 2 images). Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the first effect in the effect pattern separation and combination effect A of FIG. 96, the effect pattern separation and combination effect B of FIG. A number pattern (second image) is arranged at the lower center of the pattern (predetermined position of the first image) and on the front side of the character pattern (first image), and the number pattern (second image) is placed and combined. ) can cover at least part of the character design (first image). According to this configuration, even if the character pattern (first image) and the number pattern (second image) are separated, the character pattern is located at the lower center (predetermined position of the first image) of the character pattern. Since the number design (second image) is placed in front of the design (first image) and combined, each time it is separated and combined, the character design (first image) and the number are combined. Since the positional relationship with the pattern (second image) does not change, the character pattern (first image) and the number pattern (second image) are not likely to be an eyesore to the effect of separating and combining. be able to.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after combining the character design (first image) and the number design (second image), the character design (first image) and the number design (second image) are combined. image) is stopped and displayed, a second effect can be executed in which at least a part of the character design (first image) moves (separation and coalescence effect of the effect pattern). Figures 96 (F) to (I) in A, Figure 97 (E) in the separation and combination effect B of the effect pattern, and Figure 98 (C) in the separation and coalescence effect C of the effect pattern). According to this configuration, after combining the character design (first image) and the number design (second image), at least part of the character design (first image) moves, After that, it can be suggested that the character design (first image) and the number design (second image) are stopped and displayed. Further, after combining the character design (first image) and the number design (second image), at least a part of the character design (first image) is displayed in a moving display mode, whereby the character design ( It is also possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the timing when the first image) and the number pattern (second image) are combined is the timing of the stop display.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after combining the character design (first image) and the number design (second image), the character design (first image) and the number design (second image) are combined. image) are stopped and displayed, after that, a third effect of separating the character pattern (first image) and the number pattern (second image) can be executed (effect Fig. 96 (B) for the pattern separation and coalescence effect A, Fig. 97 (G) for the pattern separation and coalescence effect B, and Fig. 98 (D) for the effect pattern separation and coalescence effect C). According to this configuration, after the stop display, the character pattern (first image) and the number pattern (second image) are separated, so that the character pattern (first image) is separated from the character pattern (first image). ) and number patterns (second image) by the player himself/herself to prevent the character pattern (first image) and the number pattern (second image) from losing their freshness. can be done.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the character pattern (first image) and the number pattern (second image) are united and displayed still, a standby screen (predetermined screen) and a jackpot opening screen (predetermined screen) are displayed. , it is possible to execute a fourth effect in which the screen is switched to a specific round screen (predetermined screen) and at least a part of the character design (first image) is displayed in a moving display mode (detailed design is separated and combined 97(A), (B), (H) for the production B, and FIGS. 98(E), (F), (H) for the separation and combination production C of the production pattern). According to this configuration, when the stop display is performed, the character pattern (first image) and the number pattern (second image) are separated instead of switching to the predetermined screen while the stop display state is maintained. Furthermore, since at least a part of the character pattern (first image) is in a moving display mode, the player can be directed to the character pattern (first image), and the predetermined On the screen, the player can be urged to pay attention to the design of the character (first image).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the separation and combination effect B of the effect symbols, the figures in FIGS. In the effect of 4, the pattern of numbers (second image) can be hidden in the standby screen (predetermined screen), the jackpot opening screen (predetermined screen), and the specific round screen (predetermined screen). According to this configuration, when the stop display is performed, the character pattern (first image) and the number pattern (second image) are separated instead of switching to the predetermined screen while the stop display state is maintained. Further, since the number pattern (second image) is hidden, the player can be directed to the character pattern (first image) more.

[Modification]
Below, a modification of the separation and combination effect of the effect pattern will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The separation and combination effect A of the production pattern in FIG. 96, the separation and combination production B of the production pattern in FIG. 97, and the separation and combination production C of the production pattern in FIG. was to be done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the game ball entering the second start hole 21 . In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed game state.

[Modification 2]
In the separation and combination effect B of the production pattern shown in FIG. 97 and the separation and combination production C of the production pattern shown in FIG. It was displayed fluctuating toward. However, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R may be variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the right side toward the left side. In this case, the display area 7a has a horizontally long belt-like area having a distance length that is equal to the vertical distance dimension of the display area 7a, and an upper horizontally long belt-like area as a variation area of the left effect pattern 8L arranged on the uppermost side. A middle horizontally elongated belt-like area is arranged as a variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C arranged on the middle side, and a lower horizontally long belt-like area is arranged as a fluctuation area of the right effect symbol 8R arranged at the lowest side.

[Modification 3]
96, the separation and combination effect B of the effect pattern of FIG. 97, and the separation and combination effect of the effect pattern C of FIG. At least a part of the character pattern (first image) in the middle effect pattern 8C, which is an image, and the right effect pattern 8R (a plurality of types of images), which is a coin-shaped stereoscopic image, is displayed in a moving display mode. However, a display mode may be adopted in which the design of the character (first image) moves within the coin outline of the coin-shaped stereoscopic image. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to heightening the player's interest in the separation and combination effect of the effect symbols by increasing the variations of the display modes in which the character patterns move.

[Modification 4]
In the separation and combination performance A of the production patterns in FIG. 96, the separation and combination production B of the production patterns in FIG. 97, and the separation and combination production C of the production patterns in FIG. was A separation sound may be output (played) from the speaker 67 when the number pattern and the character pattern are separated, and a combination sound may be output from the speaker 67 when the number pattern and the character pattern are combined. may be output (flowed) from Separated sounds and combined sounds include, for example, ``don'', ``dung'', ``gacha'', ``huh'', ``kacha'', ``pyu'', and ``picon''. Alternatively, the separated sound and the combined sound may be the same sound.

[Modification 5]
In the separation and combination performance A of the performance symbols in FIG. 96, the separation and combination performance B of the performance symbols in FIG. 97, and the separation and combination performance C of the performance symbols in FIG. is appended with the character B, the number "3" is appended with the character C, the number "4" is appended with the character D, the number "5" is appended with the character E, and the number "6" is appended with the character E. The character F is attached to the number "7", the character G is attached to the number "8", the character H is attached to the number "8", the character I is attached to the number "9", and each of the numbers has a plurality of characters. It was configured with different character patterns having different colors (full color). However, after the number pattern and the character pattern are separated, when the number pattern and the character pattern are combined again, the combination of the number pattern and the character pattern will be different before and after the separation and combination. can be By doing so, the player can be given a sense of anticipation that they may win because the combination of numbers and character patterns is different before and after separation and combination.

[Modification 6]
96, the separation and combination performance B of the performance symbols shown in FIG. 97, and the separation and combination performance C of the performance symbols shown in FIG. The design of the character and the design of the character are separated and united. However, for the pending icon and the variable icon, an effect may be performed in which the item pattern and the character pattern are separated and united. For example, if the pending icon or variable icon is composed of an item pattern and a character pattern, it is assumed that the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad is a sword (item pattern) and a warrior character. (character design), and the warrior character (character design) is holding a sword (item design) in the right hand. That is, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad is in a state in which the sword (item pattern) and the warrior character (character pattern) are combined. After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad is changed. When starting to move to the first reservation display position 9Ad, the warrior character (character pattern) throws the sword (item pattern) from the right hand toward the first reservation display position 9Ad so as to draw a parabola. As a result, the pending icon 9A is in a state in which the sword (item design) is separated from the warrior character (character design). Then, when the warrior character (character design) moves from the second reservation display position 9Ad to the first reservation display position 9Ad, the warrior character (character design) moves to the first reservation display position 9Ad with the sword (item image) thrown earlier. Since the sword (symbol of the item) is falling, the falling sword (symbol of the item) is held again with the right hand. That is, the pending icon 9A moved to the first pending display position 9Ad is in a state where the sword (item pattern) and the warrior character (character pattern) are united again.

After that, when the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad starts to move to the variable display position 9Cd, the warrior character (character pattern) swings the sword (item symbol) from the right hand toward the variable display position 9Cd. Throw like drawing a parabola. As a result, the pending icon 9A is in a state in which the sword (item design) is separated from the warrior character (character design). Then, when the warrior character (character design) moves from the first holding display position 9Ad to the variable display position 9Cd, the warrior character (character design) drops the sword (item design) thrown earlier at the variable display position 9Cd. Since it is falling, the falling sword (item pattern) is again grabbed and held with the right hand. That is, the variable icon 9C moved to the variable display position 9Cd is in a state where the sword (item design) and the warrior character (character design) are united again. In this way, for the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, it is possible to perform an effect in which the item design and the character design are separated and combined (of course, the item design and the character design are also combined for the pending icon 9B). It is possible to perform the production of separating and uniting).

[Modification 7]
96, the separation and combination performance B of the performance symbols in FIG. 97, and the separation and combination performance C of the performance symbols in FIG. , and the character designs are arranged so as to fit within the coin-shaped outer shape. However, instead of the coin-shaped three-dimensional image, a card-type vertically long rectangular three-dimensional image is composed of a number pattern and a character pattern, and the character pattern is arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of the vertically long rectangular shape. You may do so. In this case, the number pattern is placed in the center of the lower side of the vertically long rectangular shape, and placed in front of the character pattern so as not to protrude into the vertically long rectangular shape. It may be placed so as to cover at least a part of the , or it will protrude downward from the vertically long rectangular shape and be placed in front of the character's design and united to form a number design. You may arrange|position so that it may be in the state which covers at least one part of the design of a character. Further, instead of the coin-shaped three-dimensional image, the size of the character pattern is not limited within a predetermined outer shape such as a coin shape, and the production pattern is a three-dimensional number pattern and a three-dimensional character pattern. It may be composed of In this case, the numbers are arranged in front of the character's design and combined with each other so that the number's design covers at least a part of the character's design.

[Modification 8]
96, the separation and combination performance B of the performance symbols in FIG. 97, and the separation and combination performance C of the performance symbols in FIG. The character design is arranged so as to fit within the coin-shaped outer shape, and the number design protrudes downward from the lower center of the character design (i.e., the lower center of the coin-shaped outer shape). In this state, they are placed in front of the character's design and united, so that at least a part of the character's design is covered with the number design. However, as long as the number pattern covers at least a part of the character pattern, it may be placed at another position. good.

[Modification 9]
In the production pattern separation and combination effect A of FIG. 96, the production pattern separation and combination production B of FIG. 97, and the production pattern separation and combination production C of FIG. production may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine that displays a plurality of types of images showing the result of a lottery on a display device in a variable display and then stationary display,
The display device is capable of displaying a first image and a second image different from the first image,
after the first image and the second image are united from a state in which the first image and the second image are separated, the united first image and the second image are still displayed; perform the rendition of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
In the first effect, the second image is placed at a predetermined position of the first image and on the front side of the first image and merged, and at least part of the first image is replaced by the second image. cover,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2,
A display mode in which at least part of the first image moves after the first image and the second image are united until the united first image and the second image are stopped and displayed. Execute the production of 2,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-3,
After combining the first image and the second image, when the combined first image and the second image are stopped and displayed, the first image and the second image are separated. perform a third production,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4,
After the first image and the second image are united and displayed still, a fourth effect is executed in which the screen is switched to a predetermined screen and a display mode in which at least a part of the first image moves.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-5,
In a fourth effect, the second image is hidden on the predetermined screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

99 to 101, the character suggestion effects A to C across multiple variations will be described below. In FIGS. 99 to 101, various movable accessories, various decorative members, and various background images arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing. FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining a character suggestive effect A that straddles a plurality of fluctuations, FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining a character suggestive effect B that straddles a plurality of fluctuations, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a character suggestive effect C;

This character suggestive effect that straddles multiple variations is an effect that makes a character appear, then uses the character as a variation icon, and suggests the degree of expectation for the variation in the multiple variations. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 when an instruction to execute a character suggestive effect across multiple variations is included. to display an image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 .

Here, the performance symbols will be explained first, and the character suggestive performance A straddling multiple variations, the character suggestive performance B straddling multiple variations, and the character suggestive performance C straddling multiple variations will be described in order.

[Direction design]
First, the production pattern will be briefly explained. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. A variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern (symbol: number “1” to number “9”) is started in a display mode. In the variable production (variable display) of multiple production patterns, each production pattern is number “1” → number “2” → number “3” → number “4” → number “5” → number “6” → number “7”. ] → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → . Note that the number "7" has a bright red color, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9", except the number "7", all have the same bright green color. Even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the performance symbols stopped and displayed at the stop position move slowly (at a low speed) in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) upward once. After that (in other words, after the stop display of the production pattern is canceled, the production pattern is in a display mode in which the production pattern is about to move), while gradually increasing the speed from low speed to the bottom, from the opaque state The display mode changes to a translucent state and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the production pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent production pattern that is changing at high speed. The production pattern decelerates immediately before it stops and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed at the stop position (temporarily stopped and then stopped). ). In the state of temporary stop display, the production pattern is in a small step in the vertical direction (for example, based on the stop position, 2.5 mm upward and 2.5 mm downward (that is, 5 mm swing width)). It becomes a moving display mode. The background image is, for example, a normal background image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, an undersea image, or an underground image, and is a still image or a moving image. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the background image is a normal background image and a city image is displayed.

[Character Suggestion Effect A Across Multiple Fluctuations]
Next, the character suggestive effect A across multiple variations will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the number of game balls entered into the first starting port 20 is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a as an image called a reserve icon, and the first special figure reserve display of the display devices 40 arranged on the game board 2 is performed. It shall be displayed by the device 43a. 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a is, as described above, the number of operations of the first special symbol indicator 41a (first special figure reservation) stored (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 reservation number") ) is displayed.

In the character suggestive effect A that spans multiple variations, the number of held balls reaches a predetermined number (here, three balls), and the number of balls that have not yet undergone pattern variation (that is, the variation display has not yet started). It is started (executed) when a predetermined number (here, 3 balls) of held balls, which is the number of balls that do not exist, is reached. It should be noted that it is possible to change the number of held balls at which the character suggestive effect A across multiple variations is started. In this embodiment, when the standby screen in which the customer is waiting is displayed on the display screen 7a, the player presses the effect button 63 provided on the front frame 53 or selects the button with the up, down, left, and right buttons. By pressing the button 68 (upper pressing operation of the upper pressing button, right pressing operation of the right pressing button, lower pressing operation of the lower pressing button, left pressing operation of the left pressing button), a setting screen is displayed to display various items. In the item "notice of stoppage", the number of held balls can be set to either 3 balls (value 3) or 4 balls (value 4). As a default (value set as an initial value when the power is restored) of the stop notification, 4 balls (value 4) are set as the number of held balls. Here, it is assumed that the player has set the number of reserved balls to 3 (value 3) as the stop notification.

At the time when the variable production (variable display) of the production pattern is started, the number of reserved balls is 2 (special figure 1 reserved number is 2), and the first special figure reservation display 43a of the display devices 40 Two LEDs from the left are lit (lighted in red) and the remaining two LEDs are extinguished. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols, the number of held balls increases from 2 to 3 as shown in FIG. Figure 1 number of reservations increases from value 2 to value 3), three LEDs from the left of the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation indicator 43a of the display device 40 are lit (red lighting) and the remaining one LED is It will turn off.

In order to notify the player that the number of held balls has reached 3, a message image MG saying "Number of held balls: 3" is displayed on the lower center right side of the display screen 7a, and the sword is held with the right hand. A holding character CRA (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "character CRA in the first posture") is displayed in a small size on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Although the position where the character CRA is displayed is within the variation area of the left effect pattern 8L, the character CRA is arranged behind the left effect pattern 8L and in front of the background image (not shown), so that the left effect pattern 8L is displayed. Visibility is not hindered.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright blue number "6", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "5", and the middle effect pattern 8C is bright. A temporary stop display is made with the number "7" having red color, and then, as shown in FIG. , Loss is confirmed. At this time, the message image MG is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and the character CRA in the first posture is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. state. At this point, the player has stopped operating the handle 60 to stop shooting the game ball.

When the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation display 43a of the display devices 40 are shifted to the left, a variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. When this shift is started, the two LEDs from the left are lit (lighted in red) and the remaining two LEDs are extinguished.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, the character CRA in the first posture displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a moves toward the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 99(C). When the character CRA reaches the center of the display screen 7a, it assumes a posture of holding a sword with both arms (hereinafter referred to as "character CRA in the second posture"). ”). At this time, the message image MG is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) on the lower right side of the display screen 7a.

Although the character CRA moves between the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L and the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C during movement or after the movement is completed, the character CRA is behind the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C. By arranging in front of the background image that is not displayed, the visibility of the left production pattern 8L and the middle production pattern 8C is not hindered.

When the character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, it becomes a variation icon that indicates to the player the degree of expectation for the variation by changing the posture of the character CRA or by enlarging a part of the character CRA.

During the variable performance (variable display) of performance patterns, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA and without enlarging a part of the character CRA. It is in a state of In this way, the posture of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, does not change, and the part of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, is not enlarged, suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation is low. is doing.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "1", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "3", and the middle effect pattern 8C is bright. Temporary stop display is performed with the number "2" having a blue color, and then, as shown in FIG. , Loss is confirmed. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA.

When the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation display 43a of the display devices 40 are shifted to the left, a variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. When this shift is started, only the first LED from the left lights up (lights in red) and the remaining three LEDs go out.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 99(E), the character CRA in the second posture is still displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. The display is continued with the character CRA straddling a plurality of fluctuations.

After that, during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols, as shown in FIG. The upper body of the CRA (that is, part of the character CRA) is enlarged and displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In this way, the posture of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, has changed, and furthermore, a part of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, has been enlarged. suggests to. The character CRA in the third posture is arranged behind the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R and in front of the background image (not shown). The visibility of the pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R is not hindered.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(G), the character CRA in the third posture is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily displayed as the number "8" having a bright blue color. A ready-to-win state is formed in which the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a number "8" having a bright blue color, and the middle effect symbol 8C is fluctuating. When ready-to-win is formed when the character suggestive performance A across multiple fluctuations is started, so-called normal ready-to-win is not developed, and the ready-to-win performance with higher expectation for winning is developed as compared with normal ready-to-win.

After that, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. By switching to the battle performance screen, the normal background image as the background image is switched to the battle performance background image as the dedicated background image for the battle performance not included in the normal background image, and the battle performance is started. The background image for battle production is a still image or a moving image of the inside of the old castle or the inside of the base. In this battle effect, the character CRA appears again from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a reach effect whose degree is set high in advance. If the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a big win. Note that the character CRA in the battle effect is different from the first to third postures, and changes into a plurality of types of battle postures.

In the battle production, the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, and the battle production screen is switched again to the production pattern variable display (variation production) screen, thereby switching from the battle production background image to the normal background image. , At the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright blue number "8", the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "9", and the right effect symbol 8R is bright blue. A temporary stop display is made with the number "8" having the . When the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display of the effect symbols (variable effect), the character CRA in the second posture is again displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 99(I), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned to the same symbol, and are stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. In addition, as described above, the character CRA in the second posture is arranged behind the middle effect pattern 8 and in front of the background image (not shown) so as not to hinder the visibility of the middle effect pattern 8C. there is

When the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses in the battle production, the screen for the battle production is switched again to the screen for the variable display of production patterns (variation production), and at the stop position, the left production pattern 8L is bright blue. , the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8" having bright blue, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8" having bright blue. state. Even if the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display of the effect pattern (variable effect), the character CRA in the second posture is not displayed again on the display screen 7a. After that, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in line with the same pattern (here, the number "8" having a bright blue color), the hit is confirmed, and the multiple fluctuations are straddled. Character suggestive presentation A ends. After that, a winning game is started in which a profit is given to the player. In FIG. 99 (E), only the first LED from the left of the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation indicator 43a of the display device 40 is lit (red lighting) and the remaining three LEDs are turned off. In other words, there was one reserved ball for which the character suggestive effect A across multiple variations was performed, but even if the winning game was completed, this reserved ball was reduced to one ball. On the other hand, the character suggestive effect A across multiple variations is not performed again.

When the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation display 43a of the display devices 40 are shifted to the left, a variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. When this shift starts, all the LEDs, ie the four LEDs, are extinguished.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, as shown in FIG. 99(J), although the posture of the character CRA does not change, the upper body of the character CRA in the second posture (that is, part of the character CRA). is enlarged and displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, and the character CRA continues to be displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In this way, although the attitude of the character CRA that has become the variable icon does not change, the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation is increased by partly expanding the character CRA that has become the variable icon. Although it is not high compared to , it suggests to the player that it is not low. Note that when the character CRA in the second posture is partially enlarged, the character CRA in the second posture is behind the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, and a background image (not shown) is displayed. By being arranged in front, the visibility of the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R is not hindered.

After that, the character CRA returns to its original size although a part of the character CRA in the second posture has been enlarged. , the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright blue number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "1". After that, as shown in FIG. 99(K), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern, and are stopped and displayed, the failure is confirmed, and the character is suggested across multiple fluctuations. Performance A ends. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. Note that the character CRA may be hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) when the change ends.

The player operates the handle 60 again to shoot the game ball before the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. After that, two game balls enter the first starting port 20 in succession, and two LEDs from the left of the four LEDs in the first special figure holding indicator 43a of the display devices 40 light up (red lighting ) and the remaining two LEDs are extinguished.

When the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation display 43a of the display devices 40 are shifted to the left, the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started. When this shift is started, the first LED from the left lights up (lights up in red) and the remaining three LEDs turn off, and as shown in FIG. ) is started, and when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same number pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, while the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern When the performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are stop-displayed together with the patterns of the same number, the winning is decided, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started.

In the character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of fluctuations, the message image MG "Number of balls held: 3 balls" is displayed, and the character CRA in the first posture is displayed small on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. stops the operation of the handle 60 at this point to interrupt the shooting of the game ball. The player operates the handle 60 again to shoot the game ball when the character suggestive effect A across multiple fluctuations is started (during execution of the character suggestive effect A across multiple fluctuations), and the first start. Even if a game ball enters the mouth 20, although the value increases if the special figure 1 reserved number is not the maximum, the character suggestive effect A that straddles multiple variations for the increased number of reserved balls is not performed. The character CRA becomes a variation icon in a state in which the number of variations corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 reservation number at the time when the character suggesting performance A straddling the variation is started, suggests the degree of expectation for the variation to the player.

In addition, in the character suggestion effect A straddling a plurality of variations, when the number of held balls reaches 3, the number of balls that have not yet undergone pattern variation (that is, the number of balls that have not yet started variable display). In order to inform the player that the number of held balls has reached 3, a message image MG reading "Number of held balls: 3 balls" is displayed on the right side of the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. At this time, together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, the effect button 63 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, emit white light), or may vibrate. Further, together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, the steering wheel 60 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, flashing white light), or the steering wheel 60 may be operated by blowing air from the steering wheel 60. The player's palm may be stimulated with air.

[Character Suggestion Effect B Across Multiple Fluctuations]
Next, the character suggestive effect B across multiple variations will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described character suggestive effect A that straddles multiple variations, when the number of held balls set by the player is reached, the character becomes a variation icon to suggest the degree of expectation for variation across multiple variations. In the character suggesting performance B straddling a plurality of variations, it is executed when the number of held balls reaches 8, and specific images corresponding to the held balls are displayed respectively to suggest the degree of expectation for the specific images, while the character fluctuates. When it comes to an icon, a specific image collides toward the character that has become the variable icon, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation for the change. B is different.

Here, the number of game balls entering the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 is not displayed as an image called a hold icon on the display screen 7a at all. It shall be displayed by the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a is, as described above, the number of operations of the first special symbol indicator 41a (first special figure reservation) stored (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 reservation number") ), and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b, as described above, stores the number of operation reservations (second special figure reservation) of the second special symbol indicator 41b (hereinafter referred to as “special FIG.

In the character suggestion production B that straddles multiple fluctuations, the number of reserved special figures 1 has a value of 4, the number of reserved special figures 2 has a value of 4, the number of reserved balls has reached 8, and it is still used for pattern fluctuations. When the number of held balls reaches 8, which is the number of balls that are not displayed (that is, the number of balls for which the variable display has not started yet), the display is started.

At the time when the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern is started, the number of reserved special figures 1 becomes the maximum with a value of 4, the number of reserved special figures 2 becomes a value of 3, the number of reserved balls is 7, and the display device All four LEDs in the first special figure suspension indicator 43a of the class 40 are lit (red lighting), and three LEDs from the left are lit ( red light), and the remaining one LED is turned off. When the game ball enters the second starting port 21 during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols, the special figure 2 reservation number changes from value 3 to value 4 as shown in FIG. 100 (A). It becomes the maximum, the number of reserved balls increases from 7 balls to 8 balls, all four LEDs in the first special figure reservation display 43a of the indicators 40 light up (red light), and the number of the indicators 40 All four LEDs in the 2 special figure holding indicator 43b will be in a state of lighting (red lighting).

In order to notify the player that the number of held balls has reached 8, a message image MG saying "Number of held balls: 8" is displayed on the right side of the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the sword is held with the right hand. A holding character CRA (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "character CRA in the first posture") is displayed in a small size on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. Although the position where the character CRA is displayed is within the variation area of the left effect pattern 8L, the character CRA is arranged behind the left effect pattern 8L and in front of the background image (not shown), so that the left effect pattern 8L is displayed. Visibility is not hindered.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright blue number "6", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "5", and the middle effect pattern 8C is bright. A temporary stop display is made with the number "7" having red color, and then, as shown in FIG. , Loss is confirmed. At this time, the message image MG is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and the character CRA in the first posture is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. state. At this point, the player has stopped operating the handle 60 to stop shooting the game ball.

When the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern and are stopped and displayed, along with this, a specified shape is specified in a line from the upper center to the right side of the display screen 7a. Eight images IG are arranged side by side. The number of specific images IG is the sum of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number. In this embodiment, since the special figure 2 reservation number is preferentially digested out of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number, after all the special figure 2 reservation numbers are digested, then the special figure Digestion of 1 reserve number is initiated. As a result, the first specific image IG arranged at a specific position slightly leftward from the upper center of the display screen 7a corresponds to the first LED from the left out of the four LEDs in the second special figure reservation display 43b. Yes, the second specific image IG on the right side of the first specific image IG corresponds to the second LED from the left of the four LEDs in the second special figure reservation display 43b, and the second specific image IG The third specific image IG next to the right corresponds to the third LED from the left of the four LEDs in the second special figure reservation display 43b, and the fourth specific image IG next to the right of the third specific image The image IG corresponds to the fourth LED from the left out of the four LEDs in the second special figure holding display 43b, and the fifth specific image IG next to the right of the fourth specific image IG is the first special figure. Of the four LEDs in the figure suspension display 43a, the first LED from the left corresponds to the sixth specific image IG to the right of the fifth specific image IG. It corresponds to the second LED from the left after the two LEDs, and the seventh specific image IG next to the right of the sixth specific image IG is the three from the left of the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation display 43a The eighth specific image IG on the right side of the seventh specific image IG corresponds to the fourth LED from the left out of the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation display 43a. is.

Since the special figure 2 reservation number out of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number is preferentially digested, when the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation number is started, the second display device 40 Four LEDs in the special figure reservation indicator 43b shift to the left. Along with this, the second specific image IG to the eighth specific image IG also shift to the left all at once, the first specific image IG is pushed out by the second specific image IG and thrown out from the specific position, and moves to the specific position for the second specific image. The image IG moves, and the subsequent specific image IG also moves. When the special figure 2 reservation number is all consumed, then the special figure 1 reservation number is started, and the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation indicator 43a of the display devices 40 shift to the left. Along with this, the fifth specific image IG to the eighth specific image IG also shift to the left all at once, the fifth specific image IG is pushed out by the sixth specific image IG and thrown out from the specific position, and moves to the sixth specific image IG. The image IG moves, and the subsequent specific image IG also moves.

The specific image IG expresses the difference in the degree of expectation for winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the specific image IG due to the difference in shape and color. For example, among the five specific images IG, a yellow (gold) star-shaped specific image IG, a smiling specific image IG, a red spherical specific image IG, a blue spherical specific image IG, and a white spherical specific image IG, yellow The (gold) star-shaped specific image IG has the highest probability of winning, the smiling specific image IG has the second highest probability of winning, and the red spherical specific image IG has the third highest probability of winning, The blue spherical specific image IG has the fourth highest probability of winning, and the white spherical specific image IG has the lowest probability of winning.

Here, the first specific image IG is a blue spherical specific image IG, the second to sixth specific images IG are white spherical specific images IG, and the seventh specific image IG is a red spherical specific image IG. It is a spherical specific image IG, and the eighth specific image IG is a white spherical specific image IG. As described above, the specific images IG are so-called pre-reading images suggesting preliminary results, and the player has a high interest in the eight specific images IG displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the four LEDs in the second special figure reservation display 43b of the display devices 40 shift to the left, as shown in FIG. When this shift is started, the three LEDs from the left in the second special figure reservation indicator 43b are lit (red lighting) and the remaining one LED is turned off, and the second specific image IG to eighth specific The image IG also shifts to the left all at once, the blue spherical first specific image IG is pushed out by the second specific image IG and thrown out from the specific position, the second specific image IG moves to the specific position, and the following specific image IG will also move on.

When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the character CRA in the first posture displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a changes its posture while increasing its size toward the center of the display screen 7a. When the character CRA reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRA is in a posture of holding a sword with both arms (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "character CRA in the second posture"). At this time, the message image MG is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) on the lower right side of the display screen 7a.

Although the character CRA moves between the variation area of the left effect symbol 8L and the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C during movement or after the movement is completed, the character CRA is behind the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C. By arranging in front of the background image that is not displayed, the visibility of the left production pattern 8L and the middle production pattern 8C is not hindered.

When the character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, it becomes a variation icon that indicates to the player the degree of expectation for the variation by changing the posture of the character CRA or by enlarging a part of the character CRA.

The blue spherical first specific image IG thrown out from the specific position collides with the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a so as to draw a parabola and explodes. This explosion causes an effect image to be displayed. Depending on the color and size of the effect image, the character CRA's posture may be changed, or a part of the character CRA may be enlarged to suggest to the player. The color of the effect image is the same as or similar to the color of the specific image IG. The shape and size of the effect image are such that the higher the expectation of winning suggested by the specific image IG, the more complex the shape (for example, the more complex polygonal shape) and the larger the size.

Although the blue spherical first specific image IG thrown out from the specific position collides with the character CRA and explodes, the posture of the character CRA does not change and a part of the character CRA does not expand. The character CRA in two postures is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In this way, the posture of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, does not change, and a part of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, is not enlarged, suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation is low. is doing.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "1", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "3", and the middle effect pattern 8C is bright. Temporary stop display is performed with the number "2" having a blue color, and then, as shown in FIG. , Loss is confirmed. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA.

When the four LEDs in the second special figure reservation indicator 43b of the display devices 40 shift to the left, as shown in FIG. When this shift is started, the two LEDs from the left in the second special figure reservation indicator 43b are lit (red lighting) and the remaining two LEDs are turned off, and the third specific image IG to eighth specific The image IG also shifts to the left all at once, the white spherical second specific image IG is pushed out by the third specific image IG and thrown out from the specific position, the third specific image IG moves to the specific position, and the following specific image IG will also move on.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, the character CRA in the second posture is still displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. continues to be displayed across multiple fluctuations. At this time, the seventh specific image IG changes from a red spherical specific image IG to a yellow (gold) star-shaped specific image IG.

The white spherical second specific image IG thrown out from the specific position collides with the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a so as to draw a parabola and explodes, but the posture of the character CRA changes. The character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without any part of the character CRA being enlarged. In this way, the posture of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, does not change, and a part of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, is not enlarged, suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation is low. is doing.

After that, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern, and the display is stopped, and the loss continues. Digestion of numbers begins. After that, the production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are not aligned in the same pattern, and are stopped and displayed. 100(F), a variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. When this shift is started, the first LED from the left in the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is lit (red lighting) and the remaining three LEDs are turned off, and the seventh specific image IG to the eighth The specific image IG also shifts to the left all at once, the yellow (gold) star-shaped seventh specific image IG is pushed out by the eighth specific image IG and thrown out from the specific position, and the eighth specific image IG moves to the specific position. do.

The yellow (gold) star-shaped seventh specific image IG thrown out from the specific position collides with the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a so as to draw a parabola and explodes. is released to change to a third posture in which both arms are spread out, and the upper half of the character CRA in the third posture (that is, part of the character CRA) is enlarged and displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. ing. In this way, the posture of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, has changed, and furthermore, a part of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, has been enlarged. suggests to. The character CRA in the third posture is arranged behind the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R and in front of the background image (not shown). The visibility of the pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R is not hindered.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(G), the character CRA in the third posture is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is a bright blue number "8". A ready-to-win state is formed in which the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a number "8" having a bright blue color, and the middle effect symbol 8C is fluctuating. When ready-to-win is formed when the character suggestive performance B across a plurality of fluctuations is started, so-called normal ready-to-win is not developed, but the ready-to-win performance with higher expectation for winning is developed as compared with normal ready-to-win.

After that, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, the right effect symbol 8R, and the white spherical eighth specific image IG are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. By switching from the variable display (fluctuation effect) screen to the battle effect screen, the normal background image, which is the background image, is switched to the battle effect background image, which is the dedicated background image for the battle effect that is not included in the normal background image. , the battle production is started. The background image for battle production is a still image or moving image of the inside of the old castle or the base. In this battle effect, the character CRA appears again from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a reach effect whose degree is set high in advance. If the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a big win. Note that the character CRA in the battle effect is different from the first to third postures, and changes into a plurality of types of battle postures.

In the battle production, the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, and the battle production screen is switched again to the production pattern variable display (variation production) screen, thereby switching from the battle production background image to the normal background image. , a white spherical eighth specific image is displayed at a specific position, and at the stop position, the number "8" having a bright blue left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the number "9" having a bright green color the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed. , and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "8" having a bright blue color. When the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display of the effect symbols (variable effect), the character CRA in the second posture is again displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 100(I), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are not aligned to the same symbol, and are stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. In addition, as described above, the character CRA in the second posture is arranged behind the middle effect pattern 8 and in front of the background image (not shown) so as not to hinder the visibility of the middle effect pattern 8C. there is

When the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses in the battle production, the screen for the battle production is switched again to the screen for the variable display of production patterns (variation production), and at the stop position, the left production pattern 8L is bright blue. , the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8" having bright blue, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8" having bright blue. state. Even if the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display of the effect pattern (variable effect), the character CRA in the second posture is not displayed again on the display screen 7a. After that, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in line with the same pattern (here, the number "8" having a bright blue color), the hit is confirmed, and the multiple fluctuations are straddled. The character suggestive presentation B ends. After that, a winning game is started in which a profit is given to the player. In FIG. 100 (F), only the first LED from the left of the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation indicator 43a of the display device 40 is lit (red lighting) and the remaining three LEDs are turned off. However, in other words, there was one reserved ball for which the character suggestive effect B across multiple variations was performed, but even if the winning game was completed, this reserved ball was reduced to one ball. On the other hand, the character suggestive effect B across multiple variations is not performed again.

When the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation display 43a of the display devices 40 shift to the left, as shown in FIG. When this shift is started, all the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation display 43a are turned off, and the white spherical eighth specific image IG is thrown out from the specific position.

The white spherical eighth specific image IG thrown out from the specific position collides with the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a so as to draw a parabola and explodes, but the posture of the character CRA changes. The character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without any part of the character CRA being enlarged. In this way, the posture of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, does not change, and a part of the character CRA, which has become a variable icon, is not enlarged, suggesting to the player that the degree of expectation for winning with respect to the variation is low. is doing.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "5", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright blue number "4", and the middle effect pattern 8C is bright. A temporary stop display is made with the number "1" in green. After that, as shown in FIG. 100(K), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern, and are stopped and displayed, the failure is confirmed, and the character is suggested across multiple fluctuations. Performance B ends. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. Note that the character CRA may be hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) when the change ends.

The player operates the handle 60 again to shoot the game ball before the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. After that, two game balls enter the first starting port 20 in succession, and two LEDs from the left of the four LEDs in the first special figure holding indicator 43a of the display devices 40 light up (red lighting ) and the remaining two LEDs are extinguished.

When the four LEDs in the first special figure reservation display 43a of the display devices 40 are shifted to the left, a variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. When this shift is started, the first LED from the left lights up (lights up in red) and the remaining three LEDs go out, and as shown in FIG. ) is started, and when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same number pattern and are stopped and displayed, the loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern When the performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are stop-displayed together with the symbols of the same number, winning is confirmed, and then a winning game is started in which a profit is given to the player.

In the character suggestive effect B straddling multiple fluctuations, a message image MG saying "Number of balls on hold: 8 balls" is displayed, and the character CRA in the first posture is displayed small on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. stops the operation of the handle 60 at this point to interrupt the shooting of the game ball. The number of specific images IG is reduced by starting the character suggestive effect B across multiple variations. Therefore, the player operates the handle 60 again when the character suggestive effect B spanning multiple variations is started (during execution of the character suggestive effect B straddling multiple variations) to shoot the game ball. Even if the game ball enters the 1 start port 20 or the 2nd start port 21, the value will increase if the special figure 1 reservation number is not the maximum, and the value will increase if the special figure 2 reservation number is not the maximum, but this The character suggestive effect B that straddles multiple variations for the increased number of held balls is not performed, and the number of specific images IG is not increased and displayed on the display screen 7a.

In addition, in the character suggestive effect B that straddles multiple variations, when the number of balls on hold reaches 8, the number of balls that have not yet been subjected to symbol variation (that is, the number of balls that have not yet started to be displayed with variation). In order to inform the player that the number of reserved balls has reached 8, a message image MG reading "Number of reserved balls: 8" is displayed on the right side of the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. At this time, together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, the effect button 63 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, emit white light), or may vibrate. Further, together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, the steering wheel 60 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, flashing white light), or the steering wheel 60 may be operated by blowing air from the steering wheel 60. The player's palm may be stimulated with air.

In the character suggestive effect B straddling a plurality of fluctuations, the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 are separately arranged in the game area 3 partitioned on the game board 2.例文帳に追加However, it is also possible to dispose in the game area 3 what is unitized as a starting opening unit in which the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21 are integrated. For example, the starting port unit is provided with a first starting port 20 on the left side and a second starting port 21 on the right side. It may be arranged. In this case, the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 may be arranged on the same horizontal line, or the first starting port 20 may be arranged above the second starting port 21, The first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 may be arranged on a straight line downward to the right, or the first starting port 20 may be arranged below the second starting port 21 so that the first starting port 20 The starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 may be arranged on a straight line rising to the right.

In addition, one ball entrance is provided on the upstream side (upper side) of the starter unit, and the game balls that enter the ball entrance are distributed to the left downstream side or the right downstream side via the distribution device, and the left downstream side The game balls distributed to enter the first starting port 20 provided on the left downstream side, and the game balls distributed to the right downstream side enter the second starting port 21 provided on the right downstream side. You may do so. The sorting device has a shape in which the letter Y (or letter T) is turned upside down, and the members of the left protrusion, the central protrusion, and the right protrusion are arranged at the lower end of the central protrusion and the right end of the left protrusion. and the left end of the right projecting portion are connected (integrated), and a through hole is formed in the lower end of this central projecting portion. A rotary shaft is inserted through the through hole. As a result, the sorting device is pivotally supported by the rotating shaft, and thus rotates leftward (rotates counterclockwise) and tilts rightward. or (rotate clockwise).

When the distribution device is in a state inclined in the direction of distributing the game balls to the left downstream side, the game balls are prevented from entering the right downstream side by the central projecting portion, and in this state, When a game ball enters the ball entrance, the entered game ball collides with the left surface of the central protruding part and flows down to the upper surface of the left protruding part, and the left protruding part is pushed downward by the weight of the game ball, The ball enters the first starting port 20 provided on the left downstream side. When the left projection is pushed downward by the weight of the game ball, the sorting device rotates leftward and tilts, and the center projection blocks the entry of the game ball to the left downstream side, and the sorting device moves the game ball. is inclined in the direction of distributing to the right downstream side. In this state, when the game ball enters the ball entrance again, the entered game ball collides with the right surface of the central protruding portion and flows down to the upper surface of the right protruding portion, where the game ball's own weight causes the right protruding portion to flow down. is pushed downward, and the ball is entered into the second starting port 21 provided on the right downstream side. When the weight of the game ball pushes the right projection downward, the sorting device rotates rightward and tilts, and the center projection prevents the game ball from entering the right downstream side. In this way, every time a game ball enters the entrance, the sorting device shifts between a state in which the game ball is sorted to the left downstream side and a state in which the game ball is sorted to the right downstream side. They are designed to be repeatedly inclined to each other. As a result, the game ball fired by the player operating the handle 60 enters the ball entrance provided in the starter unit, and the special figure 1 reservation number reaches the maximum value 4, and the special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum value of 4 and the number of reserved balls reaches 8, the character suggestion performance B across multiple fluctuations is started.

[Character Suggestion Effect C Across Multiple Fluctuations]
Next, the character suggestive effect C across multiple variations will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described character suggestive effect A spanning multiple fluctuations, when the number of held balls set by the player is reached, the character becomes a fluctuation icon to suggest the degree of expectation for the fluctuation across multiple fluctuations. However, the character suggesting effect B is executed when the number of reserved balls reaches eight, and specific images corresponding to the reserved balls are displayed, respectively, and the degree of expectation for the specific images is suggested. While the specific image collides toward the character that has become the variation icon to suggest the degree of expectation for the variation, in the character suggestion performance C that straddles multiple variations, when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win. A game ball enters the second starting port 21 opened to the second starting port 21, and the number of held balls in the second starting port 21 becomes a variation icon, indicating the degree of expectation for the variation. A character suggestive effect A straddling a plurality of variations, a character suggestive effect B straddling a plurality of variations, and a character suggestive effect C straddling a plurality of variations are different from each other. Further, in the character suggestive effects A and B that span multiple variations, the pending icons 9A and 9B and the variable icon 9C are not displayed at all. 9B and a variation icon 9C are displayed.

First, the variable icon and the pending icon will be briefly explained. The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R which are currently fluctuating as digestion of the first special figure pending is the image display device. 7 is displayed (placed) at a variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. A first reserved display area is provided as the first special figure reservation in the area to the left of the variable display position, and a second reserved display area is provided as the second special figure reservation in the area to the right of the variable display position. It is In the first reservation display area, four reservation icons 9A can be displayed linearly in a row, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are a first reserved display position 9Ad, a second reserved display position 9Ad, a third reserved display position 9Ad, and a fourth reserved display position 9Ad from a position near the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the display position 9Ad. In the second pending display area, four pending icons 9B can be displayed linearly in a line, and up to four pending icons 9B can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are a first reserved display position 9Bd, a second reserved display position 9Bd, a third reserved display position 9Bd, and a fourth reserved display position 9Bd toward the right side of the display screen 7a from a position near the variable display position 9Cd. They are linearly arranged and displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of display position 9Bd.

The variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons") have different shapes and colors, so the degree of expectation for winning the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B during the lottery represents the difference. For example, among five icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a smiling face icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon is the most successful. Expectations are high, the smile icon is the second highest expectation, the red spherical icon is the third highest expectation, the blue spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation, and the white spherical icon is the one with the lowest expectations of success. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the variable icon 9C and the suspended icons 9A and 9B. In addition, the variable icon 9C, the reserved icons 9A and 9B, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the first reserved display position 9Bd to the fourth reserved display position 9Bd are on the front side. Because they are arranged, visibility is not hindered by production patterns, effect images, characters, and the like.

The character suggestive performance C straddling a plurality of fluctuations is started when the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning (normal symbol winning) and the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 is started.

A variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, and thereafter, at the stop position, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a number "1" having a bright green color, and the right effect pattern 8R is a number "3" having a bright green color. , and the medium effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" having a bright blue color. After that, as shown in FIG. The symbols 8R do not align with the same symbols, and are displayed in a stopped state, a failure is confirmed, and the variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). Here, before the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the game ball enters the first start port 20, so that the three reserved icons 9A are not digested. It is in stock.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9A displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad moves to the second pending display position 9Ad. Then, the pending icon 9A displayed at the second pending display position 9Ad moves to the first pending display position 9Ad, and only two pending icons 9A are stocked without being digested. .

A variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started, and when the result of the normal pattern lottery is hit (normal pattern win), an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 21 is started, and FIG. 101 (B). As shown, a horizontally long strip-shaped telop area TP having a predetermined vertical distance dimension (for example, 25 mm) is arranged and displayed on the frontmost side so as to contact the upper left side, the upper side, and the upper right side of the display screen 7a (appearance do). A background image is arranged in the inner region of the horizontally elongated band-shaped telop region TP, and in front of this background image, the player is informed that the second start port 21 is open and the game ball can be easily entered. A telop character image TMG reading "opening..." is arranged. The telop character image TMG enters the right side of the horizontally long strip-shaped telop area TP from the outside of the upper right side of the display screen 7a, moves toward the left side of the horizontally long strip-shaped telop area TP at a constant speed, and enters the horizontally long strip-shaped telop area TP. (that is, the upper part of the left side of the display screen 7a). The background image arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long band-shaped telop region TP is opaque with a design and contrast set in order to improve the visibility of the telop character image TMG that reads "opening...". there is The background image arranged in the inner region of the horizontally long band-shaped telop region TP may be opaque or translucent if it is an image that can improve the visibility of the telop character image TMG saying "Open...". It may be

Furthermore, to encourage the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 (in other words, to inform the player that the second starting port 21 is open and the game ball is easy to enter) , a character CRA holding a sword in the right hand (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "character CRA in the first posture") is displayed in a small size on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, and to the left of the character CRA, A message image MG saying "Aim!" is displayed. Although the position where the character CRA is displayed is within the variable area of the right production pattern 8R, the character CRA is arranged behind the right production pattern 8R and in front of the background image (not shown), so that the right production pattern 8R is displayed. Visibility is not hindered. In addition, although the position where the message image MG is displayed straddles the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C and the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R, the message image MG is behind the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R. By being arranged in front of the background image (not shown), the visibility of the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R is not hindered.

During the variable performance (variable display) of performance symbols, as shown in FIG. Then, the first reservation display position 9Bd to the fourth reservation display position 9Bd are displayed (appear), and each time a game ball enters the second start port 21, the number of reservation icons 9B increases and is stocked. . At this time, a horizontally elongated band-shaped telop area TP is displayed, and a telop character image TMG reading "opening..." is displayed, and the posture of the character CRA is changed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The character CRA in the first posture is displayed without any movement, and the message image MG saying "Aim!" is displayed to the left of the character CRA.

When the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 is completed during the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols, as shown in FIG. '' is hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and furthermore, when the auxiliary game for opening the second starting hole 21 is being played, the ball enters the second starting hole 21 and is held. In order to inform the player of the number of balls that have turned into balls, the message image MG "Aim!" is updated to the message image MG "Get two!" In other words, here, the number of balls entering the second starting port 21 and becoming a reserved ball before the opening time elapses from the start to the end of the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 It has 2 balls. Reservation icons 9B are displayed at the first reservation display position 9Bd and the second reservation display position 9Bd, respectively, and there are only two game balls that have been stocked without being digested by entering the second starting port 21. It is in a state where there are only two game balls that have been stocked without being digested by entering the first start port 20.例文帳に追加At this time, the character CRA in the first posture is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA.

After that, at the stop position, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright blue number "6", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "5", and the middle effect pattern 8C is bright. When the number "7" in red is temporarily stopped and displayed, the message image MG is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8C, the right performance symbols 8R are not aligned to the same symbols, and are stopped and displayed, a failure is confirmed, and the variation icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). At this time, the character CRA in the first posture is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. At this point, the player has stopped operating the handle 60 to stop shooting the game ball.

In this embodiment, of the pending icon 9A stocked by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the hold icon 9B stocked by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, Since the pending icon 9B is preferentially digested, after all the pending icons 9B are digested, the pending icon 9A is started to be digested.

Of the pending icon 9A stocked by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 and the hold icon 9B stocked by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the hold icon 9B is prioritized. Therefore, when the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern is started. be. When the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B displayed at the second pending display position 9Bd moves to the first pending display position 9Bd. Then, only one pending icon 9B is stocked without being digested. At this time, since the pending icon 9A is not digested, only two undigested pending icons 9A are stocked.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, as shown in FIG. The character CRA starts to move while increasing its size while changing its posture, and when it reaches the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRA is in a posture of holding a sword with both arms (hereinafter referred to as "character in the second posture"). (sometimes referred to as CRA).

Although the character CRA moves between the variation area of the right effect symbol 8R and the variation area of the middle effect symbol 8C during the movement or after the movement is completed, the character CRA is behind the right effect symbol 8R and the middle effect symbol 8C. By arranging it in front of the background image that does not exist, the visibility of the right production pattern 8R and the middle production pattern 8C is not hindered. Of course, the variable icon 9C, the reserved icons 9A and 9B, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the first reserved display position 9Bd to the fourth reserved display position 9Bd are as described above. , since the character CRA is arranged on the frontmost side, the variable icon 9C, the suspended icons 9A and 9B, the variable display position 9Cd, the first suspended display position 9Ad, the fourth suspended display position 9Ad, the first suspended display position 9Bd, and so on. Since it is arranged behind the fourth reserved display position 9Bd, the visibility is not hindered by the character CRA.

When the character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, the change in the attitude of the character CRA may give a change to the change icon indicating the degree of expectation for the change. In other words, assuming that the variation icon indicating the expected degree of winning for the variation is the "first variation icon", the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a changes its attitude to the first variation icon. It has a function as a "second variable icon" that gives a change to the variable icon 9C. In this way, when the character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, a variable icon is formed by the first variable icon and the second variable icon.

Thereafter, the character CRA in the second posture swings down the sword held with both hands toward the variation icon 9C, which is the first variation icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "character CRA in the third posture"). When it changes, it changes from the white spherical variation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C. Note that even if the character CRA in the second posture changes to the character CRA in the third posture, the white spherical variation icon 9C does not change to another color or shape, and the white spherical variation icon 9C remains unchanged. It may be a state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101(G), the character CRA in the third posture is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and at the stop position, the left effect symbol 8L is a bright blue number "8". A ready-to-win state is formed in which the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a number "8" having a bright blue color, and the middle effect symbol 8C is fluctuating. When the ready-to-win state is formed when the character suggestive performance C straddling a plurality of fluctuations is started, the so-called normal ready-to-win state does not occur, but develops to a ready-to-win state with a high degree of expectation of winning compared to the normal ready-to-win state.

After that, left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C, right production pattern 8R, variation icon 9C, suspension icons 9A and 9B, variation display position 9Cd, first suspension display position 9Ad to fourth suspension display position 9Ad, first suspension display The position 9Bd to the fourth reserved display position 9Bd are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. , the normal background image, which is the background image, is switched to the battle effect background image, which is the background image dedicated to the battle effect not included in the normal background image, and the battle effect is started. The background image for battle production is a still image or moving image of the inside of the old castle or the base. In this battle effect, the character CRA appears again from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a reach effect whose degree is set high in advance. If the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle presentation, it is a loss, whereas if the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle presentation, it is a big win. Note that the character CRA in the battle effect is different from the first to third postures, and changes into a plurality of types of battle postures.

In the battle production, the character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, and the battle production screen is switched again to the production pattern variable display (variation production) screen, thereby switching from the battle production background image to the normal background image. , variation icon 9C, suspension icons 9A and 9B, variation display position 9Cd, first suspension display position 9Ad to fourth suspension display position 9Ad, first suspension display position 9Bd to fourth suspension display position 9Bd are displayed, and at the stop position , The left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with a bright blue number "8", the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a bright green number "9", and the right effect symbol 8R is a bright blue number " 8”, a temporary stop display is displayed. When the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display of the effect symbols (variable effect), the character CRA in the second posture is again displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 101(I), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern, and are stopped and displayed. The icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a). At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. In other words, while the variation icon 9C, which is the first variation icon, is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the character CRA in the second posture, which is the second variation icon, is displayed. there is

In addition, as described above, the character CRA in the second posture is arranged behind the middle effect pattern 8 and in front of the background image (not shown) so as not to hinder the visibility of the middle effect pattern 8C. there is Of course, the holding icons 9A and 9B, the variable display position 9Cd, the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad, and the first holding display position 9Bd to the fourth holding display position 9Bd are the most front side as described above. , the character CRA is behind the reserved icons 9A and 9B, the variable display position 9Cd, the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the first reserved display position 9Bd to the fourth reserved display position 9Bd. , so that the visibility is not hindered by the character CRA.

When the character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses in the battle production, the screen for the battle production is switched again to the screen for the variable display of production patterns (variation production), and at the stop position, the left production pattern 8L is bright blue. , the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8" having bright blue, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8" having bright blue. state. Even if the screen of the battle effect is switched to the screen of the variable display of the effect pattern (variable effect), the character CRA in the second posture is not displayed again on the display screen 7a. After that, the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in line with the same pattern (here, the number "8" having a bright blue color), the hit is confirmed, and the multiple fluctuations are straddled. The character suggestive effect C ends. After that, a winning game is started in which a profit is given to the player. In FIG. 101(F), there was one reserved icon 9B, that is, there was one reserved ball for which the character suggestive effect C across multiple variations was performed. Even after the game is over, the character suggestion performance C across a plurality of fluctuations is not performed again for one reserved ball.

When the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. be done. When the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd is moved to the variable display position 9Cd, the pending icon 9B is not digested and stocked does not exist at all. At this time, since the pending icon 9A is not digested, only two undigested pending icons 9A are stocked. Since all of the pending icons 9B have been deleted, the first to fourth pending display positions 9Bd to 9Bd may be hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a).

When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbols is started, the character image PG of "PUSH" arranged on the arc is arranged on the frontmost side and displayed large on the display screen 7a. The character image PG of "PUSH" suggests the player to press the effect button 63, and is a stereoscopic image with an opaque color. In the character image PG "PUSH", the degree of expectation for changing the posture of the character CRA from the second posture to another posture increases in the order of white→blue→green→red→purple→yellow (golden). Therefore, the players are highly interested in the character image PG "PUSH". Note that the effect button 63 is also lit in the color "PUSH" attached to the character image PG. Here, since the color attached to the character image PG of "PUSH" is blue, the effect button 63 is lit in blue.

Even if the player presses the production button 63, the posture of the character CRA displayed in the center of the display screen 7a does not change at all from the second posture to another posture, and the character CRA in the second posture is displayed on the display screen 7a. , and the display continues with the character CRA straddling a plurality of fluctuations. In this way, since the posture of the character CRA, which is the second variation icon, does not change, the variation icon 9C, which is the first variation icon, cannot be changed. suggesting.

After that, when the character image PG of "PUSH" is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a) and the effect button 63 is turned off, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily displayed as the number "5" having a bright green color at the stop position. The right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright blue number "4", and the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright green number "1". After that, as shown in FIG. 101(K), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are not aligned with the same pattern, and are stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. The icon 9C is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the character suggestive effect C across multiple variations is completed. At this time, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a without changing the posture of the character CRA. In other words, while the variation icon 9C, which is the first variation icon, is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), the character CRA in the second posture, which is the second variation icon, is displayed. there is Note that the character CRA may be hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a) when the change ends.

Before the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the player operates the handle 60 again to shoot the game ball, but the game ball enters the first starting port 20. continues to be unable to enter the ball.

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. be done. When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, a state in which only one pending icon 9A is stocked without being digested is present. . At this time, since all the pending icons 9B have been deleted, the first pending display position 9Bd to the fourth pending display position 9Bd are hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a).

When the variable performance (variable display) of the performance pattern is started and the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are not aligned with the same number pattern and are stopped and displayed, the failure is confirmed. When the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C and the right effect pattern 8R are stop-displayed with the same number of patterns, the winning is confirmed, and then the winning game in which the player is given a profit is started. It will be done.

In addition, in the character suggestion effect C straddling a plurality of variations, when the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning (normal symbol winning), an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 21 is started, and the message "Aim!" The image MG was to be displayed. At this time, together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, the effect button 63 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, emit white light), or may vibrate. Further, together with the message image MG or instead of the message image MG, the steering wheel 60 may emit light in a predetermined color (for example, flashing white light), or the steering wheel 60 may be operated by blowing air from the steering wheel 60. The player's palm may be stimulated with air.

In addition, in the character suggestion performance C straddling a plurality of fluctuations, when the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning (normal winning), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 is started. At this time, when the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 21 at all, the effects shown in FIGS. 101(L), the character CRA in the first posture that was displayed in the display screen 7a is hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a), and as shown in FIG. When it moves to the display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol is started. In this way, in the character suggestive effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations, when the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning (normal winning), an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 21 is started, and the second start port 21 is started. When at least one game ball enters the ball, the character CRA in the first posture displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a becomes the character CRA in the second posture in the center of the display screen 7a, and the above-mentioned "second variation It comes to have a function as an icon.

In addition, in the character suggestive effect C straddling a plurality of fluctuations, the variation which is the first fluctuation icon corresponding to the left production pattern 8L, the middle production pattern 8C, and the right production pattern 8R that are currently fluctuating as the digestion of the first special figure reservation The icon 9C was displayed at the variable display position 9Cd displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. However, the variable icon 9C and the variable display position 9Cd may not exist in the first place. That is, the first reservation display area is provided as the first special figure reservation, the second reservation display area is provided as the second special figure reservation, and the first reservation display area includes the above-mentioned first reservation display position 9Ad to the second 4 reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a, and in the second reserved display area, the above-described first reserved display positions 9Bd to fourth reserved display positions 9Bd are displayed on the display screen 7a. are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the As a result, the character CRA in the first posture appears until the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 is started and ended ((B) to (E) in FIG. 101), and the first starting port 20 is opened. Of the reserved icon 9A stocked by the entry of the game ball and the reserved icon 9B stocked by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the reserved icon 9B is preferentially digested. Therefore, when the suspended icon 9B displayed at the first suspended display position 9Bd drops and moves to the left as if drawing a parabola, and disappears from the lower side of the display screen 7a so as to pop out, the variable effect of the effect pattern ( variable display) is started. When the pending icon 9B displayed at the first pending display position 9Bd drops and moves to the left in a parabolic line and disappears from the lower side of the display screen 7a so as to protrude outward, the second pending display position follows. The pending icon 9B displayed in 9Bd moves to the first pending display position 9Bd, and only one pending icon 9B is stocked without being digested. When the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbols is started, the character CRA in the second posture is displayed as a variable icon in the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 101(F). The character CRA, which has become the variable icon, is then displayed in a state straddling a plurality of variations until all the pending icons 9B are consumed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character suggestive effect straddling a plurality of variations will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left effect pattern 8L (identification pattern), the middle effect pattern 8C (identification pattern), and the right effect pattern 8R (identification pattern), which indicate the result of the lottery, are displayed on the image display device 7 (display device). The image display device 7 (display device) can display the message image MG and the character CRA (a plurality of types of images). After displaying the character CRA (specific character image), the character CRA ( A specific character image) is displayed in a state straddling a plurality of display fluctuations as a variation icon, and a left production pattern 8L (identification pattern), a middle production pattern 8C (identification pattern), a middle production pattern 8C (identification pattern), It is possible to execute the first effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the variation display of the right effect pattern 8R (identification pattern) (in the character suggesting effect A straddling multiple variations, FIG. 99 (A) 100 (A) to (K) for a character suggestive effect B that spans multiple variations, and FIG. 101 (B) to (K) for a character suggestive effect C that spans multiple variations). According to this configuration, after the character CRA (specific character image) is displayed, the character CRA (specific character image) becomes a variable icon, and the character CRA (specific character image) that has become a variable icon straddles a plurality of display variations. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the variable display of the left production pattern 8L (identification pattern), the middle production pattern 8C (identification pattern), and the right production pattern 8R (identification pattern) for each variable display. Therefore, when the character CRA (specific character image) is displayed, it is possible to create an effect that the character CRA (specific character image) may change to a variable icon. Then, it is displayed in a state straddling a plurality of display fluctuations, and hits for the fluctuation display of the left production pattern 8L (identification pattern), the middle production pattern 8C (identification pattern), and the right production pattern 8R (identification pattern) for each fluctuation display It is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented novel performance of suggesting the degree of expectation of the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the character suggestive effect A straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. 99, the character suggestive effect B straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. , the character CRA (specific character image) is displayed in the first posture on the lower left side (first position) of the display screen 7a or the lower right side (first position) of the display screen 7a, and then the character CRA (specific character image) can be moved to the center of the display screen 7a (second position different from the first position) and changed to a second position different from the first position to be a variable icon. According to this configuration, the character CRA (specific character image) moves from the first position to the second position, and further, the orientation of the character CRA (specific character image) changes from the first orientation to the second orientation, and the variable icon , it is possible to clearly inform the player of the timing at which the character CRA (specific character image) becomes the variable icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the character suggestive effect A straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. 99, the character suggestive effect B straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. 2, the size of the character CRA (specific character image) in the second posture at the center (second position) of the display screen 7a is changed to the lower left side (first position) of the display screen 7a or the lower right side of the display screen 7a. It can be made larger than the size of the character CRA (specific character image) in the first posture at the (first position). According to this configuration, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to the character CRA (specific character image), and to inform the player more easily of the timing at which the character CRA (specific character image) becomes the variable icon.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the character CRA (specific character image) is displayed in the first effect in the character suggestive effect A across multiple variations in FIG. 99 and the character suggestive effect B across multiple variations in FIG. It is possible to variably display a held ball for which variable display has not yet started immediately before the ball is displayed. In the character suggestive effect A across multiple fluctuations in FIG. 99, the number of holdings for the first starting port 20: 3 balls is variably displayed, and in the character suggestive effect B across multiple changes in FIG. 100, the first starting port The holding number for 20: 4 balls and the holding number for the second starting port 21: 4 balls are totaled, and the 8 balls are variably displayed. According to this configuration, if the character CRA (specific character image) does not become a variable icon, the player can select the left effect symbol 8L (identification symbol), the middle effect symbol 8C (identification symbol), and the right effect symbol for each variable display. In order to lose the opportunity to know the degree of expectation for the variation display of 8R (identification pattern), stock the reserved balls and try to get the opportunity to produce a character suggestion across multiple variations, the first start port 20 and the second start port. The game is continued so that the game ball enters 21. As a result, the player can be encouraged to operate the handle 60 .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the first effect in the character suggestive effect C straddling multiple variations in FIG. By the time the release time (predetermined time) from the start of the game to the end of the game elapses, it is possible to variably display the held ball for which the variable display has not yet started. there is In the character suggestive effect C straddling a plurality of variations in FIG. 101, the holding number for the second starting port 21 due to the start of the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21: 2 balls is variably displayed. According to this configuration, if the character CRA (specific character image) does not become a variable icon, the player can select the left effect symbol 8L (identification symbol), the middle effect symbol 8C (identification symbol), and the right effect symbol for each variable display. In order to lose the opportunity to know the degree of expectation for the variation display of 8R (identification pattern), stock the ball on hold before the opening time (predetermined time) passes and get the opportunity to produce a character suggestion across multiple variations. Then, the game is continued so that the game ball enters the second starting port 21.例文帳に追加Thereby, when the auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 is started, the player can be encouraged to operate the handle 60. - 特許庁

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a second effect is executed in which the character CRA (specific character image) is changed to a third posture different from the first posture and the second posture at the center (second position) of the display screen 7a. (Fig. 99(F) for character suggestive presentation A spanning multiple variations, and Fig. 100(F) for character suggestive presentation B spanning multiple variations). According to this configuration, after the posture of the character CRA (specific character image) changes from the first posture to the second posture, it further changes from the second posture to the third posture. It is also possible to encourage the player by making him think that the change from the second posture to the third posture has increased the expectation of winning with respect to the change.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the character suggestive effect A straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. 99, the character suggestive effect B straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. After the production, when the reach is formed by the left production pattern 8L (identification pattern), the middle production pattern 8C (identification pattern), and the right production pattern 8R (identification pattern), the expectation of winning is set high in advance. A third effect can be executed (Fig. 99 (H) for character suggestive effect A across multiple fluctuations, Fig. 100 (H) for character suggestive effect B across multiple fluctuations, 101(H)). According to this configuration, after the posture of the character CRA (specific character image) changes from the first posture to the second posture, it further changes from the second posture to the third posture, and then reach is formed. , Since the third production in which the expectation of winning is set high in advance is executed, when the character suggestive production that straddles multiple variations is performed, reach may be formed with this as an opportunity. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation that there will be no win and a sense of expectation that a hit will occur when a reach is formed.

[Modification]
A modified example of the character suggestive effect straddling a plurality of variations will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the character suggestive effect A across multiple fluctuations in FIG. 99, the character suggestive effect B across multiple fluctuations in FIG. 100, and the character suggestive effect C across multiple fluctuations in FIG. It was hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a). However, the character CRA may continue to be displayed and may move to fight the enemy character CRB as it is in a battle presentation.

[Modification 2]
In the character suggestive effect A straddling multiple variations in FIG. 99, the character suggestive effect B straddling multiple variations in FIG. 100, and the character suggestive effect C straddling multiple variations in FIG. When displayed in the center of the icon, it becomes a variation icon that indicates to the player the degree of expectation for the variation by changing the posture of the character CRA or by enlarging a part of the character CRA. A sound effect may be output (played) from the speaker 67 when the posture of the character CRA changes or when a portion of the character CRA is enlarged. Sound effects include "ton", "shwar", "kakeen", "corn", and "su". Also, the voice of the character CRA may be output (flowed) from the speaker 67 . Voices of the character CRA include "battle start", "leave it to me", "concentrate", "get fired up", "my sword is", and the like.

[Modification 3]
In the character suggestive effect A straddling multiple variations in FIG. 99, the character suggestive effect B straddling multiple variations in FIG. 100, and the character suggestive effect C straddling multiple variations in FIG. was displayed in the center of At this time, the character CRA in the second posture with the specific color may be displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. For example, when the character CRA in the second posture with yellow (gold) as the specific color is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, it is possible to suggest to the player that the win is high. In this case, when the character suggestive effect across multiple variations is started, the character CRA in the second posture shown in FIGS. 99C, 100C, and 101F is displayed in normal color. Thereafter, when the variation is highly successful, the normal color is switched to the specific color, and the character CRA in the second posture is displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the character suggestive effect A across multiple fluctuations in FIG. 99, the character suggestive effect B across multiple fluctuations in FIG. 100, and the character suggestive effect C across multiple fluctuations in FIG. It was hidden (disappeared from the display screen 7a). At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is moved (advanced) downward from the retracted position above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and moved to the advanced position forward of the display screen 7a. , and after stopping for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it may be returned to the retracted position. In this way, the appearance of the second movable accessory 15 can compensate for the feeling of loss caused by the non-display of the character CRA. In addition, since the movable role such as the second movable role 15 suggests to the player that the degree of expectation for winning is higher than when the movable role is not activated, the player can use the second movable role There is a high interest in the operation of movable accessories such as the accessory 15.

[Modification 5]
In the character suggestive effect A straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. 99, the character suggestive effect B straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. 100, and the character suggestive effect C straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. When the character suggestive effect that straddles multiple fluctuations is started and ended for the held ball that has become, the character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the player may feel the loss of the character CRA. . Therefore, the second movable accessory 15 is moved from the retracted position above the image display device 7 to the image display device 7 over a predetermined number of variations (for example, four times) after the completion of the character suggestive effect across multiple variations. An effect is selected in which the player moves (advances) downward toward the center of the display screen 7a, stops at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), and then returns to the retracted position. A high probability may be set. Since the movable role such as the second movable role 15 suggests to the player that the probability of winning is higher than when the movable role is not activated, the player is encouraged to use the second movable role There is a high interest in the operation of movable accessories such as 15. In this way, the chances of the second movable accessory 15 operating over a predetermined number of variations (for example, 4 times) after the completion of the character suggestive effect across multiple variations are increased, so that the character CRA The sense of loss caused by the non-display of is compensated for by the actuation of the second movable accessory 15.例文帳に追加In place of the second movable accessory 15, another movable accessory may operate. Even in this way, the feeling of loss caused by the non-display of the character CRA can be compensated for by the actuation of the other movable accessory 15 .

[Modification 6]
In the character suggestive effect A across multiple fluctuations in FIG. 99, the character suggestive effect B across multiple fluctuations in FIG. 100, and the character suggestive effect C across multiple fluctuations in FIG. , and when the posture of the character CRA is not changed from the second posture to another posture, the posture of the character CRA is simply maintained at the second posture. However, in the display mode of the character CRA in the second posture, regardless of whether the character CRA changes its posture from the second posture to another posture, the character CRA shakes when it changes from the second posture to another posture. A display form such as trembling or the character CRA holding his or her breath and exerting strength may be included. This makes it easier for the player to understand how the character CRA is about to change from the second posture to another posture.

[Modification 7]
In the character suggestive effect A straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. 99, the character suggestive effect B straddling multiple fluctuations in FIG. As the background image, the city image of the normal background image was used. However, at the timing when the character CRA in the second posture is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, the background image may be switched to the background image dedicated to character suggestive effect across multiple variations. The dedicated background image for character suggestive production that spans multiple variations is not normally included in the background image and is not included in the background image for battle production, and is displayed only when the character suggestive production that spans multiple variations is performed. It is a dedicated background image that will be used. As the background image dedicated to character suggestive effect across multiple fluctuations, a static background image gradated in a predetermined color system (for example, red system, blue system, yellow system, etc.) as it spreads radially from the center of the display area 7a. An image, a moving image, or a still image or moving image gradated in a predetermined color system (for example, a red system, a blue system, a yellow system, etc.) as it goes up and down from the horizontal line passing through the center of the display area 7a. . It should be noted that when the character suggestive effect across multiple variations is completed, the background image dedicated to character suggestive effect across multiple variations is switched to the normal background image again.

[Modification 8]
Character suggestive effect A straddling multiple variations in FIG. 99, character suggestive effect B straddling multiple variations in FIG. 100, and character suggestive effect C straddling multiple variations in FIG. Alternatively, other effects may be added.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine that stops and displays an identification pattern indicating the result of a lottery on a display device through a variable display,
The display device can display a plurality of types of images,
After the specific character image is displayed, the specific character image is displayed as a variation icon in a state straddling a plurality of display variations, and the specific character image suggests the degree of expectation for the variation display of the identification pattern for each variation display. It is possible to execute the first production to
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
In the first effect, after displaying the specific character image at a first position in a first posture, the specific character image is moved to a second position different from the first position and displayed in a second posture different from the first position. Change to the posture and use it as the variation icon;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2,
In the first effect, the size of the specific character image in the second posture at the second position is made larger than the size of the specific character image in the first posture at the first position,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-3,
In the first effect, a variable display is performed for a held ball whose variable display has not yet started immediately before the specific character image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-3,
In the first effect, a new held ball whose variable display has not yet started is variably displayed within a predetermined period of time after the specific character image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-5,
executing a second effect of changing the specific character image at the second position to a third posture different from the first posture and the second posture;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B6-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-6,
After the second effect, when the reach is formed by the identification pattern, a third effect in which the expectation of winning is set high in advance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The melody-related effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. FIG. This melody-related production is executed during the variation production of decorative patterns. That is, the sub-control board 90 analyzes the command received from the main control board 80, and if it contains an instruction to execute a melody-related effect, reads out the corresponding acoustic data from the sub-ROM 93 and transmits it via the voice control board 107. to output sound from the speaker 67. In addition, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a melody-related effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

FIG. 102 is a first diagram for explaining the melody-related effect. FIG. 103 is a second diagram for explaining the melody-related effect. FIG. 104 is a third diagram for explaining the melody-related effect. The melody-related effect is an effect in which a specific melody starts when the pattern starts to fluctuate, and when the pattern stops after the pattern fluctuates, the specific melody ends.

The gaming machine 1 reads the corresponding acoustic data from the sub ROM 93 and causes the speaker 67 to output sound through the audio control board 107 . The sub ROM 93 stores X melody data, Xf melody data, Xd melody data, and Y melody data as acoustic data. The X melody data is data for causing the speaker 67 to output the X melody. The X melody is composed of a series of sounds having a predetermined pitch and duration, which progress (played) continuously according to the rhythm, and the performance is completed in a predetermined performance period. As shown in FIG. 102, the X melody includes four parts (bars) of A part, B part, C part and D part. The gaming machine 1 can repeatedly generate the X melody.

The Xf melody data is data for causing the speaker 67 to output the Xf melody. The Xf melody is the faster tempo of the X melody. Therefore, the period until the performance of the Xf melody is completed (performance period) is shorter than that of the Xf melody. As shown in FIG. 102, the Xf melody includes four parts (bars) of an Af part, a Bf part, a Cf part, and a Df part. The Af part speeds up the A part, the Bf part speeds up the B part, the Cf part speeds up the C part, and the Df part speeds up the D part. It's made faster. The gaming machine 1 can repeatedly generate the Xf melody.

The Xd melody data is data for causing the speaker 67 to output the Xd melody. The Xd melody is a variation of the X melody. Here, the sound (scale) is higher than that of the X melody. The period until the performance of the Xd melody is completed (performance period) is the same as that of the X melody. As shown in FIG. 103, the Xd melody includes four parts (bars) of an Ad part, a Bd part, a Cd part, and a Dd part. The Ad part is a raised scale of the A part, the Bd part is a raised scale of the B part, the Cd part is a raised scale of the C part, and the Dd part is a raised scale of the D part. It is raised. The gaming machine 1 can repeatedly generate the Xd melody.

The Y melody data is data for causing the speaker 67 to output the Y melody. As shown in FIG. 103, the Y melody has no relation to the X melody, and the playing period is also different from the X melody. Here, the playing period of the Y melody is longer than the playing period of the X melody. The gaming machine 1 can repeatedly generate the Y melody.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the gaming machine 1 is capable of selecting a plurality of presentation modes with different background images, music, etc. during the normal state variation presentation. The performance mode is switched by the player operating the select button 68. - 特許庁The game machine 1 is set with a "battle presentation mode", a "dark presentation mode" and a "happy presentation mode", and one of these presentation modes is executed. In the "battle production mode", an image of a fight between an enemy character and an ally character is displayed. A dark background is displayed in the "dark production mode". In the "happy production mode", a heart background image is displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L2, 8C2, 8R2 are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L2, a middle decorative pattern 8C2, and a right decorative pattern 8R2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the set of patterns is displayed in a variable manner. represents the variable display of special symbols (special symbol fluctuation), and the special symbol lottery result is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special design here may be either the first special design or the second special design. In FIG. 93(A), the decorative symbols 8L2, 8C2 and 8R2 are respectively variably displayed corresponding to the current special figure variation (pertinent variation). The effect mode suggesting image is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a and suggests the currently selected effect mode. Since the "battle effect mode" is selected here, the character image of "battle effect mode" is displayed inside the rectangular image.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1, at the start of variation, the variation pattern to be executed by referring to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in steps S1403 and 1409 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is determined. Select (Figs. 24, 25). When a specific variation pattern (here, referred to as "variation pattern 1") is selected from the variation pattern determination table T6, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed in which the symbols stop and the X melody ends. That is, the start and stop of the special figure fluctuation are configured to coincide with the start and stop of the X melody. Here, the performance period of the X melody and the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation are designed to match. Here, "matching" means generally matching, and includes a time lag (for example, about 2 seconds). Here, since the start and stop of variation of the special symbols coincide with the start and stop of variation of the decorative symbols, the start and stop of the X melody also coincide with the start and stop of the variation of the decorative symbols. Also, silent portions may be included at the start and end of the X melody. Here, "variation pattern 1" is a variation pattern (FIG. 10) selected in the normal state.

When a variation pattern different from the variation pattern 1 (here, referred to as "variation pattern 2") is selected from the variation pattern determination table T6, as shown in FIG. During the fluctuation, the X melody of the first day ends and the second X melody starts, and after the fluctuation of the patterns, the patterns stop and the second X melody ends. That is, even in this case, the start and stop of the special figure variation are configured to coincide with the start and stop of the X melody. Here, the performance period for two times of the X melody and the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation are designed to match. Here, "matching" means generally matching, and includes a time lag (for example, about 2 seconds). Here, since the start and stop of variation of the special symbols coincide with the start and stop of variation of the decorative symbols, the start and stop of the X melody also coincide with the start and stop of the variation of the decorative symbols. Also, silent portions may be included at the start and end of the X melody. Here, "variation pattern 2" is a longer variation pattern than "variation pattern 1" and is selected in the normal state (Fig. 11).

When a variation pattern different from the variation patterns 1 and 2 (here, referred to as "variation pattern 3") is selected from the variation pattern determination table T6, as shown in FIG. At the beginning, an effect is executed in which the symbols stop after the variation of the symbols and the Xf melody ends. That is, the start and stop of the special figure fluctuation are configured to coincide with the start and stop of the Xf melody. Here, the performance period of the Xf melody and the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation are designed to match. Here, "matching" means generally matching, and includes a time lag (for example, about 2 seconds). Here, since the start and stop of variation of the special symbols coincide with the start and stop of variation of the decorative symbols, the start and stop of the Xf melody also coincide with the start and stop of the variation of the decorative symbols. Also, silent portions may be included at the start and end of the Xf melody. Here, "variation pattern 3" is a variation pattern (FIG. 11) selected during the time saving state.

When a variation pattern different from the variation patterns 1 to 3 (here, referred to as "variation pattern 4") is selected from the variation pattern determination table T6, as shown in FIG. At the beginning, the Xf melody of the first day ends during the fluctuation, the second Xf melody starts, and after the fluctuation of the pattern, the pattern stops and the second Xf melody ends. That is, even in this case, the start and stop of the special figure fluctuation are configured to coincide with the start and stop of the Xf melody. Here, the performance period for two times of the Xf melody and the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation are designed to match. Here, "matching" means generally matching, and includes a time lag (for example, about 2 seconds).
Here, since the start and stop of variation of the special symbols coincide with the start and stop of variation of the decorative symbols, the start and stop of the Xf melody also coincide with the start and stop of the variation of the decorative symbols. Also, silent portions may be included at the start and end of the Xf melody. Here, "variation pattern 4" is a variation pattern (FIG. 11) selected during the time saving state.

As described above, the fluctuation and stoppage of the special symbols coincide with the fluctuation and stoppage of the decorative symbols. is stopped (variation pattern 1), the variation of the decorative design is continued when the first X melody that started with the start of the variation of the decorative design ends, and the decorative design is continued when the second and subsequent X melodies are completed. is stopped (variation pattern 2).

Also, depending on the number of reservations at the start of the fluctuation, if the decorative pattern is stopped when the first X melody ends (variation pattern 1), and the decorative pattern is stopped when the second and subsequent X melodies end The selection ratio with respect to the case (variation pattern 2) may be changed. For example, the variation pattern table T6 (FIG. 10) at the time of non-time saving state may be changed into the following contents. "Variation pattern P15" in FIG. 10 is set as the "variation pattern 2", and "variation patterns P8 to P16" in FIG. 10 are set as the "variation pattern 1". As a result, when the number of holds is 1 to 2, the selection rate of variation pattern 2 is 100%, the selection rate of variation pattern 1 is 0%, and the variation time of reachless loss is always the playing period of X melody 2 times be the same length. On the other hand, when the number of holds is 3 to 4, the selection rate of variation pattern 2 is 0%, the selection rate of variation pattern 1 is 100%, and the variation time of reachless loss is always the same as the performance period of one X melody be length.

In addition, the variation pattern table T6 (FIG. 10) at the time of non-time-saving state may be changed into the following contents. "Variation pattern P7" in FIG. 10 is set as "variation pattern 1", and "variation patterns P8 to P10" in FIG. 10 are all set as "variation pattern 2". Further, "variation patterns P11 to P13" in FIG. 10 are all set as "variation pattern 1", and "variation pattern P14" in FIG. 10 is set as "variation pattern 2". As a result, when the number of reservations is 1 to 2, the selection rate of variation pattern 1 is about 48%, and the selection rate of variation pattern 2 is about 52%. On the other hand, when the number of reservations is 3 to 4, the selection rate of variation pattern 1 is about 86%, and the selection rate of variation pattern 2 is about 14%.

Furthermore, the tempo of the X melody may be changed according to the number of holds at the start of fluctuation. That is, depending on the number of reservations at the start of variation, there is a selection between the case where the normal tempo X melody and the variation time are matched (variation pattern 1) and the case where the fast tempo Xf melody and the variation time are matched (variation pattern 3). The ratio may be changed. For example, the variation pattern table T6 (FIG. 10) at the time of non-time saving state may be changed into the following contents. "Variation pattern P15" in FIG. 10 is set as "variation pattern 1", and "variation patterns P8 to P16" in FIG. 10 are set as "variation pattern 3". As a result, when the number of holds is 1 to 2, the selection rate of variation pattern 1 is 100%, and the selection rate of variation pattern 3 is 0%. become. On the other hand, when the number of holds is 3 to 4, the selection rate of variation pattern 1 is 0%, the selection rate of variation pattern 3 is 100%, and the variation time of reach without loss is always the same length as the performance period of Xf melody become.

In addition, the variation pattern table T6 (FIG. 10) at the time of non-time-saving state may be changed into the following contents. "Variation pattern P7" in FIG. 10 is set as "variation pattern 3", and "variation patterns P8 to P10" in FIG. 10 are all set as "variation pattern 1". Further, "variation patterns P11 to P13" in FIG. 10 are all set as the "variation pattern 3", and "variation pattern P14" in FIG. 10 is set as the "variation pattern 1". As a result, when the number of reservations is 1 to 2, the selection rate of variation pattern 3 is about 48%, and the selection rate of variation pattern 1 is about 52%. On the other hand, when the number of reservations is 3 to 4, the selection rate of variation pattern 3 is about 86%, and the selection rate of variation pattern 1 is about 14%.

As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming machine 1 is capable of selecting a plurality of performance modes with different background images, music, etc. during the normal state variation performance. When a ``variation pattern 1'' is selected when a ``battle performance mode'' is selected, an X melody starts with the start of variation of a special pattern, and after the variation of the pattern, the pattern stops and the X melody ends. When a ``variation pattern 1'' is selected when a ``dark performance mode'' is selected, the Xd melody starts with the start of variation of the special pattern, and after the variation of the pattern, the pattern stops and the Xd melody ends. When the "variation pattern 1" is selected while the "happy performance mode" is selected, the Y melody is played regardless of the timing of starting and stopping the variation of the special symbols. Since the Y melody has been reproduced in the background since the game machine 1 was powered on, the Y melody may start to fluctuate during the Y melody. In addition, there is a case where the fluctuation stops in the middle of the Y melody.

FIG. 104 shows an example of a melody-related effect. Here, an example is shown in which the player switches the production mode from "battle production mode" to "dark production mode", "happy production mode", and "battle production mode" in order during the special figure fluctuation. In the "battle production mode", there will be no sound before the start of the fluctuation. When the special figure fluctuation is started, the A part of the X melody flows (output). When the presentation mode is switched to the "dark presentation mode" while the A part is finished and the B part is playing, the Bd part is started from the part after the B part. As a result, the same melody continues even when the performance mode is switched, and the melody changes, so that the player can recognize the switching of the performance mode without a sense of incongruity.

After that, when the production mode is switched to the "happy production mode" while the Bd part is finished and the Cd part is playing, the Y melody being reproduced in the background is switched. This makes it possible to enjoy BGM that is unrelated to the start and stop of fluctuation. Thereafter, when the production mode is switched to the "battle production mode" while the Y melody is playing, the game is started from the point corresponding to the variable time (in the middle of the D part in this case). Then, the X melody ends in accordance with the stop of the special figure.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the melody-related production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, the X melody starts when the special symbols start to fluctuate, and after the special symbols fluctuate, the symbols stop and the X melody ends. According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, the speaker 67 can repeatedly generate the X melody, and the display screen 7a displays the first X melody that starts when the decorative symbols start changing. (variation pattern 1), and when the first X melody that started with the start of the variation of the decorative design ends, the variation of the decorative design is continued, and the second and subsequent X melody There is a case (variation pattern 2) in which the decorative design is stopped when is completed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with the main RAM 84 (FIG. 5) that stores the pending number, which is the number of pending winning lotteries. To change the ratio between the case of stopping decorative patterns when the first X melody ends and the case of stopping the decorative patterns when finishing the second and subsequent X melodies. According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with the main RAM 84 (FIG. 5) that stores the pending number, which is the number of pending winning lotteries. Accordingly, the tempo of X melody is changed (the selection ratio of variation pattern 1 and variation pattern 3 is changed). According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
As shown in FIGS. 102 to 104, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a display screen 7a for displaying an image corresponding to a currently selected presentation mode among a plurality of switchable presentation modes. changes the tone of the X melody corresponding to the presently selected production mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the currently selected production mode is the happy production mode, the speaker 67 generates a Y melody different from the X melody, and the display screen 7a displays the currently selected production mode. is in the happy presentation mode, the variation of the decoration pattern is started and stopped regardless of the beginning and end of the Y melody. According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Modifications of the melody-related presentation are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the melody-related effects are effects in which a specific melody starts when the special symbols start to fluctuate, and the specific melody ends when the symbols stop. However, in the melody-related production, a specific melody starts with the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols, and the specific melody may end when the normal symbols stop.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the start and stop of fluctuation of the special symbols are assumed to coincide with the start and stop of fluctuation of the decorative symbols. However, the variation start and stop of the special symbol and the variation start and stop of the decorative symbol need not coincide. In this case, the start and stop of the X melody may coincide with the start and stop of the special symbol variation, or may coincide with the start and stop of the decorative symbol variation.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the start and stop of the X melody coincide with the start and stop of the variation of the decorative pattern. The stop of fluctuation here may be a fixed stop or a temporary stop. That is, the timing at which the X melody ends may coincide with the timing at which the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, or may coincide with the timing at which the game is temporarily stopped.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, in the variation pattern 2, the two performance periods of the X melody and the variation period of the special figure variation are the same. Besides this, a variation pattern may be set in which the performance period of three or more times of the X melody and the variation period of the special figure variation match.

[Modification 5]
Variation patterns 1 to 4 are based on the game state (non-time saving state, time saving state) start port (first start port, second start port), hit/miss, presence or absence of reach, number of reservations, and more than one of the variation patterns 1 to 4 may be selected at a predetermined ratio, or one of the variation patterns 1 to 4 may always be selected.

[Mode example]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B8-1]
a pattern display means capable of displaying fluctuations and stops of patterns;
A gaming machine comprising sound generating means capable of generating a specific melody,
It is possible to execute an effect in which the specific melody starts when the pattern starts to fluctuate, and when the pattern stops after the pattern fluctuates, the specific melody ends.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-1,
The sound generating means can repeatedly generate the specific melody,
The design display means may stop the design when the first specific melody that started with the start of the pattern fluctuation ends, or when the first specific melody that started with the start of the pattern fluctuation is completed. There is a case where the variation of the pattern is continued when ending, and the pattern is stopped when the specific melody after the second time ends.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-2, further comprising:
Equipped with storage means for storing the number of reserved winning lotteries, which is the number of reserved winning lotteries,
According to the number of reservations stored in the storage means, the pattern display means may stop the pattern when the first specific melody ends, or may stop the specific melody for the second and subsequent times. changing the ratio of when the pattern is stopped when the melody ends,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B8-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-2,
Equipped with storage means for storing the number of reserved winning lotteries, which is the number of reserved winning lotteries,
The sound generation means changes the tempo of the specific melody according to the number of holds stored in the storage means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B8-1 to B8-4, further comprising:
A display means for displaying an image corresponding to a currently selected production mode among a plurality of switchable production modes,
The sound generating means changes the melody of the specific melody corresponding to the currently selected production mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B8-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-5,
The sound generating means generates another melody different from the specific melody when the currently selected production mode is a specific production mode,
The design display means starts and stops the variation of the design regardless of the beginning and end of the other melody when the currently selected performance mode is the specific performance mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the game machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from game balls to game medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes the production button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as operation units to be operated by the player. , triggers, etc. may be used. Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effect. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses display devices (main display screen 7a, sub-display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined into one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described rendering examples and/or modifications may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 includes a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a). The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

The present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and modified without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Game machine 3... Game area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Reservation image (reservation icon)
9C... Relevant pending image (suspended icon)
14 First movable accessory 15 Second movable accessory 17 Large winning opening opening start opening 20 First start opening (first ball entrance)
21 … Second starting port (second entrance)
64 Sub-display screen 69 Frame movable accessory 66 Frame lamp 81 Game control microcomputer 91 Production control microcomputer 101 Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images and operation means capable of being operated by a player,
one of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first period during which the effect mode can be switched by the player operating the operation means during the variation of the decorative pattern;
After the first period, during the same variation as the first period, a second period in which the production mode is not switched despite the operation of the operation means by the player can be executed. Yes ,
When the player operates the operation means during the second period, the performance mode is not switched during the second period, and the performance mode is switched after the variation during the second period is completed. is displayed, the production mode is switched on the standby screen after the fluctuation during the second period is completed, and the production mode suggesting image that suggests the production mode after switching is displayed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images